// dear imgui, v1.64 WIP
// (main code and documentation)

// Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp for demo code.
// Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' below for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
// Get latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
// Releases change-log at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
// Technical Support for Getting Started https://discourse.dearimgui.org/c/getting-started
// Gallery (please post your screenshots/video there!): https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1269
// Developed by Omar Cornut and every direct or indirect contributors to the GitHub.
// This library is free but I need your support to sustain development and maintenance.
// If you work for a company, please consider financial support, see README. For individuals: https://www.patreon.com/imgui

// It is recommended that you don't modify imgui.cpp! It will become difficult for you to update the library.
// Note that 'ImGui::' being a namespace, you can add functions into the namespace from your own source files, without
// modifying imgui.h or imgui.cpp. You may include imgui_internal.h to access internal data structures, but it doesn't
// come with any guarantee of forward compatibility. Discussing your changes on the GitHub Issue Tracker may lead you
// to a better solution or official support for them.

/*

 Index
 - MISSION STATEMENT
 - END-USER GUIDE
 - PROGRAMMER GUIDE (read me!)
   - Read first
   - How to update to a newer version of Dear ImGui
   - Getting started with integrating Dear ImGui in your code/engine
   - Using gamepad/keyboard navigation controls [BETA]
 - API BREAKING CHANGES (read me when you update!)
 - ISSUES & TODO LIST
 - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ), TIPS
   - How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to imgui or to my application?
   - How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
   - How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or without a label? A primer on labels and the ID Stack.
   - How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4? 
   - How can I load a different font than the default?
   - How can I easily use icons in my application?
   - How can I load multiple fonts?
   - How can I display and input non-latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
   - How can I use the drawing facilities without an ImGui window? (using ImDrawList API)
   - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and the text or lines are blurry..
   - I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around..
   - How can I help?
 - ISSUES & TODO-LIST
 - CODE


 MISSION STATEMENT
 =================

 - Easy to use to create code-driven and data-driven tools
 - Easy to use to create ad hoc short-lived tools and long-lived, more elaborate tools
 - Easy to hack and improve
 - Minimize screen real-estate usage
 - Minimize setup and maintenance
 - Minimize state storage on user side
 - Portable, minimize dependencies, run on target (consoles, phones, etc.)
 - Efficient runtime and memory consumption (NB- we do allocate when "growing" content e.g. creating a window,
   opening a tree node for the first time, etc. but a typical frame should not allocate anything)

 Designed for developers and content-creators, not the typical end-user! Some of the weaknesses includes:
 - Doesn't look fancy, doesn't animate
 - Limited layout features, intricate layouts are typically crafted in code


 END-USER GUIDE
 ==============

 - Double-click on title bar to collapse window.
 - Click upper right corner to close a window, available when 'bool* p_open' is passed to ImGui::Begin().
 - Click and drag on lower right corner to resize window (double-click to auto fit window to its contents).
 - Click and drag on any empty space to move window.
 - TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields.
 - CTRL+Click on a slider or drag box to input value as text.
 - Use mouse wheel to scroll.
 - Text editor:
   - Hold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.
   - CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.
   - CTRL+Shift+Left/Right to select words.
   - CTRL+A our Double-Click to select all.
   - CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V to use OS clipboard/
   - CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y to undo/redo.
   - ESCAPE to revert text to its original value.
   - You can apply arithmetic operators +,*,/ on numerical values. Use +- to subtract (because - would set a negative value!)
   - Controls are automatically adjusted for OSX to match standard OSX text editing operations.
 - General Keyboard controls: enable with ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard.
 - General Gamepad controls: enable with ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad. See suggested mappings in imgui.h ImGuiNavInput_ + download PNG/PSD at http://goo.gl/9LgVZW


 PROGRAMMER GUIDE
 ================

 READ FIRST

 - Read the FAQ below this section!
 - Your code creates the UI, if your code doesn't run the UI is gone! The UI can be highly dynamic, there are no construction
   or destruction steps, less data retention on your side, less state duplication, less state synchronization, less bugs.
 - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() for demo code demonstrating most features.
 - You can learn about immediate-mode gui principles at http://www.johno.se/book/imgui.html or watch http://mollyrocket.com/861

 HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI

 - Overwrite all the sources files except for imconfig.h (if you have made modification to your copy of imconfig.h)
 - Read the "API BREAKING CHANGES" section (below). This is where we list occasional API breaking changes.
   If a function/type has been renamed / or marked obsolete, try to fix the name in your code before it is permanently removed
   from the public API. If you have a problem with a missing function/symbols, search for its name in the code, there will
   likely be a comment about it. Please report any issue to the GitHub page!
 - Try to keep your copy of dear imgui reasonably up to date.

 GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE

 - Run and study the examples and demo to get acquainted with the library.
 - Add the Dear ImGui source files to your projects or using your preferred build system.
   It is recommended you build the .cpp files as part of your project and not as a library.
 - You can later customize the imconfig.h file to tweak some compilation time behavior, such as integrating imgui types with your own maths types.
 - You may be able to grab and copy a ready made imgui_impl_*** file from the examples/ folder.
 - When using Dear ImGui, your programming IDE is your friend: follow the declaration of variables, functions and types to find comments about them.
 - Dear ImGui never touches or knows about your GPU state. The only function that knows about GPU is the draw function that you provide.
   Effectively it means you can create widgets at any time in your code, regardless of considerations of being in "update" vs "render"
   phases of your own application. All rendering informatioe are stored into command-lists that you will retrieve after calling ImGui::Render().
 - Refer to the bindings and demo applications in the examples/ folder for instruction on how to setup your code.

 THIS IS HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
 EXHIBIT 1: USING THE EXAMPLE BINDINGS (imgui_impl_XXX.cpp files from the examples/ folder)

     // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
     ImGui::CreateContext();
     ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
     // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls
     // TODO: Fill optional settings of the io structure later.
     // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.

     // Initialize helper Platform and Renderer bindings (here we are using imgui_impl_win32 and imgui_impl_dx11)
     ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(hwnd);
     ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(g_pd3dDevice, g_pd3dDeviceContext);

     // Application main loop
     while (true)
     {
         // Feed inputs to dear imgui, start new frame
         ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame();
         ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame();
         ImGui::NewFrame();

         // Any application code here
         ImGui::Text("Hello, world!");

         // Render dear imgui into screen
         ImGui::Render();
         ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImGui::GetDrawData());
         g_pSwapChain->Present(1, 0);
     }
     
     // Shutdown
     ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown();
     ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown();
     ImGui::DestroyContext();

 THIS IS HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
 EXHIBIT 2: IMPLEMENTING CUSTOM BINDING / CUSTOM ENGINE

     // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
     ImGui::CreateContext();
     ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
     // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls
     // TODO: Fill optional settings of the io structure later.
     // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.

     // Build and load the texture atlas into a texture
     // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_Init() function from one of the demo Renderer)
     int width, height;
     unsigned char* pixels = NULL;
     io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height);

     // At this point you've got the texture data and you need to upload that your your graphic system:
     // After we have created the texture, store its pointer/identifier (_in whichever format your engine uses_) in 'io.Fonts->TexID'.
     // This will be passed back to your via the renderer. Basically ImTextureID == void*. Read FAQ below for details about ImTextureID.
     MyTexture* texture = MyEngine::CreateTextureFromMemoryPixels(pixels, width, height, TEXTURE_TYPE_RGBA32)
     io.Fonts->TexID = (void*)texture;

     // Application main loop
     while (true)
     {
        // Setup low-level inputs, e.g. on Win32: calling GetKeyboardState(), or write to those fields from your Windows message handlers, etc.
        // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_NewFrame() function from one of the demo Platform bindings)
        io.DeltaTime = 1.0f/60.0f;              // set the time elapsed since the previous frame (in seconds)
        io.DisplaySize.x = 1920.0f;             // set the current display width
        io.DisplaySize.y = 1280.0f;             // set the current display height here
        io.MousePos = my_mouse_pos;             // set the mouse position
        io.MouseDown[0] = my_mouse_buttons[0];  // set the mouse button states
        io.MouseDown[1] = my_mouse_buttons[1];

        // Call NewFrame(), after this point you can use ImGui::* functions anytime
        // (So you want to try calling NewFrame() as early as you can in your mainloop to be able to use imgui everywhere)
        ImGui::NewFrame();

        // Most of your application code here
        ImGui::Text("Hello, world!");
        MyGameUpdate(); // may use any ImGui functions, e.g. ImGui::Begin("My window"); ImGui::Text("Hello, world!"); ImGui::End();
        MyGameRender(); // may use any ImGui functions as well!

        // Render imgui, swap buffers
        // (You want to try calling EndFrame/Render as late as you can, to be able to use imgui in your own game rendering code)
        ImGui::EndFrame();
        ImGui::Render();
        ImDrawData* draw_data = ImGui::GetDrawData();
        MyImGuiRenderFunction(draw_data);
        SwapBuffers();
     }

     // Shutdown
     ImGui::DestroyContext();

 THIS HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE

    void void MyImGuiRenderFunction(ImDrawData* draw_data)
    {
       // TODO: Setup render state: alpha-blending enabled, no face culling, no depth testing, scissor enabled
       // TODO: Setup viewport using draw_data->DisplaySize
       // TODO: Setup orthographic projection matrix cover draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize
       // TODO: Setup shader: vertex { float2 pos, float2 uv, u32 color }, fragment shader sample color from 1 texture, multiply by vertex color.
       for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++)
       {
          const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data;  // vertex buffer generated by ImGui
          const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data;   // index buffer generated by ImGui
          for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
          {
             const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i];
             if (pcmd->UserCallback)
             {
                 pcmd->UserCallback(cmd_list, pcmd);
             }
             else
             {
                 // The texture for the draw call is specified by pcmd->TextureId.
                 // The vast majority of draw calls with use the imgui texture atlas, which value you have set yourself during initialization.
                 MyEngineBindTexture(pcmd->TextureId);

                 // We are using scissoring to clip some objects. All low-level graphics API should supports it.
                 // - If your engine doesn't support scissoring yet, you may ignore this at first. You will get some small glitches
                 //   (some elements visible outside their bounds) but you can fix that once everywhere else works!
                 // - Clipping coordinates are provided in imgui coordinates space (from draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize)
                 //   In a single viewport application, draw_data->DisplayPos will always be (0,0) and draw_data->DisplaySize will always be == io.DisplaySize.
                 //   However, in the interest of supporting multi-viewport applications in the future, always subtract draw_data->DisplayPos from
                 //   clipping bounds to convert them to your viewport space.
                 // - Note that pcmd->ClipRect contains Min+Max bounds. Some graphics API may use Min+Max, other may use Min+Size (size being Max-Min)
                 ImVec2 pos = draw_data->DisplayPos;
                 MyEngineScissor((int)(pcmd->ClipRect.x - pos.x), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.y - pos.y), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.z - pos.x), (int)(pcmd->ClipRect.w - pos.y));

                 // Render 'pcmd->ElemCount/3' indexed triangles.
                 // By default the indices ImDrawIdx are 16-bits, you can change them to 32-bits if your engine doesn't support 16-bits indices.
                 MyEngineDrawIndexedTriangles(pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer, vtx_buffer);
             }
             idx_buffer += pcmd->ElemCount;
          }
       }
    }

 - The examples/ folders contains many functional implementation of the pseudo-code above.
 - When calling NewFrame(), the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags are updated.
   They tell you if ImGui intends to use your inputs. When a flag is set you want to hide the corresponding inputs from the rest of your application.
   In both cases you need to pass on the inputs to imgui. Read the FAQ below for more information about those flags.
 - Please read the FAQ above. Amusingly, it is called a FAQ because people frequently have the same issues!

 USING GAMEPAD/KEYBOARD NAVIGATION CONTROLS [BETA]

 - The gamepad/keyboard navigation is in Beta. Ask questions and report issues at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/787
 - The initial focus was to support game controllers, but keyboard is becoming increasingly and decently usable.
 - Gamepad:
    - Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad to enable.
    - Backend: Set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad + fill the io.NavInputs[] fields before calling NewFrame().
      Note that io.NavInputs[] is cleared by EndFrame().
    - See 'enum ImGuiNavInput_' in imgui.h for a description of inputs. For each entry of io.NavInputs[], set the following values:
         0.0f= not held. 1.0f= fully held. Pass intermediate 0.0f..1.0f values for analog triggers/sticks.
    - We uses a simple >0.0f test for activation testing, and won't attempt to test for a dead-zone.
      Your code will probably need to transform your raw inputs (such as e.g. remapping your 0.2..0.9 raw input range to 0.0..1.0 imgui range, etc.).
    - You can download PNG/PSD files depicting the gamepad controls for common controllers at: goo.gl/9LgVZW.
    - If you need to share inputs between your game and the imgui parts, the easiest approach is to go all-or-nothing, with a buttons combo
      to toggle the target. Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved.
 - Keyboard:
    - Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard to enable.
      NewFrame() will automatically fill io.NavInputs[] based on your io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[] arrays.
    - When keyboard navigation is active (io.NavActive + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard), the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag
      will be set. For more advanced uses, you may want to read from:
       - io.NavActive: true when a window is focused and it doesn't have the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag set.
       - io.NavVisible: true when the navigation cursor is visible (and usually goes false when mouse is used).
       - or query focus information with e.g. IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow), IsItemFocused() etc. functions.
      Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved.
 - Mouse:
    - PS4 users: Consider emulating a mouse cursor with DualShock4 touch pad or a spare analog stick as a mouse-emulation fallback.
    - Consoles/Tablet/Phone users: Consider using a Synergy 1.x server (on your PC) + uSynergy.c (on your console/tablet/phone app) to share your PC mouse/keyboard.
    - On a TV/console system where readability may be lower or mouse inputs may be awkward, you may want to set the ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag.
      Enabling ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos instructs dear imgui to move your mouse cursor along with navigation movements.
      When enabled, the NewFrame() function may alter 'io.MousePos' and set 'io.WantSetMousePos' to notify you that it wants the mouse cursor to be moved.
      When that happens your back-end NEEDS to move the OS or underlying mouse cursor on the next frame. Some of the binding in examples/ do that.
      (If you set the NavEnableSetMousePos flag but don't honor 'io.WantSetMousePos' properly, imgui will misbehave as it will see your mouse as moving back and forth!)
      (In a setup when you may not have easy control over the mouse cursor, e.g. uSynergy.c doesn't expose moving remote mouse cursor, you may want
       to set a boolean to ignore your other external mouse positions until the external source is moved again.)


 API BREAKING CHANGES
 ====================

 Occasionally introducing changes that are breaking the API. We try to make the breakage minor and easy to fix.
 Below is a change-log of API breaking changes only. If you are using one of the functions listed, expect to have to fix some code.
 When you are not sure about a old symbol or function name, try using the Search/Find function of your IDE to look for comments or references in all imgui files.
 You can read releases logs https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases for more details.

 - 2018/08/22 (1.63) - renamed IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() to IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() for consistency with new IsItemEdited() API. Kept redirection function (will obsolete soonish as IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() is very recent).
 - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - renamed ImGuiTextEditCallback to ImGuiInputTextCallback, ImGuiTextEditCallbackData to ImGuiInputTextCallbackData for consistency. Kept redirection types (will obsolete).
 - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - removed ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ReadOnly since it is a duplication of (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly).
 - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - removed per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide beta flag in favor of a global io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges to enable the feature.
 - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink to io.ConfigCursorBlink, io.OptMacOSXBehaviors to ConfigMacOSXBehaviors for consistency.
 - 2018/07/22 (1.63) - changed ImGui::GetTime() return value from float to double to avoid accumulating floating point imprecisions over time.
 - 2018/07/08 (1.63) - style: renamed ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening to ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg for consistency with other features. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete).
 - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - renamed GetGlyphRangesChinese() to GetGlyphRangesChineseFull() to distinguish other variants and discourage using the full set.
 - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - TreeNodeEx()/TreeNodeBehavior(): the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader helper now include the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag. See Changelog for details. 
 - 2018/05/03 (1.61) - DragInt(): the default compile-time format string has been changed from "%.0f" to "%d", as we are not using integers internally any more.
                       If you used DragInt() with custom format strings, make sure you change them to use %d or an integer-compatible format.
                       To honor backward-compatibility, the DragInt() code will currently parse and modify format strings to replace %*f with %d, giving time to users to upgrade their code.
                       If you have IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS enabled, the code will instead assert! You may run a reg-exp search on your codebase for e.g. "DragInt.*%f" to help you find them.
 - 2018/04/28 (1.61) - obsoleted InputFloat() functions taking an optional "int decimal_precision" in favor of an equivalent and more flexible "const char* format",
                       consistent with other functions. Kept redirection functions (will obsolete).
 - 2018/04/09 (1.61) - IM_DELETE() helper function added in 1.60 doesn't clear the input _pointer_ reference, more consistent with expectation and allows passing r-value.
 - 2018/03/20 (1.60) - renamed io.WantMoveMouse to io.WantSetMousePos for consistency and ease of understanding (was added in 1.52, _not_ used by core and only honored by some binding ahead of merging the Nav branch).
 - 2018/03/12 (1.60) - removed ImGuiCol_CloseButton, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonActive, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonHovered as the closing cross uses regular button colors now.
 - 2018/03/08 (1.60) - changed ImFont::DisplayOffset.y to default to 0 instead of +1. Fixed rounding of Ascent/Descent to match TrueType renderer. If you were adding or subtracting to ImFont::DisplayOffset check if your fonts are correctly aligned vertically.
 - 2018/03/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGuiStyleVar_Count_ to ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT and ImGuiMouseCursor_Count_ to ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT for consistency with other public enums.
 - 2018/02/18 (1.60) - BeginDragDropSource(): temporarily removed the optional mouse_button=0 parameter because it is not really usable in many situations at the moment.
 - 2018/02/16 (1.60) - obsoleted the io.RenderDrawListsFn callback, you can call your graphics engine render function after ImGui::Render(). Use ImGui::GetDrawData() to retrieve the ImDrawData* to display.
 - 2018/02/07 (1.60) - reorganized context handling to be more explicit,
                       - YOU NOW NEED TO CALL ImGui::CreateContext() AT THE BEGINNING OF YOUR APP, AND CALL ImGui::DestroyContext() AT THE END.
                       - removed Shutdown() function, as DestroyContext() serve this purpose.
                       - you may pass a ImFontAtlas* pointer to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts. Otherwise CreateContext() will create its own font atlas instance.
                       - removed allocator parameters from CreateContext(), they are now setup with SetAllocatorFunctions(), and shared by all contexts.
                       - removed the default global context and font atlas instance, which were confusing for users of DLL reloading and users of multiple contexts.
 - 2018/01/31 (1.60) - moved sample TTF files from extra_fonts/ to misc/fonts/. If you loaded files directly from the imgui repo you may need to update your paths.
 - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowHovered() in favor of IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowFocused() in favor of IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2018/01/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGuiSizeConstraintCallback to ImGuiSizeCallback, ImGuiSizeConstraintCallbackData to ImGuiSizeCallbackData.
 - 2017/12/29 (1.60) - removed CalcItemRectClosestPoint() which was weird and not really used by anyone except demo code. If you need it it's easy to replicate on your side.
 - 2017/12/24 (1.53) - renamed the emblematic ShowTestWindow() function to ShowDemoWindow(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: renamed style.AntiAliasedShapes to style.AntiAliasedFill for consistency and as a way to explicitly break code that manipulate those flag at runtime. You can now manipulate ImDrawList::Flags
 - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: removed 'bool anti_aliased = true' final parameter of ImDrawList::AddPolyline() and ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(). Prefer manipulating ImDrawList::Flags if you need to toggle them during the frame.
 - 2017/12/14 (1.53) - using the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag on a child window forwards the mouse wheel event to the parent window, unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set.
 - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - renamed GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() to GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
                     - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/12/12 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlapMode to ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete).
 - 2017/12/10 (1.53) - removed SetNextWindowContentWidth(), prefer using SetNextWindowContentSize(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/11/27 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTextBuffer::append() helper to appendf(), appendv() to appendfv(). If you copied the 'Log' demo in your code, it uses appendv() so that needs to be renamed.
 - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style, Begin: removed ImGuiWindowFlags_ShowBorders window flag. Borders are now fully set up in the ImGuiStyle structure (see e.g. style.FrameBorderSize, style.WindowBorderSize). Use ImGui::ShowStyleEditor() to look them up.
                       Please note that the style system will keep evolving (hopefully stabilizing in Q1 2018), and so custom styles will probably subtly break over time. It is recommended you use the StyleColorsClassic(), StyleColorsDark(), StyleColorsLight() functions.
 - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: removed ImGuiCol_ComboBg in favor of combo boxes using ImGuiCol_PopupBg for consistency.
 - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg to ImGuiCol_ChildBg.
 - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed style.ChildWindowRounding to style.ChildRounding, ImGuiStyleVar_ChildWindowRounding to ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding.
 - 2017/11/02 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() in favor of using IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows);
 - 2017/10/24 (1.52) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCS to IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS for consistency.
 - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - changed IsWindowHovered() default parameters behavior to return false if an item is active in another window (e.g. click-dragging item from another window to this window). You can use the newly introduced IsWindowHovered() flags to requests this specific behavior if you need it.
 - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - marked IsItemHoveredRect()/IsMouseHoveringWindow() as obsolete, in favor of using the newly introduced flags for IsItemHovered() and IsWindowHovered(). See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1382 for details.
                       removed the IsItemRectHovered()/IsWindowRectHovered() names introduced in 1.51 since they were merely more consistent names for the two functions we are now obsoleting.
 - 2017/10/17 (1.52) - marked the old 5-parameters version of Begin() as obsolete (still available). Use SetNextWindowSize()+Begin() instead!
 - 2017/10/11 (1.52) - renamed AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() to AlignTextToFramePadding(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/09/25 (1.52) - removed SetNextWindowPosCenter() because SetNextWindowPos() now has the optional pivot information to do the same and more. Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/08/25 (1.52) - io.MousePos needs to be set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) when mouse is unavailable/missing. Previously ImVec2(-1,-1) was enough but we now accept negative mouse coordinates. In your binding if you need to support unavailable mouse, make sure to replace "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-1,-1)" with "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX)".
 - 2017/08/22 (1.51) - renamed IsItemHoveredRect() to IsItemRectHovered(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). -> (1.52) use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly)!
                     - renamed IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() to IsAnyWindowHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
                     - renamed IsMouseHoveringWindow() to IsWindowRectHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - renamed GetStyleColName() to GetStyleColorName() for consistency.
 - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - added PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col) overload, which _might_ cause an "ambiguous call" compilation error if you are using ImColor() with implicit cast. Cast to ImU32 or ImVec4 explicily to fix.
 - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - marked the weird IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro as obsolete. prefer using the more explicit ImGuiOnceUponAFrame.
 - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - changed parameter order for BeginPopupContextWindow() from (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items) to (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items). Note that most calls relied on default parameters completely.
 - 2017/08/13 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiCol_Columns*** to ImGuiCol_Separator***. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete).
 - 2017/08/11 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiSetCond_*** types and flags to ImGuiCond_***. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete).
 - 2017/08/09 (1.51) - removed ValueColor() helpers, they are equivalent to calling Text(label) + SameLine() + ColorButton().
 - 2017/08/08 (1.51) - removed ColorEditMode() and ImGuiColorEditMode in favor of ImGuiColorEditFlags and parameters to the various Color*() functions. The SetColorEditOptions() allows to initialize default but the user can still change them with right-click context menu.
                     - changed prototype of 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], bool show_alpha = true)' to 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0)', where passing flags = 0x01 is a safe no-op (hello dodgy backward compatibility!). - check and run the demo window, under "Color/Picker Widgets", to understand the various new options.
                     - changed prototype of rarely used 'ColorButton(ImVec4 col, bool small_height = false, bool outline_border = true)' to 'ColorButton(const char* desc_id, ImVec4 col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, ImVec2 size = ImVec2(0,0))'
 - 2017/07/20 (1.51) - removed IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(ImVec2), which was partly broken and misleading. ASSERT + redirect user to io.WantCaptureMouse
 - 2017/05/26 (1.50) - removed ImFontConfig::MergeGlyphCenterV in favor of a more multipurpose ImFontConfig::GlyphOffset.
 - 2017/05/01 (1.50) - renamed ImDrawList::PathFill() (rarely used directly) to ImDrawList::PathFillConvex() for clarity.
 - 2016/11/06 (1.50) - BeginChild(const char*) now applies the stack id to the provided label, consistently with other functions as it should always have been. It shouldn't affect you unless (extremely unlikely) you were appending multiple times to a same child from different locations of the stack id. If that's the case, generate an id with GetId() and use it instead of passing string to BeginChild().
 - 2016/10/15 (1.50) - avoid 'void* user_data' parameter to io.SetClipboardTextFn/io.GetClipboardTextFn pointers. We pass io.ClipboardUserData to it.
 - 2016/09/25 (1.50) - style.WindowTitleAlign is now a ImVec2 (ImGuiAlign enum was removed). set to (0.5f,0.5f) for horizontal+vertical centering, (0.0f,0.0f) for upper-left, etc.
 - 2016/07/30 (1.50) - SameLine(x) with x>0.0f is now relative to left of column/group if any, and not always to left of window. This was sort of always the intent and hopefully breakage should be minimal.
 - 2016/05/12 (1.49) - title bar (using ImGuiCol_TitleBg/ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive colors) isn't rendered over a window background (ImGuiCol_WindowBg color) anymore.
                       If your TitleBg/TitleBgActive alpha was 1.0f or you are using the default theme it will not affect you.
                       If your TitleBg/TitleBgActive alpha was <1.0f you need to tweak your custom theme to readjust for the fact that we don't draw a WindowBg background behind the title bar.
                       This helper function will convert an old TitleBg/TitleBgActive color into a new one with the same visual output, given the OLD color and the OLD WindowBg color.
                           ImVec4 ConvertTitleBgCol(const ImVec4& win_bg_col, const ImVec4& title_bg_col)
                           {
                               float new_a = 1.0f - ((1.0f - win_bg_col.w) * (1.0f - title_bg_col.w)), k = title_bg_col.w / new_a;
                               return ImVec4((win_bg_col.x * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.x) * k, (win_bg_col.y * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.y) * k, (win_bg_col.z * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.z) * k, new_a);
                           }
                       If this is confusing, pick the RGB value from title bar from an old screenshot and apply this as TitleBg/TitleBgActive. Or you may just create TitleBgActive from a tweaked TitleBg color.
 - 2016/05/07 (1.49) - removed confusing set of GetInternalState(), GetInternalStateSize(), SetInternalState() functions. Now using CreateContext(), DestroyContext(), GetCurrentContext(), SetCurrentContext().
 - 2016/05/02 (1.49) - renamed SetNextTreeNodeOpened() to SetNextTreeNodeOpen(), no redirection.
 - 2016/05/01 (1.49) - obsoleted old signature of CollapsingHeader(const char* label, const char* str_id = NULL, bool display_frame = true, bool default_open = false) as extra parameters were badly designed and rarely used. You can replace the "default_open = true" flag in new API with CollapsingHeader(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen).
 - 2016/04/26 (1.49) - changed ImDrawList::PushClipRect(ImVec4 rect) to ImDrawList::PushClipRect(Imvec2 min,ImVec2 max,bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect=false). Note that higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() is preferable because it will clip at logic/widget level, whereas ImDrawList::PushClipRect() only affect your renderer.
 - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - removed style.WindowFillAlphaDefault setting which was redundant. Bake default BG alpha inside style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] and all other Bg color values. (ref github issue #337).
 - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - renamed ImGuiCol_TooltipBg to ImGuiCol_PopupBg, used by popups/menus and tooltips. popups/menus were previously using ImGuiCol_WindowBg. (ref github issue #337)
 - 2016/03/21 (1.48) - renamed GetWindowFont() to GetFont(), GetWindowFontSize() to GetFontSize(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2016/03/02 (1.48) - InputText() completion/history/always callbacks: if you modify the text buffer manually (without using DeleteChars()/InsertChars() helper) you need to maintain the BufTextLen field. added an assert.
 - 2016/01/23 (1.48) - fixed not honoring exact width passed to PushItemWidth(), previously it would add extra FramePadding.x*2 over that width. if you had manual pixel-perfect alignment in place it might affect you.
 - 2015/12/27 (1.48) - fixed ImDrawList::AddRect() which used to render a rectangle 1 px too large on each axis.
 - 2015/12/04 (1.47) - renamed Color() helpers to ValueColor() - dangerously named, rarely used and probably to be made obsolete.
 - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - with the addition of horizontal scrollbar we made various fixes to inconsistencies with dealing with cursor position.
                       GetCursorPos()/SetCursorPos() functions now include the scrolled amount. It shouldn't affect the majority of users, but take note that SetCursorPosX(100.0f) puts you at +100 from the starting x position which may include scrolling, not at +100 from the window left side.
                       GetContentRegionMax()/GetWindowContentRegionMin()/GetWindowContentRegionMax() functions allow include the scrolled amount. Typically those were used in cases where no scrolling would happen so it may not be a problem, but watch out!
 - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - renamed style.ScrollbarWidth to style.ScrollbarSize
 - 2015/08/05 (1.44) - split imgui.cpp into extra files: imgui_demo.cpp imgui_draw.cpp imgui_internal.h that you need to add to your project.
 - 2015/07/18 (1.44) - fixed angles in ImDrawList::PathArcTo(), PathArcToFast() (introduced in 1.43) being off by an extra PI for no justifiable reason
 - 2015/07/14 (1.43) - add new ImFontAtlas::AddFont() API. For the old AddFont***, moved the 'font_no' parameter of ImFontAtlas::AddFont** functions to the ImFontConfig structure.
                       you need to render your textured triangles with bilinear filtering to benefit from sub-pixel positioning of text.
 - 2015/07/08 (1.43) - switched rendering data to use indexed rendering. this is saving a fair amount of CPU/GPU and enables us to get anti-aliasing for a marginal cost.
                       this necessary change will break your rendering function! the fix should be very easy. sorry for that :(
                     - if you are using a vanilla copy of one of the imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp provided in the example, you just need to update your copy and you can ignore the rest.
                     - the signature of the io.RenderDrawListsFn handler has changed!
                       old: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawList** const cmd_lists, int cmd_lists_count)
                       new: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawData* draw_data).
                         argument:   'cmd_lists' becomes 'draw_data->CmdLists', 'cmd_lists_count' becomes 'draw_data->CmdListsCount'
                         ImDrawList: 'commands' becomes 'CmdBuffer', 'vtx_buffer' becomes 'VtxBuffer', 'IdxBuffer' is new.
                         ImDrawCmd:  'vtx_count' becomes 'ElemCount', 'clip_rect' becomes 'ClipRect', 'user_callback' becomes 'UserCallback', 'texture_id' becomes 'TextureId'.
                     - each ImDrawList now contains both a vertex buffer and an index buffer. For each command, render ElemCount/3 triangles using indices from the index buffer.
                     - if you REALLY cannot render indexed primitives, you can call the draw_data->DeIndexAllBuffers() method to de-index the buffers. This is slow and a waste of CPU/GPU. Prefer using indexed rendering!
                     - refer to code in the examples/ folder or ask on the GitHub if you are unsure of how to upgrade. please upgrade!
 - 2015/07/10 (1.43) - changed SameLine() parameters from int to float.
 - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed SetScrollPosHere() to SetScrollFromCursorPos(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed GetScrollPosY() to GetScrollY(). Necessary to reduce confusion along with other scrolling functions, because positions (e.g. cursor position) are not equivalent to scrolling amount.
 - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed ImageButton() default bg_col parameter from (0,0,0,1) (black) to (0,0,0,0) (transparent) - makes a difference when texture have transparence
 - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed Selectable() API from (label, selected, size) to (label, selected, flags, size). Size override should have been rarely be used. Sorry!
 - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed GetWindowCollapsed() to IsWindowCollapsed() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed IsRectClipped() to IsRectVisible() for consistency. Note that return value is opposite! Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
 - 2015/05/27 (1.40) - removed the third 'repeat_if_held' parameter from Button() - sorry! it was rarely used and inconsistent. Use PushButtonRepeat(true) / PopButtonRepeat() to enable repeat on desired buttons.
 - 2015/05/11 (1.40) - changed BeginPopup() API, takes a string identifier instead of a bool. ImGui needs to manage the open/closed state of popups. Call OpenPopup() to actually set the "open" state of a popup. BeginPopup() returns true if the popup is opened.
 - 2015/05/03 (1.40) - removed style.AutoFitPadding, using style.WindowPadding makes more sense (the default values were already the same).
 - 2015/04/13 (1.38) - renamed IsClipped() to IsRectClipped(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
 - 2015/04/09 (1.38) - renamed ImDrawList::AddArc() to ImDrawList::AddArcFast() for compatibility with future API
 - 2015/04/03 (1.38) - removed ImGuiCol_CheckHovered, ImGuiCol_CheckActive, replaced with the more general ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive.
 - 2014/04/03 (1.38) - removed support for passing -FLT_MAX..+FLT_MAX as the range for a SliderFloat(). Use DragFloat() or Inputfloat() instead.
 - 2015/03/17 (1.36) - renamed GetItemBoxMin()/GetItemBoxMax()/IsMouseHoveringBox() to GetItemRectMin()/GetItemRectMax()/IsMouseHoveringRect(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
 - 2015/03/15 (1.36) - renamed style.TreeNodeSpacing to style.IndentSpacing, ImGuiStyleVar_TreeNodeSpacing to ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
 - 2015/03/13 (1.36) - renamed GetWindowIsFocused() to IsWindowFocused(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
 - 2015/03/08 (1.35) - renamed style.ScrollBarWidth to style.ScrollbarWidth (casing)
 - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed OpenNextNode(bool) to SetNextTreeNodeOpened(bool, ImGuiSetCond). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
 - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed ImGuiSetCondition_*** to ImGuiSetCond_***, and _FirstUseThisSession becomes _Once.
 - 2015/02/11 (1.32) - changed text input callback ImGuiTextEditCallback return type from void-->int. reserved for future use, return 0 for now.
 - 2015/02/10 (1.32) - renamed GetItemWidth() to CalcItemWidth() to clarify its evolving behavior
 - 2015/02/08 (1.31) - renamed GetTextLineSpacing() to GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
 - 2015/02/01 (1.31) - removed IO.MemReallocFn (unused)
 - 2015/01/19 (1.30) - renamed ImGuiStorage::GetIntPtr()/GetFloatPtr() to GetIntRef()/GetIntRef() because Ptr was conflicting with actual pointer storage functions.
 - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - big font/image API change! now loads TTF file. allow for multiple fonts. no need for a PNG loader.
              (1.30) - removed GetDefaultFontData(). uses io.Fonts->GetTextureData*() API to retrieve uncompressed pixels.
                       font init:  const void* png_data; unsigned int png_size; ImGui::GetDefaultFontData(NULL, NULL, &png_data, &png_size); <..Upload texture to GPU..>
                       became:     unsigned char* pixels; int width, height; io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); <..Upload texture to GPU>; io.Fonts->TexId = YourTextureIdentifier;
                       you now more flexibility to load multiple TTF fonts and manage the texture buffer for internal needs.
                       it is now recommended that you sample the font texture with bilinear interpolation.
              (1.30) - added texture identifier in ImDrawCmd passed to your render function (we can now render images). make sure to set io.Fonts->TexID.
              (1.30) - removed IO.PixelCenterOffset (unnecessary, can be handled in user projection matrix)
              (1.30) - removed ImGui::IsItemFocused() in favor of ImGui::IsItemActive() which handles all widgets
 - 2014/12/10 (1.18) - removed SetNewWindowDefaultPos() in favor of new generic API SetNextWindowPos(pos, ImGuiSetCondition_FirstUseEver)
 - 2014/11/28 (1.17) - moved IO.Font*** options to inside the IO.Font-> structure (FontYOffset, FontTexUvForWhite, FontBaseScale, FontFallbackGlyph)
 - 2014/11/26 (1.17) - reworked syntax of IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro to increase compiler compatibility
 - 2014/11/07 (1.15) - renamed IsHovered() to IsItemHovered()
 - 2014/10/02 (1.14) - renamed IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_CPP to IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL and imgui_user.cpp to imgui_user.inl (more IDE friendly)
 - 2014/09/25 (1.13) - removed 'text_end' parameter from IO.SetClipboardTextFn (the string is now always zero-terminated for simplicity)
 - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - renamed SetFontScale() to SetWindowFontScale()
 - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - moved IM_MALLOC/IM_REALLOC/IM_FREE preprocessor defines to IO.MemAllocFn/IO.MemReallocFn/IO.MemFreeFn
 - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - removed IO.FontHeight (now computed automatically)
 - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - moved IMGUI_FONT_TEX_UV_FOR_WHITE preprocessor define to IO.FontTexUvForWhite
 - 2014/08/28 (1.09) - changed the behavior of IO.PixelCenterOffset following various rendering fixes


 ISSUES & TODO-LIST
 ==================
 See TODO.txt


 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ), TIPS
 ======================================

 Q: How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to imgui or to my application?
 A: You can read the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags from the ImGuiIO structure (e.g. if (ImGui::GetIO().WantCaptureMouse) { ... } )
    - When 'io.WantCaptureMouse' is set, imgui wants to use your mouse state, and you may want to discard/hide the inputs from the rest of your application.
    - When 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' is set, imgui wants to use your keyboard state, and you may want to discard/hide the inputs from the rest of your application.
    - When 'io.WantTextInput' is set to may want to notify your OS to popup an on-screen keyboard, if available (e.g. on a mobile phone, or console OS).
    Note: you should always pass your mouse/keyboard inputs to imgui, even when the io.WantCaptureXXX flag are set false.
     This is because imgui needs to detect that you clicked in the void to unfocus its windows.
    Note: The 'io.WantCaptureMouse' is more accurate that any attempt to "check if the mouse is hovering a window" (don't do that!).
     It handle mouse dragging correctly (both dragging that started over your application or over an imgui window) and handle e.g. modal windows blocking inputs.
     Those flags are updated by ImGui::NewFrame(). Preferably read the flags after calling NewFrame() if you can afford it, but reading them before is also
     perfectly fine, as the bool toggle fairly rarely. If you have on a touch device, you might find use for an early call to UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags().
    Note: Text input widget releases focus on "Return KeyDown", so the subsequent "Return KeyUp" event that your application receive will typically
     have 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard=false'. Depending on your application logic it may or not be inconvenient. You might want to track which key-downs
     were targeted for Dear ImGui, e.g. with an array of bool, and filter out the corresponding key-ups.)

 Q: How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
 A: Short explanation:
    - You may use functions such as ImGui::Image(), ImGui::ImageButton() or lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() to emit draw calls that will use your own textures.
    - Actual textures are identified in a way that is up to the user/engine.
    - Loading image files from the disk and turning them into a texture is not within the scope of Dear ImGui (for a good reason). 
      Please read documentations or tutorials on your graphics API to understand how to display textures on the screen before moving onward.

    Long explanation:
    - Dear ImGui's job is to create "meshes", defined in a renderer-agnostic format made of draw commands and vertices.
      At the end of the frame those meshes (ImDrawList) will be displayed by your rendering function. They are made up of textured polygons and the code
      to render them is generally fairly short (a few dozen lines). In the examples/ folder we provide functions for popular graphics API (OpenGL, DirectX, etc.).
    - Each rendering function decides on a data type to represent "textures". The concept of what is a "texture" is entirely tied to your underlying engine/graphics API.
      We carry the information to identify a "texture" in the ImTextureID type. 
      ImTextureID is nothing more that a void*, aka 4/8 bytes worth of data: just enough to store 1 pointer or 1 integer of your choice.
      Dear ImGui doesn't know or understand what you are storing in ImTextureID, it merely pass ImTextureID values until they reach your rendering function.
    - In the examples/ bindings, for each graphics API binding we decided on a type that is likely to be a good representation for specifying 
      an image from the end-user perspective. This is what the _examples_ rendering functions are using:

         OpenGL:     ImTextureID = GLuint                       (see ImGui_ImplGlfwGL3_RenderDrawData() function in imgui_impl_glfw_gl3.cpp)
         DirectX9:   ImTextureID = LPDIRECT3DTEXTURE9           (see ImGui_ImplDX9_RenderDrawData()     function in imgui_impl_dx9.cpp)
         DirectX11:  ImTextureID = ID3D11ShaderResourceView*    (see ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData()    function in imgui_impl_dx11.cpp)
         DirectX12:  ImTextureID = D3D12_GPU_DESCRIPTOR_HANDLE  (see ImGui_ImplDX12_RenderDrawData()    function in imgui_impl_dx12.cpp)

      For example, in the OpenGL example binding we store raw OpenGL texture identifier (GLuint) inside ImTextureID. 
      Whereas in the DirectX11 example binding we store a pointer to ID3D11ShaderResourceView inside ImTextureID, which is a higher-level structure 
      tying together both the texture and information about its format and how to read it.
    - If you have a custom engine built over e.g. OpenGL, instead of passing GLuint around you may decide to use a high-level data type to carry information about
      the texture as well as how to display it (shaders, etc.). The decision of what to use as ImTextureID can always be made better knowing how your codebase
      is designed. If your engine has high-level data types for "textures" and "material" then you may want to use them.
      If you are starting with OpenGL or DirectX or Vulkan and haven't built much of a rendering engine over them, keeping the default ImTextureID 
      representation suggested by the example bindings is probably the best choice.
      (Advanced users may also decide to keep a low-level type in ImTextureID, and use ImDrawList callback and pass information to their renderer)

    User code may do:

        // Cast our texture type to ImTextureID / void*
        MyTexture* texture = g_CoffeeTableTexture;
        ImGui::Image((void*)texture, ImVec2(texture->Width, texture->Height)); 

    The renderer function called after ImGui::Render() will receive that same value that the user code passed:

        // Cast ImTextureID / void* stored in the draw command as our texture type
        MyTexture* texture = (MyTexture*)pcmd->TextureId;
        MyEngineBindTexture2D(texture);

    Once you understand this design you will understand that loading image files and turning them into displayable textures is not within the scope of Dear ImGui.
    This is by design and is actually a good thing, because it means your code has full control over your data types and how you display them.
    If you want to display an image file (e.g. PNG file) into the screen, please refer to documentation and tutorials for the graphics API you are using.

    Here's a simplified OpenGL example using stb_image.h:

        // Use stb_image.h to load a PNG from disk and turn it into raw RGBA pixel data:
        #define STB_IMAGE_IMPLEMENTATION
        #include <stb_image.h>
        [...]
        int my_image_width, my_image_height;
        unsigned char* my_image_data = stbi_load("my_image.png", &my_image_width, &my_image_height, NULL, 4);

        // Turn the RGBA pixel data into an OpenGL texture:
        GLuint my_opengl_texture;
        glGenTextures(1, &my_opengl_texture);
        glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, my_opengl_texture);
        glPixelStorei(GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH, 0);
        glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_RGBA, image_width, image_height, 0, GL_RGBA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, image_data);

        // Now that we have an OpenGL texture, assuming our imgui rendering function (imgui_impl_xxx.cpp file) takes GLuint as ImTextureID, we can display it:
        ImGui::Image((void*)(intptr_t)my_opengl_texture, ImVec2(my_image_width, my_image_height));

    C/C++ tip: a void* is pointer-sized storage. You may safely store any pointer or integer into it by casting your value to ImTexture / void*, and vice-versa. 
    Because both end-points (user code and rendering function) are under your control, you know exactly what is stored inside the ImTexture / void*.
    Examples:

        GLuint my_tex = XXX;
        void* my_void_ptr;
        my_void_ptr = (void*)(intptr_t)my_tex;                  // cast a GLuint into a void* (we don't take its address! we literally store the value inside the pointer)
        my_tex = (GLuint)(intptr_t)my_void_ptr;                 // cast a void* into a GLuint

        ID3D11ShaderResourceView* my_dx11_srv = XXX;
        void* my_void_ptr;
        my_void_ptr = (void*)my_dx11_srv;                       // cast a ID3D11ShaderResourceView* into an opaque void*
        my_dx11_srv = (ID3D11ShaderResourceView*)my_void_ptr;   // cast a void* into a ID3D11ShaderResourceView*

    Finally, you may call ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow() to explore/visualize/understand how the ImDrawList are generated.

 Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label or without a label?
 Q: I have multiple widgets with the same label, and only the first one works. Why is that?
 A: A primer on labels and the ID Stack...

    Dear ImGui internally need to uniquely identify UI elements.
    Elements that are typically not clickable (such as calls to the Text functions) don't need an ID.
    Interactive widgets (such as calls to Button buttons) need a unique ID. 
    Unique ID are used internally to track active widgets and occasionally associate state to widgets.
    Unique ID are implicitly built from the hash of multiple elements that identify the "path" to the UI element.

   - Unique ID are often derived from a string label:

       Button("OK");          // Label = "OK",     ID = hash of (..., "OK")
       Button("Cancel");      // Label = "Cancel", ID = hash of (..., "Cancel")

   - ID are uniquely scoped within windows, tree nodes, etc. which all pushes to the ID stack. Having
     two buttons labeled "OK" in different windows or different tree locations is fine.
     We used "..." above to signify whatever was already pushed to the ID stack previously:

       Begin("MyWindow");
       Button("OK");          // Label = "OK",     ID = hash of ("MyWindow", "OK")
       End();

   - If you have a same ID twice in the same location, you'll have a conflict:

       Button("OK");
       Button("OK");          // ID collision! Interacting with either button will trigger the first one.

     Fear not! this is easy to solve and there are many ways to solve it!

   - Solving ID conflict in a simple/local context:
     When passing a label you can optionally specify extra ID information within string itself.
     Use "##" to pass a complement to the ID that won't be visible to the end-user.
     This helps solving the simple collision cases when you know e.g. at compilation time which items
     are going to be created:

       Begin("MyWindow");
       Button("Play");        // Label = "Play",   ID = hash of ("MyWindow", "Play")
       Button("Play##foo1");  // Label = "Play",   ID = hash of ("MyWindow", "Play##foo1")  // Different from above
       Button("Play##foo2");  // Label = "Play",   ID = hash of ("MyWindow", "Play##foo2")  // Different from above
       End();

   - If you want to completely hide the label, but still need an ID:

       Checkbox("##On", &b);  // Label = "",       ID = hash of (..., "##On")   // No visible label!

   - Occasionally/rarely you might want change a label while preserving a constant ID. This allows
     you to animate labels. For example you may want to include varying information in a window title bar,
     but windows are uniquely identified by their ID. Use "###" to pass a label that isn't part of ID:

       Button("Hello###ID";   // Label = "Hello",  ID = hash of (..., "ID")
       Button("World###ID";   // Label = "World",  ID = hash of (..., "ID")     // Same as above, even though the label looks different

       sprintf(buf, "My game (%f FPS)###MyGame", fps);
       Begin(buf);            // Variable label,   ID = hash of "MyGame"

   - Solving ID conflict in a more general manner:
     Use PushID() / PopID() to create scopes and manipulate the ID stack, as to avoid ID conflicts
     within the same window. This is the most convenient way of distinguishing ID when iterating and
     creating many UI elements programmatically.
     You can push a pointer, a string or an integer value into the ID stack.
     Remember that ID are formed from the concatenation of _everything_ in the ID stack!

       Begin("Window");
       for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
       {
         PushID(i);         // Push i to the id tack
         Button("Click");   // Label = "Click",  ID = Hash of ("Window", i, "Click")
         PopID();
       }
       for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
       {
         MyObject* obj = Objects[i];
         PushID(obj);
         Button("Click");   // Label = "Click",  ID = Hash of ("Window", obj pointer, "Click")
         PopID();
       }
       for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
       {
         MyObject* obj = Objects[i];
         PushID(obj->Name);
         Button("Click");   // Label = "Click",  ID = Hash of ("Window", obj->Name, "Click")
         PopID();
       }
       End();

   - More example showing that you can stack multiple prefixes into the ID stack:

       Button("Click");     // Label = "Click",  ID = hash of (..., "Click")
       PushID("node");
       Button("Click");     // Label = "Click",  ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
         PushID(my_ptr);
           Button("Click"); // Label = "Click",  ID = hash of (..., "node", my_ptr, "Click")
         PopID();
       PopID();

   - Tree nodes implicitly creates a scope for you by calling PushID().

       Button("Click");     // Label = "Click",  ID = hash of (..., "Click")
       if (TreeNode("node"))
       {
         Button("Click");   // Label = "Click",  ID = hash of (..., "node", "Click")
         TreePop();
       }

   - When working with trees, ID are used to preserve the open/close state of each tree node.
     Depending on your use cases you may want to use strings, indices or pointers as ID.
      e.g. when following a single pointer that may change over time, using a static string as ID
       will preserve your node open/closed state when the targeted object change.
      e.g. when displaying a list of objects, using indices or pointers as ID will preserve the
       node open/closed state differently. See what makes more sense in your situation!

 Q: How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4? 
 A: You can edit imconfig.h and setup the IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA/IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA macros to add implicit type conversions.
    This way you'll be able to use your own types everywhere, e.g. passsing glm::vec2 to ImGui functions instead of ImVec2.

 Q: How can I load a different font than the default?
 A: Use the font atlas to load the TTF/OTF file you want:
      ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_in_pixels);
      io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() or GetTexDataAsAlpha8()
    (default is ProggyClean.ttf, rendered at size 13, embedded in dear imgui's source code)

    New programmers: remember that in C/C++ and most programming languages if you want to use a
    backslash \ within a string literal, you need to write it double backslash "\\":
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("MyDataFolder\MyFontFile.ttf", size_in_pixels);   // WRONG (you are escape the M here!)
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("MyDataFolder\\MyFontFile.ttf", size_in_pixels);  // CORRECT
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("MyDataFolder/MyFontFile.ttf", size_in_pixels);   // ALSO CORRECT

 Q: How can I easily use icons in my application?
 A: The most convenient and practical way is to merge an icon font such as FontAwesome inside you
    main font. Then you can refer to icons within your strings. Read 'How can I load multiple fonts?'
    and the file 'misc/fonts/README.txt' for instructions and useful header files.

 Q: How can I load multiple fonts?
 A: Use the font atlas to pack them into a single texture:
    (Read misc/fonts/README.txt and the code in ImFontAtlas for more details.)

      ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
      ImFont* font0 = io.Fonts->AddFontDefault();
      ImFont* font1 = io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_in_pixels);
      ImFont* font2 = io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile2.ttf", size_in_pixels);
      io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() or GetTexDataAsAlpha8()
      // the first loaded font gets used by default
      // use ImGui::PushFont()/ImGui::PopFont() to change the font at runtime

      // Options
      ImFontConfig config;
      config.OversampleH = 3;
      config.OversampleV = 1;
      config.GlyphOffset.y -= 2.0f;      // Move everything by 2 pixels up
      config.GlyphExtraSpacing.x = 1.0f; // Increase spacing between characters
      io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, &config);

      // Combine multiple fonts into one (e.g. for icon fonts)
      ImWchar ranges[] = { 0xf000, 0xf3ff, 0 };
      ImFontConfig config;
      config.MergeMode = true;
      io.Fonts->AddFontDefault();
      io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("fontawesome-webfont.ttf", 16.0f, &config, ranges); // Merge icon font
      io.Fonts->LoadFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_pixels, NULL, &config, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese()); // Merge japanese glyphs

 Q: How can I display and input non-Latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
 A: When loading a font, pass custom Unicode ranges to specify the glyphs to load.

      // Add default Japanese ranges
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_in_pixels, NULL, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese());

      // Or create your own custom ranges (e.g. for a game you can feed your entire game script and only build the characters the game need)
      ImVector<ImWchar> ranges;
      ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder builder;
      builder.AddText("Hello world");                        // Add a string (here "Hello world" contains 7 unique characters)
      builder.AddChar(0x7262);                               // Add a specific character
      builder.AddRanges(io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesJapanese()); // Add one of the default ranges
      builder.BuildRanges(&ranges);                          // Build the final result (ordered ranges with all the unique characters submitted)
      io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF("myfontfile.ttf", size_in_pixels, NULL, ranges.Data);

    All your strings needs to use UTF-8 encoding. In C++11 you can encode a string literal in UTF-8
    by using the u8"hello" syntax. Specifying literal in your source code using a local code page
    (such as CP-923 for Japanese or CP-1251 for Cyrillic) will NOT work!
    Otherwise you can convert yourself to UTF-8 or load text data from file already saved as UTF-8.

    Text input: it is up to your application to pass the right character code by calling io.AddInputCharacter(). 
    The applications in examples/ are doing that. 
    Windows: you can use the WM_CHAR or WM_UNICHAR or WM_IME_CHAR message (depending if your app is built using Unicode or MultiByte mode).
    You may also use MultiByteToWideChar() or ToUnicode() to retrieve Unicode codepoints from MultiByte characters or keyboard state.
    Windows: if your language is relying on an Input Method Editor (IME), you copy the HWND of your window to io.ImeWindowHandle in order for 
    the default implementation of io.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn() to set your Microsoft IME position correctly.

 Q: How can I use the drawing facilities without an ImGui window? (using ImDrawList API)
 A: - You can create a dummy window. Call SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f), call Begin() with NoTitleBar|NoResize|NoMove|NoScrollbar|NoSavedSettings|NoInputs flags.
      Then you can retrieve the ImDrawList* via GetWindowDrawList() and draw to it in any way you like.
    - You can call ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList() and use this draw list to display contents over every other imgui windows.
    - You can create your own ImDrawList instance. You'll need to initialize them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData(), or create your own ImDrawListSharedData.

 Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and the text or lines are blurry..
 A: In your Render function, try translating your projection matrix by (0.5f,0.5f) or (0.375f,0.375f).
    Also make sure your orthographic projection matrix and io.DisplaySize matches your actual framebuffer dimension.

 Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around..
 A: You are probably mishandling the clipping rectangles in your render function.
    Rectangles provided by ImGui are defined as (x1=left,y1=top,x2=right,y2=bottom) and NOT as (x1,y1,width,height).

 Q: How can I help?
 A: - If you are experienced with Dear ImGui and C++, look at the github issues, or TODO.txt and see how you want/can help!
    - Convince your company to fund development time! Individual users: you can also become a Patron (patreon.com/imgui) or donate on PayPal! See README.
    - Disclose your usage of dear imgui via a dev blog post, a tweet, a screenshot, a mention somewhere etc.
      You may post screenshot or links in the gallery threads (github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1269). Visuals are ideal as they inspire other programmers.
      But even without visuals, disclosing your use of dear imgui help the library grow credibility, and help other teams and programmers with taking decisions.
    - If you have issues or if you need to hack into the library, even if you don't expect any support it is useful that you share your issues (on github or privately).

 - tip: you can call Begin() multiple times with the same name during the same frame, it will keep appending to the same window.
        this is also useful to set yourself in the context of another window (to get/set other settings)
 - tip: you can create widgets without a Begin()/End() block, they will go in an implicit window called "Debug".
 - tip: the ImGuiOnceUponAFrame helper will allow run the block of code only once a frame. You can use it to quickly add custom UI in the middle
        of a deep nested inner loop in your code.
 - tip: you can call Render() multiple times (e.g for VR renders).
 - tip: call and read the ShowDemoWindow() code in imgui_demo.cpp for more example of how to use ImGui!

*/

#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
#endif

#include "imgui.h"
#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
#endif
#include "imgui_internal.h"

#include <ctype.h>      // toupper, isprint
#include <stdio.h>      // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
#else
#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
#endif

#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING     0
#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS       0

// Visual Studio warnings
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant
#pragma warning (disable: 4505) // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff)
#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
#endif

// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
#ifdef __clang__
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"        // warning : unknown warning group '-Wformat-pedantic *'        // not all warnings are known by all clang versions.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. great!
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"         // warning : use of old-style cast                              // yes, they are more terse.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"            // warning : comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe   // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"      // warning : format string is not a string literal              // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors"  // warning : declaration requires an exit-time destructor       // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors"    // warning : declaration requires a global destructor           // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference it.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"        // warning : implicit conversion changes signedness             //
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-pedantic"        // warning : format specifies type 'void *' but the argument has type 'xxxx *' // unreasonable, would lead to casting every %p arg to void*. probably enabled by -pedantic.
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning : cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int'
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function"          // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast"      // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat"                   // warning: format '%p' expects argument of type 'void*', but argument 6 has type 'ImGuiWindow*'
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"         // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion"               // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"        // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wstrict-overflow"          // warning: assuming signed overflow does not occur when assuming that (X - c) > X is always false
#if __GNUC__ >= 8
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"          // warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
#endif
#endif

static const ImS32  IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN;    // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
static const ImS32  IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX;    // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
static const ImU32  IM_U32_MIN = 0;
static const ImU32  IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX;   // (0xFFFFFFFF)
#ifdef LLONG_MIN
static const ImS64  IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN;  // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
static const ImS64  IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX;  // (9223372036854775807ll);
#else
static const ImS64  IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
static const ImS64  IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
#endif
static const ImU64  IM_U64_MIN = 0;
#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
static const ImU64  IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
#else
static const ImU64  IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
#endif

// When using CTRL+TAB (or Gamepad Square+L/R) we delay the visual a little in order to reduce visual noise doing a fast switch.
static const float NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY   = 0.20f; // Time before the highlight and screen dimming starts fading in
static const float NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY = 0.15f; // Time before the window list starts to appear

//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Forward Declarations
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------

static void             SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
static void             SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond);
static void             SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond);
static void             SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond);
static void             FindHoveredWindow();
static ImGuiWindow*     CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImVec2 size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
static ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name);
static void             CheckStacksSize(ImGuiWindow* window, bool write);
static ImVec2           CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window, bool snap_on_edges);

static void             AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list);
static void             AddWindowToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImGuiWindow* window);
static void             AddWindowToSortedBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window);

static ImRect           GetViewportRect();

static bool             InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data);
static int              InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end);
static ImVec2           InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);

static inline int       DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format);
static void             DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg_1, const void* arg_2);
static bool             DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format);

namespace ImGui
{
static bool             BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);

static void             NavUpdate();
static void             NavUpdateWindowing();
static void             NavUpdateWindowingList();
static void             NavProcessItem(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& nav_bb, const ImGuiID id);

static void             UpdateMouseInputs();
static void             UpdateMouseWheel();
static void             UpdateManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4]);

// Template widget behaviors
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
static bool             DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power);

template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
static bool             SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb);
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Platform dependent default implementations
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

static const char*      GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data);
static void             SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data, const char* text);
static void             ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl(int x, int y);

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Context and Memory Allocators
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Current context pointer. Implicitly used by all ImGui functions. Always assumed to be != NULL.
// CreateContext() will automatically set this pointer if it is NULL. Change to a different context by calling ImGui::SetCurrentContext().
// If you use DLL hotreloading you might need to call SetCurrentContext() after reloading code from this file.
// ImGui functions are not thread-safe because of this pointer. If you want thread-safety to allow N threads to access N different contexts, you can:
// - Change this variable to use thread local storage. You may #define GImGui in imconfig.h for that purpose. Future development aim to make this context pointer explicit to all calls. Also read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/586
// - Having multiple instances of the ImGui code compiled inside different namespace (easiest/safest, if you have a finite number of contexts)
#ifndef GImGui
ImGuiContext*   GImGui = NULL;
#endif

// Memory Allocator functions. Use SetAllocatorFunctions() to change them.
// If you use DLL hotreloading you might need to call SetAllocatorFunctions() after reloading code from this file.
// Otherwise, you probably don't want to modify them mid-program, and if you use global/static e.g. ImVector<> instances you may need to keep them accessible during program destruction.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS
static void*   MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data)    { (void)user_data; return malloc(size); }
static void    FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data)        { (void)user_data; free(ptr); }
#else
static void*   MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data)    { (void)user_data; (void)size; IM_ASSERT(0); return NULL; }
static void    FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data)        { (void)user_data; (void)ptr; IM_ASSERT(0); }
#endif

static void*  (*GImAllocatorAllocFunc)(size_t size, void* user_data) = MallocWrapper;
static void   (*GImAllocatorFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data) = FreeWrapper;
static void*    GImAllocatorUserData = NULL;

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// User facing structures
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ImGuiStyle::ImGuiStyle()
{
    Alpha                   = 1.0f;             // Global alpha applies to everything in ImGui
    WindowPadding           = ImVec2(8,8);      // Padding within a window
    WindowRounding          = 7.0f;             // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows
    WindowBorderSize        = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
    WindowMinSize           = ImVec2(32,32);    // Minimum window size
    WindowTitleAlign        = ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f);// Alignment for title bar text
    ChildRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows
    ChildBorderSize         = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
    PopupRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of popup window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows
    PopupBorderSize         = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around popup or tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
    FramePadding            = ImVec2(4,3);      // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets)
    FrameRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frames (used by most widgets).
    FrameBorderSize         = 0.0f;             // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
    ItemSpacing             = ImVec2(8,4);      // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines
    ItemInnerSpacing        = ImVec2(4,4);      // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label)
    TouchExtraPadding       = ImVec2(0,0);      // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much!
    IndentSpacing           = 21.0f;            // Horizontal spacing when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2).
    ColumnsMinSpacing       = 6.0f;             // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns
    ScrollbarSize           = 16.0f;            // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar
    ScrollbarRounding       = 9.0f;             // Radius of grab corners rounding for scrollbar
    GrabMinSize             = 10.0f;            // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar
    GrabRounding            = 0.0f;             // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
    ButtonTextAlign         = ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f);// Alignment of button text when button is larger than text.
    DisplayWindowPadding    = ImVec2(20,20);    // Window positions are clamped to be visible within the display area by at least this amount. Only covers regular windows.
    DisplaySafeAreaPadding  = ImVec2(3,3);      // If you cannot see the edge of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Covers popups/tooltips as well regular windows.
    MouseCursorScale        = 1.0f;             // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later.
    AntiAliasedLines        = true;             // Enable anti-aliasing on lines/borders. Disable if you are really short on CPU/GPU.
    AntiAliasedFill         = true;             // Enable anti-aliasing on filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.)
    CurveTessellationTol    = 1.25f;            // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality.

    // Default theme
    ImGui::StyleColorsDark(this);
}

// To scale your entire UI (e.g. if you want your app to use High DPI or generally be DPI aware) you may use this helper function. Scaling the fonts is done separately and is up to you.
// Important: This operation is lossy because we round all sizes to integer. If you need to change your scale multiples, call this over a freshly initialized ImGuiStyle structure rather than scaling multiple times.
void ImGuiStyle::ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor)
{
    WindowPadding = ImFloor(WindowPadding * scale_factor);
    WindowRounding = ImFloor(WindowRounding * scale_factor);
    WindowMinSize = ImFloor(WindowMinSize * scale_factor);
    ChildRounding = ImFloor(ChildRounding * scale_factor);
    PopupRounding = ImFloor(PopupRounding * scale_factor);
    FramePadding = ImFloor(FramePadding * scale_factor);
    FrameRounding = ImFloor(FrameRounding * scale_factor);
    ItemSpacing = ImFloor(ItemSpacing * scale_factor);
    ItemInnerSpacing = ImFloor(ItemInnerSpacing * scale_factor);
    TouchExtraPadding = ImFloor(TouchExtraPadding * scale_factor);
    IndentSpacing = ImFloor(IndentSpacing * scale_factor);
    ColumnsMinSpacing = ImFloor(ColumnsMinSpacing * scale_factor);
    ScrollbarSize = ImFloor(ScrollbarSize * scale_factor);
    ScrollbarRounding = ImFloor(ScrollbarRounding * scale_factor);
    GrabMinSize = ImFloor(GrabMinSize * scale_factor);
    GrabRounding = ImFloor(GrabRounding * scale_factor);
    DisplayWindowPadding = ImFloor(DisplayWindowPadding * scale_factor);
    DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImFloor(DisplaySafeAreaPadding * scale_factor);
    MouseCursorScale = ImFloor(MouseCursorScale * scale_factor);
}

ImGuiIO::ImGuiIO()
{
    // Most fields are initialized with zero
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));

    // Settings
    ConfigFlags = 0x00;
    BackendFlags = 0x00;
    DisplaySize = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f);
    DeltaTime = 1.0f/60.0f;
    IniSavingRate = 5.0f;
    IniFilename = "imgui.ini";
    LogFilename = "imgui_log.txt";
    MouseDoubleClickTime = 0.30f;
    MouseDoubleClickMaxDist = 6.0f;
    for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiKey_COUNT; i++)
        KeyMap[i] = -1;
    KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
    KeyRepeatRate = 0.050f;
    UserData = NULL;

    Fonts = NULL;
    FontGlobalScale = 1.0f;
    FontDefault = NULL;
    FontAllowUserScaling = false;
    DisplayFramebufferScale = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f);
    DisplayVisibleMin = DisplayVisibleMax = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);

    // Miscellaneous configuration options
#ifdef __APPLE__
    ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = true;  // Set Mac OS X style defaults based on __APPLE__ compile time flag
#else
    ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = false;
#endif
    ConfigCursorBlink = true;
    ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges = false;

    // Settings (User Functions)
    GetClipboardTextFn = GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl;   // Platform dependent default implementations
    SetClipboardTextFn = SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl;
    ClipboardUserData = NULL;
    ImeSetInputScreenPosFn = ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl;
    ImeWindowHandle = NULL;

#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
    RenderDrawListsFn = NULL;
#endif

    // Input (NB: we already have memset zero the entire structure)
    MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
    MousePosPrev = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
    MouseDragThreshold = 6.0f;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(MouseDownDuration); i++) MouseDownDuration[i] = MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = -1.0f;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(KeysDownDuration); i++) KeysDownDuration[i]  = KeysDownDurationPrev[i] = -1.0f;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(NavInputsDownDuration); i++) NavInputsDownDuration[i] = -1.0f;
}

// Pass in translated ASCII characters for text input.
// - with glfw you can get those from the callback set in glfwSetCharCallback()
// - on Windows you can get those using ToAscii+keyboard state, or via the WM_CHAR message
void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacter(ImWchar c)
{
    const int n = ImStrlenW(InputCharacters);
    if (n + 1 < IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputCharacters))
    {
        InputCharacters[n] = c;
        InputCharacters[n+1] = '\0';
    }
}

void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars)
{
    // We can't pass more wchars than ImGuiIO::InputCharacters[] can hold so don't convert more
    const int wchars_buf_len = sizeof(ImGuiIO::InputCharacters) / sizeof(ImWchar);
    ImWchar wchars[wchars_buf_len];
    ImTextStrFromUtf8(wchars, wchars_buf_len, utf8_chars, NULL);
    for (int i = 0; i < wchars_buf_len && wchars[i] != 0; i++)
        AddInputCharacter(wchars[i]);
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// HELPERS
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p)
{
    ImVec2 ap = p - a;
    ImVec2 ab_dir = b - a;
    float dot = ap.x * ab_dir.x + ap.y * ab_dir.y;
    if (dot < 0.0f)
        return a;
    float ab_len_sqr = ab_dir.x * ab_dir.x + ab_dir.y * ab_dir.y;
    if (dot > ab_len_sqr)
        return b;
    return a + ab_dir * dot / ab_len_sqr;
}

bool ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p)
{
    bool b1 = ((p.x - b.x) * (a.y - b.y) - (p.y - b.y) * (a.x - b.x)) < 0.0f;
    bool b2 = ((p.x - c.x) * (b.y - c.y) - (p.y - c.y) * (b.x - c.x)) < 0.0f;
    bool b3 = ((p.x - a.x) * (c.y - a.y) - (p.y - a.y) * (c.x - a.x)) < 0.0f;
    return ((b1 == b2) && (b2 == b3));
}

void ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w)
{
    ImVec2 v0 = b - a;
    ImVec2 v1 = c - a;
    ImVec2 v2 = p - a;
    const float denom = v0.x * v1.y - v1.x * v0.y;
    out_v = (v2.x * v1.y - v1.x * v2.y) / denom;
    out_w = (v0.x * v2.y - v2.x * v0.y) / denom;
    out_u = 1.0f - out_v - out_w;
}

ImVec2 ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p)
{
    ImVec2 proj_ab = ImLineClosestPoint(a, b, p);
    ImVec2 proj_bc = ImLineClosestPoint(b, c, p);
    ImVec2 proj_ca = ImLineClosestPoint(c, a, p);
    float dist2_ab = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ab);
    float dist2_bc = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_bc);
    float dist2_ca = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ca);
    float m = ImMin(dist2_ab, ImMin(dist2_bc, dist2_ca));
    if (m == dist2_ab)
        return proj_ab;
    if (m == dist2_bc)
        return proj_bc;
    return proj_ca;
}

int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2)
{
    int d;
    while ((d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; }
    return d;
}

int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count)
{
    int d = 0;
    while (count > 0 && (d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; count--; }
    return d;
}

void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count)
{
    if (count < 1) return;
    strncpy(dst, src, count);
    dst[count-1] = 0;
}

char* ImStrdup(const char *str)
{
    size_t len = strlen(str) + 1;
    void* buf = ImGui::MemAlloc(len);
    return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len);
}

const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str, const char* str_end, char c)
{
    for ( ; str < str_end; str++)
        if (*str == c)
            return str;
    return NULL;
}

int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str)
{
    int n = 0;
    while (*str++) n++;
    return n;
}

const ImWchar* ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin) // find beginning-of-line
{
    while (buf_mid_line > buf_begin && buf_mid_line[-1] != '\n')
        buf_mid_line--;
    return buf_mid_line;
}

const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end)
{
    if (!needle_end)
        needle_end = needle + strlen(needle);

    const char un0 = (char)toupper(*needle);
    while ((!haystack_end && *haystack) || (haystack_end && haystack < haystack_end))
    {
        if (toupper(*haystack) == un0)
        {
            const char* b = needle + 1;
            for (const char* a = haystack + 1; b < needle_end; a++, b++)
                if (toupper(*a) != toupper(*b))
                    break;
            if (b == needle_end)
                return haystack;
        }
        haystack++;
    }
    return NULL;
}

// Trim str by offsetting contents when there's leading data + writing a \0 at the trailing position. We use this in situation where the cost is negligible.
void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* buf)
{
    char* p = buf;
    while (p[0] == ' ' || p[0] == '\t')     // Leading blanks
        p++;
    char* p_start = p;
    while (*p != 0)                         // Find end of string
        p++;
    while (p > p_start && (p[-1] == ' ' || p[-1] == '\t'))  // Trailing blanks
        p--;
    if (p_start != buf)                     // Copy memory if we had leading blanks
        memmove(buf, p_start, p - p_start);
    buf[p - p_start] = 0;                   // Zero terminate
}

template<typename TYPE>
static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output)
{
    int negative = 0;
    if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
    if (*src == '+') { src++; }
    TYPE v = 0;
    while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
        v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
    *output = negative ? -v : v;
    return src;
}

// A) MSVC version appears to return -1 on overflow, whereas glibc appears to return total count (which may be >= buf_size).
// Ideally we would test for only one of those limits at runtime depending on the behavior the vsnprintf(), but trying to deduct it at compile time sounds like a pandora can of worm.
// B) When buf==NULL vsnprintf() will return the output size.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS

#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf)
#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf
#endif

int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    if (buf == NULL)
        return w;
    if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size)
        w = (int)buf_size - 1;
    buf[w] = 0;
    return w;
}

int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
    if (buf == NULL)
        return w;
    if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size)
        w = (int)buf_size - 1;
    buf[w] = 0;
    return w;
}
#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS

// Pass data_size==0 for zero-terminated strings
// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements.
ImU32 ImHash(const void* data, int data_size, ImU32 seed)
{
    static ImU32 crc32_lut[256] = { 0 };
    if (!crc32_lut[1])
    {
        const ImU32 polynomial = 0xEDB88320;
        for (ImU32 i = 0; i < 256; i++)
        {
            ImU32 crc = i;
            for (ImU32 j = 0; j < 8; j++)
                crc = (crc >> 1) ^ (ImU32(-int(crc & 1)) & polynomial);
            crc32_lut[i] = crc;
        }
    }

    seed = ~seed;
    ImU32 crc = seed;
    const unsigned char* current = (const unsigned char*)data;

    if (data_size > 0)
    {
        // Known size
        while (data_size--)
            crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ *current++];
    }
    else
    {
        // Zero-terminated string
        while (unsigned char c = *current++)
        {
            // We support a syntax of "label###id" where only "###id" is included in the hash, and only "label" gets displayed.
            // Because this syntax is rarely used we are optimizing for the common case.
            // - If we reach ### in the string we discard the hash so far and reset to the seed.
            // - We don't do 'current += 2; continue;' after handling ### to keep the code smaller.
            if (c == '#' && current[0] == '#' && current[1] == '#')
                crc = seed;
            crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c];
        }
    }
    return ~crc;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImText* helpers
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Convert UTF-8 to 32-bits character, process single character input.
// Based on stb_from_utf8() from github.com/nothings/stb/
// We handle UTF-8 decoding error by skipping forward.
int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
{
    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)-1;
    const unsigned char* str = (const unsigned char*)in_text;
    if (!(*str & 0x80))
    {
        c = (unsigned int)(*str++);
        *out_char = c;
        return 1;
    }
    if ((*str & 0xe0) == 0xc0)
    {
        *out_char = 0xFFFD; // will be invalid but not end of string
        if (in_text_end && in_text_end - (const char*)str < 2) return 1;
        if (*str < 0xc2) return 2;
        c = (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x1f) << 6);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 2;
        c += (*str++ & 0x3f);
        *out_char = c;
        return 2;
    }
    if ((*str & 0xf0) == 0xe0)
    {
        *out_char = 0xFFFD; // will be invalid but not end of string
        if (in_text_end && in_text_end - (const char*)str < 3) return 1;
        if (*str == 0xe0 && (str[1] < 0xa0 || str[1] > 0xbf)) return 3;
        if (*str == 0xed && str[1] > 0x9f) return 3; // str[1] < 0x80 is checked below
        c = (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x0f) << 12);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 3;
        c += (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x3f) << 6);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 3;
        c += (*str++ & 0x3f);
        *out_char = c;
        return 3;
    }
    if ((*str & 0xf8) == 0xf0)
    {
        *out_char = 0xFFFD; // will be invalid but not end of string
        if (in_text_end && in_text_end - (const char*)str < 4) return 1;
        if (*str > 0xf4) return 4;
        if (*str == 0xf0 && (str[1] < 0x90 || str[1] > 0xbf)) return 4;
        if (*str == 0xf4 && str[1] > 0x8f) return 4; // str[1] < 0x80 is checked below
        c = (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x07) << 18);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 4;
        c += (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x3f) << 12);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 4;
        c += (unsigned int)((*str++ & 0x3f) << 6);
        if ((*str & 0xc0) != 0x80) return 4;
        c += (*str++ & 0x3f);
        // utf-8 encodings of values used in surrogate pairs are invalid
        if ((c & 0xFFFFF800) == 0xD800) return 4;
        *out_char = c;
        return 4;
    }
    *out_char = 0;
    return 0;
}

int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* buf, int buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_text_remaining)
{
    ImWchar* buf_out = buf;
    ImWchar* buf_end = buf + buf_size;
    while (buf_out < buf_end-1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
    {
        unsigned int c;
        in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end);
        if (c == 0)
            break;
        if (c < 0x10000)    // FIXME: Losing characters that don't fit in 2 bytes
            *buf_out++ = (ImWchar)c;
    }
    *buf_out = 0;
    if (in_text_remaining)
        *in_text_remaining = in_text;
    return (int)(buf_out - buf);
}

int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
{
    int char_count = 0;
    while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
    {
        unsigned int c;
        in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end);
        if (c == 0)
            break;
        if (c < 0x10000)
            char_count++;
    }
    return char_count;
}

// Based on stb_to_utf8() from github.com/nothings/stb/
static inline int ImTextCharToUtf8(char* buf, int buf_size, unsigned int c)
{
    if (c < 0x80)
    {
        buf[0] = (char)c;
        return 1;
    }
    if (c < 0x800)
    {
        if (buf_size < 2) return 0;
        buf[0] = (char)(0xc0 + (c >> 6));
        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + (c & 0x3f));
        return 2;
    }
    if (c >= 0xdc00 && c < 0xe000)
    {
        return 0;
    }
    if (c >= 0xd800 && c < 0xdc00)
    {
        if (buf_size < 4) return 0;
        buf[0] = (char)(0xf0 + (c >> 18));
        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f));
        buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f));
        buf[3] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f));
        return 4;
    }
    //else if (c < 0x10000)
    {
        if (buf_size < 3) return 0;
        buf[0] = (char)(0xe0 + (c >> 12));
        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c>> 6) & 0x3f));
        buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f));
        return 3;
    }
}

// Not optimal but we very rarely use this function.
int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
{
    unsigned int dummy = 0;
    return ImTextCharFromUtf8(&dummy, in_text, in_text_end);
}

static inline int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(unsigned int c)
{
    if (c < 0x80) return 1;
    if (c < 0x800) return 2;
    if (c >= 0xdc00 && c < 0xe000) return 0;
    if (c >= 0xd800 && c < 0xdc00) return 4;
    return 3;
}

int ImTextStrToUtf8(char* buf, int buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end)
{
    char* buf_out = buf;
    const char* buf_end = buf + buf_size;
    while (buf_out < buf_end-1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
    {
        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++);
        if (c < 0x80)
            *buf_out++ = (char)c;
        else
            buf_out += ImTextCharToUtf8(buf_out, (int)(buf_end-buf_out-1), c);
    }
    *buf_out = 0;
    return (int)(buf_out - buf);
}

int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end)
{
    int bytes_count = 0;
    while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
    {
        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++);
        if (c < 0x80)
            bytes_count++;
        else
            bytes_count += ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(c);
    }
    return bytes_count;
}

ImVec4 ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in)
{
    float s = 1.0f/255.0f;
    return ImVec4(
        ((in >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
        ((in >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
        ((in >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
        ((in >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s);
}

ImU32 ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in)
{
    ImU32 out;
    out  = ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.x)) << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT;
    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.y)) << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT;
    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.z)) << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT;
    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.w)) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
    return out;
}

ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul)
{
    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
    ImVec4 c = style.Colors[idx];
    c.w *= style.Alpha * alpha_mul;
    return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
}

ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col)
{
    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
    ImVec4 c = col;
    c.w *= style.Alpha;
    return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
}

const ImVec4& ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx)
{
    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
    return style.Colors[idx];
}

ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImU32 col)
{
    float style_alpha = GImGui->Style.Alpha;
    if (style_alpha >= 1.0f)
        return col;
    ImU32 a = (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
    a = (ImU32)(a * style_alpha); // We don't need to clamp 0..255 because Style.Alpha is in 0..1 range.
    return (col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (a << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
}

// Convert rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p592
// Optimized http://lolengine.net/blog/2013/01/13/fast-rgb-to-hsv
void ImGui::ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v)
{
    float K = 0.f;
    if (g < b)
    {
        ImSwap(g, b);
        K = -1.f;
    }
    if (r < g)
    {
        ImSwap(r, g);
        K = -2.f / 6.f - K;
    }

    const float chroma = r - (g < b ? g : b);
    out_h = ImFabs(K + (g - b) / (6.f * chroma + 1e-20f));
    out_s = chroma / (r + 1e-20f);
    out_v = r;
}

// Convert hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p593
// also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HSL_and_HSV
void ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b)
{
    if (s == 0.0f)
    {
        // gray
        out_r = out_g = out_b = v;
        return;
    }

    h = ImFmod(h, 1.0f) / (60.0f/360.0f);
    int   i = (int)h;
    float f = h - (float)i;
    float p = v * (1.0f - s);
    float q = v * (1.0f - s * f);
    float t = v * (1.0f - s * (1.0f - f));

    switch (i)
    {
    case 0: out_r = v; out_g = t; out_b = p; break;
    case 1: out_r = q; out_g = v; out_b = p; break;
    case 2: out_r = p; out_g = v; out_b = t; break;
    case 3: out_r = p; out_g = q; out_b = v; break;
    case 4: out_r = t; out_g = p; out_b = v; break;
    case 5: default: out_r = v; out_g = p; out_b = q; break;
    }
}

FILE* ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode)
{
#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(__CYGWIN__)
    // We need a fopen() wrapper because MSVC/Windows fopen doesn't handle UTF-8 filenames. Converting both strings from UTF-8 to wchar format (using a single allocation, because we can)
    const int filename_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(filename, NULL) + 1;
    const int mode_wsize = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(mode, NULL) + 1;
    ImVector<ImWchar> buf;
    buf.resize(filename_wsize + mode_wsize);
    ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[0], filename_wsize, filename, NULL);
    ImTextStrFromUtf8(&buf[filename_wsize], mode_wsize, mode, NULL);
    return _wfopen((wchar_t*)&buf[0], (wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize]);
#else
    return fopen(filename, mode);
#endif
}

// Load file content into memory
// Memory allocated with ImGui::MemAlloc(), must be freed by user using ImGui::MemFree()
void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* file_open_mode, size_t* out_file_size, int padding_bytes)
{
    IM_ASSERT(filename && file_open_mode);
    if (out_file_size)
        *out_file_size = 0;

    FILE* f;
    if ((f = ImFileOpen(filename, file_open_mode)) == NULL)
        return NULL;

    long file_size_signed;
    if (fseek(f, 0, SEEK_END) || (file_size_signed = ftell(f)) == -1 || fseek(f, 0, SEEK_SET))
    {
        fclose(f);
        return NULL;
    }

    size_t file_size = (size_t)file_size_signed;
    void* file_data = ImGui::MemAlloc(file_size + padding_bytes);
    if (file_data == NULL)
    {
        fclose(f);
        return NULL;
    }
    if (fread(file_data, 1, file_size, f) != file_size)
    {
        fclose(f);
        ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
        return NULL;
    }
    if (padding_bytes > 0)
        memset((void*)(((char*)file_data) + file_size), 0, (size_t)padding_bytes);

    fclose(f);
    if (out_file_size)
        *out_file_size = file_size;

    return file_data;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiStorage
// Helper: Key->value storage
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// std::lower_bound but without the bullshit
static ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator LowerBound(ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>& data, ImGuiID key)
{
    ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator first = data.begin();
    ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator last = data.end();
    size_t count = (size_t)(last - first);
    while (count > 0)
    {
        size_t count2 = count >> 1;
        ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>::iterator mid = first + count2;
        if (mid->key < key)
        {
            first = ++mid;
            count -= count2 + 1;
        }
        else
        {
            count = count2;
        }
    }
    return first;
}

// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
void ImGuiStorage::BuildSortByKey()
{
    struct StaticFunc
    {
        static int IMGUI_CDECL PairCompareByID(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
        {
            // We can't just do a subtraction because qsort uses signed integers and subtracting our ID doesn't play well with that.
            if (((const Pair*)lhs)->key > ((const Pair*)rhs)->key) return +1;
            if (((const Pair*)lhs)->key < ((const Pair*)rhs)->key) return -1;
            return 0;
        }
    };
    if (Data.Size > 1)
        ImQsort(Data.Data, (size_t)Data.Size, sizeof(Pair), StaticFunc::PairCompareByID);
}

int ImGuiStorage::GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val) const
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        return default_val;
    return it->val_i;
}

bool ImGuiStorage::GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val) const
{
    return GetInt(key, default_val ? 1 : 0) != 0;
}

float ImGuiStorage::GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val) const
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        return default_val;
    return it->val_f;
}

void* ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStorage::Pair>&>(Data), key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        return NULL;
    return it->val_p;
}

// References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
int* ImGuiStorage::GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
    return &it->val_i;
}

bool* ImGuiStorage::GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val)
{
    return (bool*)GetIntRef(key, default_val ? 1 : 0);
}

float* ImGuiStorage::GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
    return &it->val_f;
}

void** ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
        it = Data.insert(it, Pair(key, default_val));
    return &it->val_p;
}

// FIXME-OPT: Need a way to reuse the result of lower_bound when doing GetInt()/SetInt() - not too bad because it only happens on explicit interaction (maximum one a frame)
void ImGuiStorage::SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
    {
        Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
        return;
    }
    it->val_i = val;
}

void ImGuiStorage::SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val)
{
    SetInt(key, val ? 1 : 0);
}

void ImGuiStorage::SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
    {
        Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
        return;
    }
    it->val_f = val;
}

void ImGuiStorage::SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val)
{
    ImVector<Pair>::iterator it = LowerBound(Data, key);
    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
    {
        Data.insert(it, Pair(key, val));
        return;
    }
    it->val_p = val;
}

void ImGuiStorage::SetAllInt(int v)
{
    for (int i = 0; i < Data.Size; i++)
        Data[i].val_i = v;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiTextFilter
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
ImGuiTextFilter::ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter)
{
    if (default_filter)
    {
        ImStrncpy(InputBuf, default_filter, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf));
        Build();
    }
    else
    {
        InputBuf[0] = 0;
        CountGrep = 0;
    }
}

bool ImGuiTextFilter::Draw(const char* label, float width)
{
    if (width != 0.0f)
        ImGui::PushItemWidth(width);
    bool value_changed = ImGui::InputText(label, InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf));
    if (width != 0.0f)
        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
    if (value_changed)
        Build();
    return value_changed;
}

void ImGuiTextFilter::TextRange::split(char separator, ImVector<TextRange>* out) const
{
    out->resize(0);
    const char* wb = b;
    const char* we = wb;
    while (we < e)
    {
        if (*we == separator)
        {
            out->push_back(TextRange(wb, we));
            wb = we + 1;
        }
        we++;
    }
    if (wb != we)
        out->push_back(TextRange(wb, we));
}

void ImGuiTextFilter::Build()
{
    Filters.resize(0);
    TextRange input_range(InputBuf, InputBuf+strlen(InputBuf));
    input_range.split(',', &Filters);

    CountGrep = 0;
    for (int i = 0; i != Filters.Size; i++)
    {
        TextRange& f = Filters[i];
        while (f.b < f.e && ImCharIsBlankA(f.b[0]))
            f.b++;
        while (f.e > f.b && ImCharIsBlankA(f.e[-1]))
            f.e--;
        if (f.empty())
            continue;
        if (Filters[i].b[0] != '-')
            CountGrep += 1;
    }
}

bool ImGuiTextFilter::PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end) const
{
    if (Filters.empty())
        return true;

    if (text == NULL)
        text = "";

    for (int i = 0; i != Filters.Size; i++)
    {
        const TextRange& f = Filters[i];
        if (f.empty())
            continue;
        if (f.b[0] == '-')
        {
            // Subtract
            if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.begin()+1, f.end()) != NULL)
                return false;
        }
        else
        {
            // Grep
            if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.begin(), f.end()) != NULL)
                return true;
        }
    }

    // Implicit * grep
    if (CountGrep == 0)
        return true;

    return false;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiTextBuffer
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// On some platform vsnprintf() takes va_list by reference and modifies it.
// va_copy is the 'correct' way to copy a va_list but Visual Studio prior to 2013 doesn't have it.
#ifndef va_copy
#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
#define va_copy(dest, src) __builtin_va_copy(dest, src)
#else
#define va_copy(dest, src) (dest = src)
#endif
#endif

// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    va_list args_copy;
    va_copy(args_copy, args);

    int len = ImFormatStringV(NULL, 0, fmt, args);         // FIXME-OPT: could do a first pass write attempt, likely successful on first pass.
    if (len <= 0)
    {
        va_end(args_copy);
        return;
    }

    const int write_off = Buf.Size;
    const int needed_sz = write_off + len;
    if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity)
    {
        int double_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
        Buf.reserve(needed_sz > double_capacity ? needed_sz : double_capacity);
    }

    Buf.resize(needed_sz);
    ImFormatStringV(&Buf[write_off - 1], (size_t)len + 1, fmt, args_copy);
    va_end(args_copy);
}

void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendf(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    appendfv(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiSimpleColumns (internal use only)
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ImGuiMenuColumns::ImGuiMenuColumns()
{
    Count = 0;
    Spacing = Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    memset(Pos, 0, sizeof(Pos));
    memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
}

void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(int count, float spacing, bool clear)
{
    IM_ASSERT(Count <= IM_ARRAYSIZE(Pos));
    Count = count;
    Width = NextWidth = 0.0f;
    Spacing = spacing;
    if (clear) memset(NextWidths, 0, sizeof(NextWidths));
    for (int i = 0; i < Count; i++)
    {
        if (i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f)
            Width += Spacing;
        Pos[i] = (float)(int)Width;
        Width += NextWidths[i];
        NextWidths[i] = 0.0f;
    }
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w0, float w1, float w2) // not using va_arg because they promote float to double
{
    NextWidth = 0.0f;
    NextWidths[0] = ImMax(NextWidths[0], w0);
    NextWidths[1] = ImMax(NextWidths[1], w1);
    NextWidths[2] = ImMax(NextWidths[2], w2);
    for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
        NextWidth += NextWidths[i] + ((i > 0 && NextWidths[i] > 0.0f) ? Spacing : 0.0f);
    return ImMax(Width, NextWidth);
}

float ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcExtraSpace(float avail_w)
{
    return ImMax(0.0f, avail_w - Width);
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiListClipper
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

static void SetCursorPosYAndSetupDummyPrevLine(float pos_y, float line_height)
{
    // Set cursor position and a few other things so that SetScrollHere() and Columns() can work when seeking cursor.
    // FIXME: It is problematic that we have to do that here, because custom/equivalent end-user code would stumble on the same issue.
    // The clipper should probably have a 4th step to display the last item in a regular manner.
    ImGui::SetCursorPosY(pos_y);
    ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_height;      // Setting those fields so that SetScrollHere() can properly function after the end of our clipper usage.
    window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = (line_height - GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y);    // If we end up needing more accurate data (to e.g. use SameLine) we may as well make the clipper have a fourth step to let user process and display the last item in their list.
    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
        window->DC.ColumnsSet->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;           // Setting this so that cell Y position are set properly
}

// Use case A: Begin() called from constructor with items_height<0, then called again from Sync() in StepNo 1
// Use case B: Begin() called from constructor with items_height>0
// FIXME-LEGACY: Ideally we should remove the Begin/End functions but they are part of the legacy API we still support. This is why some of the code in Step() calling Begin() and reassign some fields, spaghetti style.
void ImGuiListClipper::Begin(int count, float items_height)
{
    StartPosY = ImGui::GetCursorPosY();
    ItemsHeight = items_height;
    ItemsCount = count;
    StepNo = 0;
    DisplayEnd = DisplayStart = -1;
    if (ItemsHeight > 0.0f)
    {
        ImGui::CalcListClipping(ItemsCount, ItemsHeight, &DisplayStart, &DisplayEnd); // calculate how many to clip/display
        if (DisplayStart > 0)
            SetCursorPosYAndSetupDummyPrevLine(StartPosY + DisplayStart * ItemsHeight, ItemsHeight); // advance cursor
        StepNo = 2;
    }
}

void ImGuiListClipper::End()
{
    if (ItemsCount < 0)
        return;
    // In theory here we should assert that ImGui::GetCursorPosY() == StartPosY + DisplayEnd * ItemsHeight, but it feels saner to just seek at the end and not assert/crash the user.
    if (ItemsCount < INT_MAX)
        SetCursorPosYAndSetupDummyPrevLine(StartPosY + ItemsCount * ItemsHeight, ItemsHeight); // advance cursor
    ItemsCount = -1;
    StepNo = 3;
}

bool ImGuiListClipper::Step()
{
    if (ItemsCount == 0 || ImGui::GetCurrentWindowRead()->SkipItems)
    {
        ItemsCount = -1;
        return false;
    }
    if (StepNo == 0) // Step 0: the clipper let you process the first element, regardless of it being visible or not, so we can measure the element height.
    {
        DisplayStart = 0;
        DisplayEnd = 1;
        StartPosY = ImGui::GetCursorPosY();
        StepNo = 1;
        return true;
    }
    if (StepNo == 1) // Step 1: the clipper infer height from first element, calculate the actual range of elements to display, and position the cursor before the first element.
    {
        if (ItemsCount == 1) { ItemsCount = -1; return false; }
        float items_height = ImGui::GetCursorPosY() - StartPosY;
        IM_ASSERT(items_height > 0.0f);   // If this triggers, it means Item 0 hasn't moved the cursor vertically
        Begin(ItemsCount-1, items_height);
        DisplayStart++;
        DisplayEnd++;
        StepNo = 3;
        return true;
    }
    if (StepNo == 2) // Step 2: dummy step only required if an explicit items_height was passed to constructor or Begin() and user still call Step(). Does nothing and switch to Step 3.
    {
        IM_ASSERT(DisplayStart >= 0 && DisplayEnd >= 0);
        StepNo = 3;
        return true;
    }
    if (StepNo == 3) // Step 3: the clipper validate that we have reached the expected Y position (corresponding to element DisplayEnd), advance the cursor to the end of the list and then returns 'false' to end the loop.
        End();
    return false;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// ImGuiWindow
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ImGuiWindow::ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* context, const char* name)
    : DrawListInst(&context->DrawListSharedData)
{
    Name = ImStrdup(name);
    ID = ImHash(name, 0);
    IDStack.push_back(ID);
    Flags = 0;
    Pos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    Size = SizeFull = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    SizeContents = SizeContentsExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    WindowRounding = 0.0f;
    WindowBorderSize = 0.0f;
    MoveId = GetID("#MOVE");
    ChildId = 0;
    Scroll = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
    ScrollTargetCenterRatio = ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
    ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    ScrollbarX = ScrollbarY = false;
    Active = WasActive = false;
    WriteAccessed = false;
    Collapsed = false;
    WantCollapseToggle = false;
    SkipItems = false;
    Appearing = false;
    Hidden = false;
    HasCloseButton = false;
    BeginOrderWithinParent = -1;
    BeginOrderWithinContext = -1;
    BeginCount = 0;
    PopupId = 0;
    AutoFitFramesX = AutoFitFramesY = -1;
    AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
    AutoFitChildAxises = 0x00;
    AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
    HiddenFramesRegular = HiddenFramesForResize = 0;
    SetWindowPosAllowFlags = SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = ImGuiCond_Always | ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing;
    SetWindowPosVal = SetWindowPosPivot = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);

    LastFrameActive = -1;
    ItemWidthDefault = 0.0f;
    FontWindowScale = 1.0f;
    SettingsIdx = -1;

    DrawList = &DrawListInst;
    DrawList->_OwnerName = Name;
    ParentWindow = NULL;
    RootWindow = NULL;
    RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = NULL;
    RootWindowForNav = NULL;

    NavLastIds[0] = NavLastIds[1] = 0;
    NavRectRel[0] = NavRectRel[1] = ImRect();
    NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL;

    FocusIdxAllCounter = FocusIdxTabCounter = -1;
    FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent = FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent = INT_MAX;
    FocusIdxAllRequestNext = FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
}

ImGuiWindow::~ImGuiWindow()
{
    IM_ASSERT(DrawList == &DrawListInst);
    IM_DELETE(Name);
    for (int i = 0; i != ColumnsStorage.Size; i++)
        ColumnsStorage[i].~ImGuiColumnsSet();
}

ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end)
{
    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
    ImGuiID id = ImHash(str, str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : 0, seed);
    ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
    return id;
}

ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const void* ptr)
{
    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
    ImGuiID id = ImHash(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
    ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
    return id;
}

ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDNoKeepAlive(const char* str, const char* str_end)
{
    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
    return ImHash(str, str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : 0, seed);
}

ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDNoKeepAlive(const void* ptr)
{
    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
    return ImHash(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
}

// This is only used in rare/specific situations to manufacture an ID out of nowhere.
ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs)
{
    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
    const int r_rel[4] = { (int)(r_abs.Min.x - Pos.x), (int)(r_abs.Min.y - Pos.y), (int)(r_abs.Max.x - Pos.x), (int)(r_abs.Max.y - Pos.y) };
    ImGuiID id = ImHash(&r_rel, sizeof(r_rel), seed);
    ImGui::KeepAliveID(id);
    return id;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// Internal API exposed in imgui_internal.h
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.CurrentWindow = window;
    if (window)
        g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
}

void ImGui::SetNavID(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow);
    IM_ASSERT(nav_layer == 0 || nav_layer == 1);
    g.NavId = id;
    g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id;
}

void ImGui::SetNavIDWithRectRel(ImGuiID id, int nav_layer, const ImRect& rect_rel)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    SetNavID(id, nav_layer);
    g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = rect_rel;
    g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
    g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
    g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
}

void ImGui::SetActiveID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = (g.ActiveId != id);
    if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
    {
        g.ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
        g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited = false;
        if (id != 0)
        {
            g.LastActiveId = id;
            g.LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
        }
    }
    g.ActiveId = id;
    g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = 0;
    g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
    g.ActiveIdWindow = window;
    if (id)
    {
        g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
        g.ActiveIdSource = (g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id || g.NavJustTabbedId == id || g.NavJustMovedToId == id) ? ImGuiInputSource_Nav : ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
    }
}

void ImGui::SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);

    // Assume that SetFocusID() is called in the context where its NavLayer is the current layer, which is the case everywhere we call it.
    const int nav_layer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
    if (g.NavWindow != window)
        g.NavInitRequest = false;
    g.NavId = id;
    g.NavWindow = window;
    g.NavLayer = nav_layer;
    window->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id;
    if (window->DC.LastItemId == id)
        window->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = ImRect(window->DC.LastItemRect.Min - window->Pos, window->DC.LastItemRect.Max - window->Pos);

    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
    else
        g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
}

void ImGui::ClearActiveID()
{
    SetActiveID(0, NULL);
}

void ImGui::SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.HoveredId = id;
    g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
    if (id != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id)
        g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetHoveredID()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.HoveredId ? g.HoveredId : g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
}

void ImGui::KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
        g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
    if (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id)
        g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = true;
}

void ImGui::MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id)
{
    // This marking is solely to be able to provide info for IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit().
    // ActiveId might have been released by the time we call this (as in the typical press/release button behavior) but still need need to fill the data.
    (void)id; // Avoid unused variable warnings when asserts are compiled out.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == 0 || g.DragDropActive);
    //IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId == id);
    g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited = true;
    g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited;
}

static inline bool IsWindowContentHoverable(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
{
    // An active popup disable hovering on other windows (apart from its own children)
    // FIXME-OPT: This could be cached/stored within the window.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.NavWindow)
        if (ImGuiWindow* focused_root_window = g.NavWindow->RootWindow)
            if (focused_root_window->WasActive && focused_root_window != window->RootWindow)
            {
                // For the purpose of those flags we differentiate "standard popup" from "modal popup"
                // NB: The order of those two tests is important because Modal windows are also Popups.
                if (focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
                    return false;
                if ((focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
                    return false;
            }

    return true;
}

// Advance cursor given item size for layout.
void ImGui::ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_offset_y)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    // Always align ourselves on pixel boundaries
    const float line_height = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, size.y);
    const float text_base_offset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset, text_offset_y);
    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(size.x, line_height), IM_COL32(255,0,0,200)); // [DEBUG]
    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2((float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x), (float)(int)(window->DC.CursorPos.y + line_height + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y));
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x);
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddCircle(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, 3.0f, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), 4); // [DEBUG]

    window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = line_height;
    window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = text_base_offset;
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;

    // Horizontal layout mode
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
        SameLine();
}

void ImGui::ItemSize(const ImRect& bb, float text_offset_y)
{
    ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), text_offset_y);
}

static ImGuiDir inline NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(float dx, float dy)
{
    if (ImFabs(dx) > ImFabs(dy))
        return (dx > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Left;
    return (dy > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Up;
}

static float inline NavScoreItemDistInterval(float a0, float a1, float b0, float b1)
{
    if (a1 < b0)
        return a1 - b0;
    if (b1 < a0)
        return a0 - b1;
    return 0.0f;
}

static void inline NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImRect& r, const ImRect& clip_rect)
{
    if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
    {
        r.Min.y = ImClamp(r.Min.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
        r.Max.y = ImClamp(r.Max.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
    }
    else
    {
        r.Min.x = ImClamp(r.Min.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
        r.Max.x = ImClamp(r.Max.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
    }
}

// Scoring function for directional navigation. Based on https://gist.github.com/rygorous/6981057
static bool NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavMoveResult* result, ImRect cand)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
        return false;

    const ImRect& curr = g.NavScoringRectScreen; // Current modified source rect (NB: we've applied Max.x = Min.x in NavUpdate() to inhibit the effect of having varied item width)
    g.NavScoringCount++;

    // When entering through a NavFlattened border, we consider child window items as fully clipped for scoring
    if (window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
    {
        IM_ASSERT((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
        if (!window->ClipRect.Contains(cand))
            return false;
        cand.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); // This allows the scored item to not overlap other candidates in the parent window
    }

    // We perform scoring on items bounding box clipped by the current clipping rectangle on the other axis (clipping on our movement axis would give us equal scores for all clipped items)
    // For example, this ensure that items in one column are not reached when moving vertically from items in another column.
    NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(g.NavMoveClipDir, cand, window->ClipRect);

    // Compute distance between boxes
    // FIXME-NAV: Introducing biases for vertical navigation, needs to be removed.
    float dbx = NavScoreItemDistInterval(cand.Min.x, cand.Max.x, curr.Min.x, curr.Max.x);
    float dby = NavScoreItemDistInterval(ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.8f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.8f)); // Scale down on Y to keep using box-distance for vertically touching items
    if (dby != 0.0f && dbx != 0.0f)
       dbx = (dbx/1000.0f) + ((dbx > 0.0f) ? +1.0f : -1.0f);
    float dist_box = ImFabs(dbx) + ImFabs(dby);

    // Compute distance between centers (this is off by a factor of 2, but we only compare center distances with each other so it doesn't matter)
    float dcx = (cand.Min.x + cand.Max.x) - (curr.Min.x + curr.Max.x);
    float dcy = (cand.Min.y + cand.Max.y) - (curr.Min.y + curr.Max.y);
    float dist_center = ImFabs(dcx) + ImFabs(dcy); // L1 metric (need this for our connectedness guarantee)

    // Determine which quadrant of 'curr' our candidate item 'cand' lies in based on distance
    ImGuiDir quadrant;
    float dax = 0.0f, day = 0.0f, dist_axial = 0.0f;
    if (dbx != 0.0f || dby != 0.0f)
    {
        // For non-overlapping boxes, use distance between boxes
        dax = dbx;
        day = dby;
        dist_axial = dist_box;
        quadrant = NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(dbx, dby);
    }
    else if (dcx != 0.0f || dcy != 0.0f)
    {
        // For overlapping boxes with different centers, use distance between centers
        dax = dcx;
        day = dcy;
        dist_axial = dist_center;
        quadrant = NavScoreItemGetQuadrant(dcx, dcy);
    }
    else
    {
        // Degenerate case: two overlapping buttons with same center, break ties arbitrarily (note that LastItemId here is really the _previous_ item order, but it doesn't matter)
        quadrant = (window->DC.LastItemId < g.NavId) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Right;
    }

#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
    char buf[128];
    if (ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(cand.Min, cand.Max))
    {
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "dbox (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\ndcen (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nd (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nnav %c, quadrant %c", dbx, dby, dist_box, dcx, dcy, dist_center, dax, day, dist_axial, "WENS"[g.NavMoveDir], "WENS"[quadrant]);
        ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList();
        draw_list->AddRect(curr.Min, curr.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,100));
        draw_list->AddRect(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,200));
        draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Max-ImVec2(4,4), cand.Max+ImGui::CalcTextSize(buf)+ImVec2(4,4), IM_COL32(40,0,0,150));
        draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Max, ~0U, buf);
    }
    else if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) // Hold to preview score in matching quadrant. Press C to rotate.
    {
        if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) { g.NavMoveDirLast = (ImGuiDir)((g.NavMoveDirLast + 1) & 3); g.IO.KeysDownDuration[g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_C]] = 0.01f; }
        if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
        {
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%.0f/%.0f", dist_box, dist_center);
            ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList();
            draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200));
            draw_list->AddText(g.IO.FontDefault, 13.0f, cand.Min, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
        }
    }
 #endif

    // Is it in the quadrant we're interesting in moving to?
    bool new_best = false;
    if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
    {
        // Does it beat the current best candidate?
        if (dist_box < result->DistBox)
        {
            result->DistBox = dist_box;
            result->DistCenter = dist_center;
            return true;
        }
        if (dist_box == result->DistBox)
        {
            // Try using distance between center points to break ties
            if (dist_center < result->DistCenter)
            {
                result->DistCenter = dist_center;
                new_best = true;
            }
            else if (dist_center == result->DistCenter)
            {
                // Still tied! we need to be extra-careful to make sure everything gets linked properly. We consistently break ties by symbolically moving "later" items
                // (with higher index) to the right/downwards by an infinitesimal amount since we the current "best" button already (so it must have a lower index),
                // this is fairly easy. This rule ensures that all buttons with dx==dy==0 will end up being linked in order of appearance along the x axis.
                if (((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? dby : dbx) < 0.0f) // moving bj to the right/down decreases distance
                    new_best = true;
            }
        }
    }

    // Axial check: if 'curr' has no link at all in some direction and 'cand' lies roughly in that direction, add a tentative link. This will only be kept if no "real" matches
    // are found, so it only augments the graph produced by the above method using extra links. (important, since it doesn't guarantee strong connectedness)
    // This is just to avoid buttons having no links in a particular direction when there's a suitable neighbor. you get good graphs without this too.
    // 2017/09/29: FIXME: This now currently only enabled inside menu bars, ideally we'd disable it everywhere. Menus in particular need to catch failure. For general navigation it feels awkward.
    // Disabling it may lead to disconnected graphs when nodes are very spaced out on different axis. Perhaps consider offering this as an option?
    if (result->DistBox == FLT_MAX && dist_axial < result->DistAxial)  // Check axial match
        if (g.NavLayer == 1 && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            if ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && dax < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && dax > 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && day < 0.0f) || (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && day > 0.0f))
            {
                result->DistAxial = dist_axial;
                new_best = true;
            }

    return new_best;
}

static void NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* child_window)
{
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = child_window;
    while (parent_window && (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && (parent_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
        parent_window = parent_window->ParentWindow;
    if (parent_window && parent_window != child_window)
        parent_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = child_window;
}

// Call when we are expected to land on Layer 0 after FocusWindow()
static ImGuiWindow* NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    return window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow : window;
}

static void NavRestoreLayer(int layer)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NavLayer = layer;
    if (layer == 0)
        g.NavWindow = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
    if (layer == 0 && g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] != 0)
        ImGui::SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0], layer, g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[0]);
    else
        ImGui::NavInitWindow(g.NavWindow, true);
}

static inline void NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NavAnyRequest = g.NavMoveRequest || g.NavInitRequest || (IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING && g.NavWindow != NULL);
    if (g.NavAnyRequest)
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
}

bool ImGui::NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0;
}

void ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NavMoveRequest = false;
    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
}

// We get there when either NavId == id, or when g.NavAnyRequest is set (which is updated by NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag above)
static void ImGui::NavProcessItem(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& nav_bb, const ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    //if (!g.IO.NavActive)  // [2017/10/06] Removed this possibly redundant test but I am not sure of all the side-effects yet. Some of the feature here will need to work regardless of using a _NoNavInputs flag.
    //    return;

    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = window->DC.ItemFlags;
    const ImRect nav_bb_rel(nav_bb.Min - window->Pos, nav_bb.Max - window->Pos);

    // Process Init Request
    if (g.NavInitRequest && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
    {
        // Even if 'ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus' is on (typically collapse/close button) we record the first ResultId so they can be used as a fallback
        if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus) || g.NavInitResultId == 0)
        {
            g.NavInitResultId = id;
            g.NavInitResultRectRel = nav_bb_rel;
        }
        if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus))
        {
            g.NavInitRequest = false; // Found a match, clear request
            NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
        }
    }

    // Process Move Request (scoring for navigation)
    // FIXME-NAV: Consider policy for double scoring (scoring from NavScoringRectScreen + scoring from a rect wrapped according to current wrapping policy)
    if ((g.NavId != id || (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)) && !(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav))
    {
        ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (window == g.NavWindow) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
        // [DEBUG] Score all items in NavWindow at all times
        if (!g.NavMoveRequest)
            g.NavMoveDir = g.NavMoveDirLast;
        bool new_best = NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb) && g.NavMoveRequest;
#else
        bool new_best = g.NavMoveRequest && NavScoreItem(result, nav_bb);
#endif
        if (new_best)
        {
            result->ID = id;
            result->Window = window;
            result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
        }

        const float VISIBLE_RATIO = 0.70f;
        if ((g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) && window->ClipRect.Overlaps(nav_bb))
            if (ImClamp(nav_bb.Max.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) - ImClamp(nav_bb.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) >= (nav_bb.Max.y - nav_bb.Min.y) * VISIBLE_RATIO)
                if (NavScoreItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet, nav_bb))
                {
                    result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;
                    result->ID = id;
                    result->Window = window;
                    result->RectRel = nav_bb_rel;
                }
    }

    // Update window-relative bounding box of navigated item
    if (g.NavId == id)
    {
        g.NavWindow = window;                                           // Always refresh g.NavWindow, because some operations such as FocusItem() don't have a window.
        g.NavLayer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
        g.NavIdIsAlive = true;
        g.NavIdTabCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter;
        window->NavRectRel[window->DC.NavLayerCurrent] = nav_bb_rel;    // Store item bounding box (relative to window position)
    }
}

// Declare item bounding box for clipping and interaction.
// Note that the size can be different than the one provided to ItemSize(). Typically, widgets that spread over available surface
// declare their minimum size requirement to ItemSize() and then use a larger region for drawing/interaction, which is passed to ItemAdd().
bool ImGui::ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb_arg)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (id != 0)
    {
        // Navigation processing runs prior to clipping early-out
        //  (a) So that NavInitRequest can be honored, for newly opened windows to select a default widget
        //  (b) So that we can scroll up/down past clipped items. This adds a small O(N) cost to regular navigation requests unfortunately, but it is still limited to one window.
        //      it may not scale very well for windows with ten of thousands of item, but at least NavMoveRequest is only set on user interaction, aka maximum once a frame.
        //      We could early out with "if (is_clipped && !g.NavInitRequest) return false;" but when we wouldn't be able to reach unclipped widgets. This would work if user had explicit scrolling control (e.g. mapped on a stick)
        window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask;
        if (g.NavId == id || g.NavAnyRequest)
            if (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav)
                if (window == g.NavWindow || ((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
                    NavProcessItem(window, nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb, id);
    }

    window->DC.LastItemId = id;
    window->DC.LastItemRect = bb;
    window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = 0;

    // Clipping test
    const bool is_clipped = IsClippedEx(bb, id, false);
    if (is_clipped)
        return false;
    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,120)); // [DEBUG]

    // We need to calculate this now to take account of the current clipping rectangle (as items like Selectable may change them)
    if (IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
    return true;
}

// This is roughly matching the behavior of internal-facing ItemHoverable()
// - we allow hovering to be true when ActiveId==window->MoveID, so that clicking on non-interactive items such as a Text() item still returns true with IsItemHovered()
// - this should work even for non-interactive items that have no ID, so we cannot use LastItemId
bool ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.NavDisableMouseHover && !g.NavDisableHighlight)
        return IsItemFocused();

    // Test for bounding box overlap, as updated as ItemAdd()
    if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
        return false;
    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows)) == 0);   // Flags not supported by this function

    // Test if we are hovering the right window (our window could be behind another window)
    // [2017/10/16] Reverted commit 344d48be3 and testing RootWindow instead. I believe it is correct to NOT test for RootWindow but this leaves us unable to use IsItemHovered() after EndChild() itself.
    // Until a solution is found I believe reverting to the test from 2017/09/27 is safe since this was the test that has been running for a long while.
    //if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
    //    return false;
    if (g.HoveredRootWindow != window->RootWindow && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped))
        return false;

    // Test if another item is active (e.g. being dragged)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
        if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != window->MoveId)
            return false;

    // Test if interactions on this window are blocked by an active popup or modal
    if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, flags))
        return false;

    // Test if the item is disabled
    if ((window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled))
        return false;

    // Special handling for the 1st item after Begin() which represent the title bar. When the window is collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item will never be overwritten so we need to detect tht case.
    if (window->DC.LastItemId == window->MoveId && window->WriteAccessed)
        return false;
    return true;
}

// Internal facing ItemHoverable() used when submitting widgets. Differs slightly from IsItemHovered().
bool ImGui::ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.HoveredId != 0 && g.HoveredId != id && !g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap)
        return false;

    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
        return false;
    if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
        return false;
    if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
        return false;
    if (g.NavDisableMouseHover || !IsWindowContentHoverable(window, ImGuiHoveredFlags_None))
        return false;
    if (window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)
        return false;

    SetHoveredID(id);
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool clip_even_when_logged)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (!bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect))
        if (id == 0 || id != g.ActiveId)
            if (clip_even_when_logged || !g.LogEnabled)
                return true;
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, bool tab_stop)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    const bool allow_keyboard_focus = (window->DC.ItemFlags & (ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus | ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)) == ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus;
    window->FocusIdxAllCounter++;
    if (allow_keyboard_focus)
        window->FocusIdxTabCounter++;

    // Process keyboard input at this point: TAB/Shift-TAB to tab out of the currently focused item.
    // Note that we can always TAB out of a widget that doesn't allow tabbing in.
    if (tab_stop && (g.ActiveId == id) && window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX && window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
        window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabCounter + (g.IO.KeyShift ? (allow_keyboard_focus ? -1 : 0) : +1); // Modulo on index will be applied at the end of frame once we've got the total counter of items.

    if (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent)
        return true;
    if (allow_keyboard_focus && window->FocusIdxTabCounter == window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent)
    {
        g.NavJustTabbedId = id;
        return true;
    }

    return false;
}

void ImGui::FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    window->FocusIdxAllCounter--;
    window->FocusIdxTabCounter--;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_x, float default_y)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 content_max;
    if (size.x < 0.0f || size.y < 0.0f)
        content_max = g.CurrentWindow->Pos + GetContentRegionMax();
    if (size.x <= 0.0f)
        size.x = (size.x == 0.0f) ? default_x : ImMax(content_max.x - g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos.x, 4.0f) + size.x;
    if (size.y <= 0.0f)
        size.y = (size.y == 0.0f) ? default_y : ImMax(content_max.y - g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos.y, 4.0f) + size.y;
    return size;
}

float ImGui::CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x)
{
    if (wrap_pos_x < 0.0f)
        return 0.0f;

    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    if (wrap_pos_x == 0.0f)
        wrap_pos_x = GetContentRegionMax().x + window->Pos.x;
    else if (wrap_pos_x > 0.0f)
        wrap_pos_x += window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x; // wrap_pos_x is provided is window local space

    return ImMax(wrap_pos_x - pos.x, 1.0f);
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

void* ImGui::MemAlloc(size_t size)
{
    if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
        ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations++;
    return GImAllocatorAllocFunc(size, GImAllocatorUserData);
}

void ImGui::MemFree(void* ptr)
{
    if (ptr) 
        if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
            ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations--;
    return GImAllocatorFreeFunc(ptr, GImAllocatorUserData);
}

const char* ImGui::GetClipboardText()
{
    return GImGui->IO.GetClipboardTextFn ? GImGui->IO.GetClipboardTextFn(GImGui->IO.ClipboardUserData) : "";
}

void ImGui::SetClipboardText(const char* text)
{
    if (GImGui->IO.SetClipboardTextFn)
        GImGui->IO.SetClipboardTextFn(GImGui->IO.ClipboardUserData, text);
}

const char* ImGui::GetVersion()
{
    return IMGUI_VERSION;
}

// Internal state access - if you want to share ImGui state between modules (e.g. DLL) or allocate it yourself
// Note that we still point to some static data and members (such as GFontAtlas), so the state instance you end up using will point to the static data within its module
ImGuiContext* ImGui::GetCurrentContext()
{
    return GImGui;
}

void ImGui::SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx)
{
#ifdef IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC
    IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC(ctx); // For custom thread-based hackery you may want to have control over this.
#else
    GImGui = ctx;
#endif
}

// Helper function to verify that the type sizes are matching between the calling file's compilation unit and imgui.cpp's compilation unit
// If the user has inconsistent compilation settings, imgui configuration #define, packing pragma, etc. you may see different structures from what imgui.cpp sees which is highly problematic.
bool ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_vert)
{
    bool error = false;
    if (strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION)!=0) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(strcmp(version,IMGUI_VERSION)==0 && "Mismatched version string!");  }
    if (sz_io    != sizeof(ImGuiIO))       { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_io    == sizeof(ImGuiIO)      && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
    if (sz_style != sizeof(ImGuiStyle))    { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_style == sizeof(ImGuiStyle)   && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
    if (sz_vec2  != sizeof(ImVec2))        { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec2  == sizeof(ImVec2)       && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
    if (sz_vec4  != sizeof(ImVec4))        { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec4  == sizeof(ImVec4)       && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
    if (sz_vert  != sizeof(ImDrawVert))    { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vert  == sizeof(ImDrawVert)   && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
    return !error;
}

void ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void(*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data)
{
    GImAllocatorAllocFunc = alloc_func;
    GImAllocatorFreeFunc = free_func;
    GImAllocatorUserData = user_data;
}

ImGuiContext* ImGui::CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas)
{
    ImGuiContext* ctx = IM_NEW(ImGuiContext)(shared_font_atlas);
    if (GImGui == NULL)
        SetCurrentContext(ctx);
    Initialize(ctx);
    return ctx;
}

void ImGui::DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx)
{
    if (ctx == NULL)
        ctx = GImGui;
    Shutdown(ctx);
    if (GImGui == ctx)
        SetCurrentContext(NULL);
    IM_DELETE(ctx);
}

ImGuiIO& ImGui::GetIO()
{
    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
    return GImGui->IO;
}

ImGuiStyle& ImGui::GetStyle()
{
    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
    return GImGui->Style;
}

// Same value as passed to the old io.RenderDrawListsFn function. Valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame()
ImDrawData* ImGui::GetDrawData()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.DrawData.Valid ? &g.DrawData : NULL;
}

double ImGui::GetTime()
{
    return GImGui->Time;
}

int ImGui::GetFrameCount()
{
    return GImGui->FrameCount;
}

ImDrawList* ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList()
{
    return &GImGui->OverlayDrawList;
}

ImDrawListSharedData* ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()
{
    return &GImGui->DrawListSharedData;
}

// This needs to be called before we submit any widget (aka in or before Begin)
void ImGui::NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(window == g.NavWindow);
    bool init_for_nav = false;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
        if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || (window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) || force_reinit)
            init_for_nav = true;
    if (init_for_nav)
    {
        SetNavID(0, g.NavLayer);
        g.NavInitRequest = true;
        g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
        g.NavInitResultId = 0;
        g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect();
        NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
    }
    else
    {
        g.NavId = window->NavLastIds[0];
    }
}

static ImVec2 NavCalcPreferredRefPos()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !g.NavWindow)
        return ImFloor(g.IO.MousePos);

    // When navigation is active and mouse is disabled, decide on an arbitrary position around the bottom left of the currently navigated item
    const ImRect& rect_rel = g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
    ImVec2 pos = g.NavWindow->Pos + ImVec2(rect_rel.Min.x + ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.x*4, rect_rel.GetWidth()), rect_rel.Max.y - ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.y, rect_rel.GetHeight()));
    ImRect visible_rect = GetViewportRect();
    return ImFloor(ImClamp(pos, visible_rect.Min, visible_rect.Max));   // ImFloor() is important because non-integer mouse position application in back-end might be lossy and result in undesirable non-zero delta.
}

static int FindWindowIndex(ImGuiWindow* window) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int i = g.Windows.Size-1; i >= 0; i--)
        if (g.Windows[i] == window)
            return i;
    return -1;
}

static ImGuiWindow* FindWindowNavFocusable(int i_start, int i_stop, int dir) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int i = i_start; i >= 0 && i < g.Windows.Size && i != i_stop; i += dir)
        if (ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(g.Windows[i]))
            return g.Windows[i];
    return NULL;
}

float ImGui::GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput n, ImGuiInputReadMode mode)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Down)
        return g.IO.NavInputs[n];                         // Instant, read analog input (0.0f..1.0f, as provided by user)

    const float t = g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[n];
    if (t < 0.0f && mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Released)  // Return 1.0f when just released, no repeat, ignore analog input.
        return (g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev[n] >= 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
    if (t < 0.0f)
        return 0.0f;
    if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed)               // Return 1.0f when just pressed, no repeat, ignore analog input.
        return (t == 0.0f) ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
    if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)
        return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.80f);
    if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow)
        return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 1.00f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 2.00f);
    if (mode == ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast)
        return (float)CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.80f, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.30f);
    return 0.0f;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags dir_sources, ImGuiInputReadMode mode, float slow_factor, float fast_factor)
{
    ImVec2 delta(0.0f, 0.0f);
    if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard)
        delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_, mode)   - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_,   mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_,   mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_,   mode));
    if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad)
        delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, mode)   - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft,   mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown,   mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp,   mode));
    if (dir_sources & ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick)
        delta += ImVec2(GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, mode), GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, mode) - GetNavInputAmount(ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, mode));
    if (slow_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
        delta *= slow_factor;
    if (fast_factor != 0.0f && IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
        delta *= fast_factor;
    return delta;
}

static void NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(int focus_change_dir)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget);
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
        return;

    const int i_current = FindWindowIndex(g.NavWindowingTarget);
    ImGuiWindow* window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable(i_current + focus_change_dir, -INT_MAX, focus_change_dir);
    if (!window_target)
        window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable((focus_change_dir < 0) ? (g.Windows.Size - 1) : 0, i_current, focus_change_dir);
    if (window_target) // Don't reset windowing target if there's a single window in the list
        g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window_target;
    g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
}

// Window management mode (hold to: change focus/move/resize, tap to: toggle menu layer)
static void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowing()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* apply_focus_window = NULL;
    bool apply_toggle_layer = false;

    ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
    if (modal_window != NULL)
    {
        g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
        return;
    }

    // Fade out
    if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && g.NavWindowingTarget == NULL)
    {
        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
        if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f)
            g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = NULL;
    }

    // Start CTRL-TAB or Square+L/R window selection
    bool start_windowing_with_gamepad = !g.NavWindowingTarget && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Menu, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
    bool start_windowing_with_keyboard = !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
    if (start_windowing_with_gamepad || start_windowing_with_keyboard)
        if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow : FindWindowNavFocusable(g.Windows.Size - 1, -INT_MAX, -1))
        {
            g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window;
            g.NavWindowingTimer = g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? false : true;
            g.NavInputSource = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard : ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;
        }

    // Gamepad update
    g.NavWindowingTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
    {
        // Highlight only appears after a brief time holding the button, so that a fast tap on PadMenu (to toggle NavLayer) doesn't add visual noise
        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f));

        // Select window to focus
        const int focus_change_dir = (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow) - (int)IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatSlow);
        if (focus_change_dir != 0)
        {
            NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(focus_change_dir);
            g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 1.0f;
        }

        // Single press toggles NavLayer, long press with L/R apply actual focus on release (until then the window was merely rendered front-most)
        if (!IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Menu))
        {
            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer &= (g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha < 1.0f); // Once button was held long enough we don't consider it a tap-to-toggle-layer press anymore.
            if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavWindow)
                apply_toggle_layer = true;
            else if (!g.NavWindowingToggleLayer)
                apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
            g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
        }
    }

    // Keyboard: Focus
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard)
    {
        // Visuals only appears after a brief time after pressing TAB the first time, so that a fast CTRL+TAB doesn't add visual noise
        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); // 1.0f
        if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, true))
            NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(g.IO.KeyShift ? +1 : -1);
        if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl)
            apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
    }

    // Keyboard: Press and Release ALT to toggle menu layer
    // FIXME: We lack an explicit IO variable for "is the imgui window focused", so compare mouse validity to detect the common case of back-end clearing releases all keys on ALT-TAB
    if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Released))
        if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) == IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
            apply_toggle_layer = true;

    // Move window
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
    {
        ImVec2 move_delta;
        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && !g.IO.KeyShift)
            move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
            move_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
        if (move_delta.x != 0.0f || move_delta.y != 0.0f)
        {
            const float NAV_MOVE_SPEED = 800.0f;
            const float move_speed = ImFloor(NAV_MOVE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y)); // FIXME: Doesn't code variable framerate very well
            g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow->Pos += move_delta * move_speed;
            g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
            MarkIniSettingsDirty(g.NavWindowingTarget);
        }
    }

    // Apply final focus
    if (apply_focus_window && (g.NavWindow == NULL || apply_focus_window != g.NavWindow->RootWindow))
    {
        g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
        g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
        apply_focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(apply_focus_window);
        ClosePopupsOverWindow(apply_focus_window);
        FocusWindow(apply_focus_window);
        if (apply_focus_window->NavLastIds[0] == 0)
            NavInitWindow(apply_focus_window, false);

        // If the window only has a menu layer, select it directly
        if (apply_focus_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == (1 << 1))
            g.NavLayer = 1;
    }
    if (apply_focus_window)
        g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;

    // Apply menu/layer toggle
    if (apply_toggle_layer && g.NavWindow)
    {
        // Move to parent menu if necessary
        ImGuiWindow* new_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
        while ((new_nav_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << 1)) == 0 && (new_nav_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && (new_nav_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
            new_nav_window = new_nav_window->ParentWindow;

        if (new_nav_window != g.NavWindow)
        {
            ImGuiWindow* old_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
            FocusWindow(new_nav_window);
            new_nav_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = old_nav_window;
        }
        g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
        g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
        NavRestoreLayer((g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerActiveMask & (1 << 1)) ? (g.NavLayer ^ 1) : 0);
    }
}

// Window has already passed the IsWindowNavFocusable()
static const char* GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
        return "(Popup)";
    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) && strcmp(window->Name, "##MainMenuBar") == 0)
        return "(Main menu bar)";
    return "(Untitled)";
}

// Overlay displayed when using CTRL+TAB. Called by EndFrame().
void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowingList()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);

    if (g.NavWindowingTimer < NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY)
        return;

    if (g.NavWindowingList == NULL)
        g.NavWindowingList = FindWindowByName("###NavWindowingList");
    SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x * 0.20f, g.IO.DisplaySize.y * 0.20f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX));
    SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, g.Style.WindowPadding * 2.0f);
    Begin("###NavWindowingList", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
    for (int n = g.Windows.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
        if (!IsWindowNavFocusable(window))
            continue;
        const char* label = window->Name;
        if (label == FindRenderedTextEnd(label))
            label = GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(window);
        Selectable(label, g.NavWindowingTarget == window);
    }
    End();
    PopStyleVar();
}

// Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view
// NB: We modify rect_rel by the amount we scrolled for, so it is immediately updated.
static void NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect)
{
    ImRect window_rect(window->InnerMainRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerMainRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1));
    //g.OverlayDrawList.AddRect(window_rect.Min, window_rect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]
    if (window_rect.Contains(item_rect))
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Min.x < window_rect.Min.x)
    {
        window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Min.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
        window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
    }
    else if (window->ScrollbarX && item_rect.Max.x >= window_rect.Max.x)
    {
        window->ScrollTarget.x = item_rect.Max.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
        window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 1.0f;
    }
    if (item_rect.Min.y < window_rect.Min.y)
    {
        window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Min.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
        window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
    }
    else if (item_rect.Max.y >= window_rect.Max.y)
    {
        window->ScrollTarget.y = item_rect.Max.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
        window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 1.0f;
    }
}

static void ImGui::NavUpdate()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.IO.WantSetMousePos = false;

#if 0
    if (g.NavScoringCount > 0) printf("[%05d] NavScoringCount %d for '%s' layer %d (Init:%d, Move:%d)\n", g.FrameCount, g.NavScoringCount, g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL", g.NavLayer, g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0, g.NavMoveRequest);
#endif

    bool nav_keyboard_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
    bool nav_gamepad_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;

    // Set input source as Gamepad when buttons are pressed before we map Keyboard (some features differs when used with Gamepad vs Keyboard)
    if (nav_gamepad_active)
        if (g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Activate] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Input] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Cancel] > 0.0f || g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_Menu] > 0.0f)
            g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad;

    // Update Keyboard->Nav inputs mapping
    if (nav_keyboard_active)
    {
        #define NAV_MAP_KEY(_KEY, _NAV_INPUT) if (IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[_KEY])) { g.IO.NavInputs[_NAV_INPUT] = 1.0f; g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard; }
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Space,     ImGuiNavInput_Activate );
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Enter,     ImGuiNavInput_Input    );
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_Escape,    ImGuiNavInput_Cancel   );
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_ );
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_RightArrow,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_);
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_UpArrow,   ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_   );
        NAV_MAP_KEY(ImGuiKey_DownArrow, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_ );
        if (g.IO.KeyCtrl)   g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow] = 1.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyShift)  g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast] = 1.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)    g.IO.NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_KeyMenu_]  = 1.0f;
        #undef NAV_MAP_KEY
    }

    memcpy(g.IO.NavInputsDownDurationPrev, g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration));
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.NavInputs); i++)
        g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] = (g.IO.NavInputs[i] > 0.0f) ? (g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.NavInputsDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;

    // Process navigation init request (select first/default focus)
    if (g.NavInitResultId != 0 && (!g.NavDisableHighlight || g.NavInitRequestFromMove))
    {
        // Apply result from previous navigation init request (will typically select the first item, unless SetItemDefaultFocus() has been called)
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow);
        if (g.NavInitRequestFromMove)
            SetNavIDWithRectRel(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer, g.NavInitResultRectRel);
        else
            SetNavID(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer);
        g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = g.NavInitResultRectRel;
    }
    g.NavInitRequest = false;
    g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
    g.NavInitResultId = 0;
    g.NavJustMovedToId = 0;

    // Process navigation move request
    if (g.NavMoveRequest && (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0 || g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0))
    {
        // Select which result to use
        ImGuiNavMoveResult* result = (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;

        // PageUp/PageDown behavior first jumps to the bottom/top mostly visible item, _otherwise_ use the result from the previous/next page.
        if (g.NavMoveRequestFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet)
            if (g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.ID != g.NavId)
                result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet;

        // Maybe entering a flattened child from the outside? In this case solve the tie using the regular scoring rules.
        if (result != &g.NavMoveResultOther && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.Window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
            if ((g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox < result->DistBox) || (g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox == result->DistBox && g.NavMoveResultOther.DistCenter < result->DistCenter))
                result = &g.NavMoveResultOther;
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow && result->Window);

        // Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view.
        if (g.NavLayer == 0)
        {
            ImRect rect_abs = ImRect(result->RectRel.Min + result->Window->Pos, result->RectRel.Max + result->Window->Pos);
            NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window, rect_abs);

            // Estimate upcoming scroll so we can offset our result position so mouse position can be applied immediately after in NavUpdate()
            ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(result->Window, false);
            ImVec2 delta_scroll = result->Window->Scroll - next_scroll;
            result->RectRel.Translate(delta_scroll);

            // Also scroll parent window to keep us into view if necessary (we could/should technically recurse back the whole the parent hierarchy).
            if (result->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
                NavScrollToBringItemIntoView(result->Window->ParentWindow, ImRect(rect_abs.Min + delta_scroll, rect_abs.Max + delta_scroll));
        }

        // Apply result from previous frame navigation directional move request
        ClearActiveID();
        g.NavWindow = result->Window;
        SetNavIDWithRectRel(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->RectRel);
        g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID;
        g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
    }

    // When a forwarded move request failed, we restore the highlight that we disabled during the forward frame
    if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequest);
        if (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0)
            g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
        g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_None;
    }

    // Apply application mouse position movement, after we had a chance to process move request result.
    if (g.NavMousePosDirty && g.NavIdIsAlive)
    {
        // Set mouse position given our knowledge of the navigated item position from last frame
        if ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos))
        {
            if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow)
            {
                g.IO.MousePos = g.IO.MousePosPrev = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
                g.IO.WantSetMousePos = true;
            }
        }
        g.NavMousePosDirty = false;
    }
    g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
    g.NavJustTabbedId = 0;
    IM_ASSERT(g.NavLayer == 0 || g.NavLayer == 1);

    // Store our return window (for returning from Layer 1 to Layer 0) and clear it as soon as we step back in our own Layer 0
    if (g.NavWindow)
        NavSaveLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);
    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow != NULL && g.NavLayer == 0)
        g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL;

    NavUpdateWindowing();

    // Set output flags for user application
    g.IO.NavActive = (nav_keyboard_active || nav_gamepad_active) && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs);
    g.IO.NavVisible = (g.IO.NavActive && g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight) || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL) || g.NavInitRequest;

    // Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus)
    if (IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
    {
        if (g.ActiveId != 0)
        {
            ClearActiveID();
        }
        else if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow)
        {
            // Exit child window
            ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.NavWindow;
            ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.NavWindow->ParentWindow;
            IM_ASSERT(child_window->ChildId != 0);
            FocusWindow(parent_window);
            SetNavID(child_window->ChildId, 0);
            g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
            if (g.NavDisableMouseHover)
                g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
        }
        else if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0)
        {
            // Close open popup/menu
            if (!(g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
                ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
        }
        else if (g.NavLayer != 0)
        {
            // Leave the "menu" layer
            NavRestoreLayer(0);
        }
        else
        {
            // Clear NavLastId for popups but keep it for regular child window so we can leave one and come back where we were
            if (g.NavWindow && ((g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)))
                g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
            g.NavId = 0;
        }
    }

    // Process manual activation request
    g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = 0;
    if (g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
    {
        bool activate_down = IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_Activate);
        bool activate_pressed = activate_down && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Activate, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed);
        if (g.ActiveId == 0 && activate_pressed)
            g.NavActivateId = g.NavId;
        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_down)
            g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavId;
        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_pressed)
            g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavId;
        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && IsNavInputPressed(ImGuiNavInput_Input, ImGuiInputReadMode_Pressed))
            g.NavInputId = g.NavId;
    }
    if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
        g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
    if (g.NavActivateId != 0)
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavActivateDownId == g.NavActivateId);
    g.NavMoveRequest = false;

    // Process programmatic activation request
    if (g.NavNextActivateId != 0)
        g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavInputId = g.NavNextActivateId;
    g.NavNextActivateId = 0;

    // Initiate directional inputs request
    const int allowed_dir_flags = (g.ActiveId == 0) ? ~0 : g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags;
    if (g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
    {
        g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_None;
        g.NavMoveRequestFlags = 0;
        if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindowingTarget && allowed_dir_flags && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
        {
            if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Left))  && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_KeyLeft_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Left;
            if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Right)) && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight,ImGuiNavInput_KeyRight_,ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Right;
            if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Up))    && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp,   ImGuiNavInput_KeyUp_,   ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
            if ((allowed_dir_flags & (1<<ImGuiDir_Down))  && IsNavInputPressedAnyOfTwo(ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, ImGuiNavInput_KeyDown_, ImGuiInputReadMode_Repeat)) g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
        }
        g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir;
    }
    else
    {
        // Forwarding previous request (which has been modified, e.g. wrap around menus rewrite the requests with a starting rectangle at the other side of the window)
        // (Preserve g.NavMoveRequestFlags, g.NavMoveClipDir which were set by the NavMoveRequestForward() function)
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None && g.NavMoveClipDir != ImGuiDir_None);
        IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued);
        g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardActive;
    }

    // PageUp/PageDown scroll
    float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
    if (nav_keyboard_active && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavLayer == 0)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
        bool page_up_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Up));
        bool page_down_held = IsKeyDown(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown]) && (allowed_dir_flags & (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
        if ((page_up_held && !page_down_held) || (page_down_held && !page_up_held))
        {
            if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll)
            {
                // Fallback manual-scroll when window has no navigable item
                if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
                    SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
                else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
                    SetWindowScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y + window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight());
            }
            else
            {
                const ImRect& nav_rect_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
                const float page_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->InnerClipRect.GetHeight() - window->CalcFontSize() * 1.0f + nav_rect_rel.GetHeight());
                if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageUp], true))
                {
                    nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = -page_offset_y;
                    g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
                    g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
                    g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
                }
                else if (IsKeyPressed(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_PageDown], true))
                {
                    nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = +page_offset_y;
                    g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; // Because our scoring rect is offset, we intentionally request the opposite direction (so we can always land on the last item)
                    g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
                    g.NavMoveRequestFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
                }
            }
        }
    }

    if (g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None)
    {
        g.NavMoveRequest = true;
        g.NavMoveDirLast = g.NavMoveDir;
    }

    // If we initiate a movement request and have no current NavId, we initiate a InitDefautRequest that will be used as a fallback if the direction fails to find a match
    if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavId == 0)
    {
        g.NavInitRequest = g.NavInitRequestFromMove = true;
        g.NavInitResultId = 0;
        g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
    }

    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();

    // Scrolling
    if (g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget)
    {
        // *Fallback* manual-scroll with Nav directional keys when window has no navigable item
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
        const float scroll_speed = ImFloor(window->CalcFontSize() * 100 * g.IO.DeltaTime + 0.5f); // We need round the scrolling speed because sub-pixel scroll isn't reliably supported.
        if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll && g.NavMoveRequest)
        {
            if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right)
                SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
            if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
                SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + ((g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
        }

        // *Normal* Manual scroll with NavScrollXXX keys
        // Next movement request will clamp the NavId reference rectangle to the visible area, so navigation will resume within those bounds.
        ImVec2 scroll_dir = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadLStick, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down, 1.0f/10.0f, 10.0f);
        if (scroll_dir.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollbarX)
        {
            SetWindowScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + scroll_dir.x * scroll_speed));
            g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
        }
        if (scroll_dir.y != 0.0f)
        {
            SetWindowScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + scroll_dir.y * scroll_speed));
            g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = true;
        }
    }

    // Reset search results
    g.NavMoveResultLocal.Clear();
    g.NavMoveResultLocalVisibleSet.Clear();
    g.NavMoveResultOther.Clear();

    // When we have manually scrolled (without using navigation) and NavId becomes out of bounds, we project its bounding box to the visible area to restart navigation within visible items
    if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect && g.NavLayer == 0)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
        ImRect window_rect_rel(window->InnerMainRect.Min - window->Pos - ImVec2(1,1), window->InnerMainRect.Max - window->Pos + ImVec2(1,1));
        if (!window_rect_rel.Contains(window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]))
        {
            float pad = window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f;
            window_rect_rel.Expand(ImVec2(-ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetWidth(), pad), -ImMin(window_rect_rel.GetHeight(), pad))); // Terrible approximation for the intent of starting navigation from first fully visible item
            window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].ClipWith(window_rect_rel);
            g.NavId = 0;
        }
        g.NavMoveFromClampedRefRect = false;
    }

    // For scoring we use a single segment on the left side our current item bounding box (not touching the edge to avoid box overlap with zero-spaced items)
    ImRect nav_rect_rel = (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].IsInverted()) ? g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] : ImRect(0,0,0,0);
    g.NavScoringRectScreen = g.NavWindow ? ImRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + nav_rect_rel.Max) : GetViewportRect();
    g.NavScoringRectScreen.TranslateY(nav_scoring_rect_offset_y);
    g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x = ImMin(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x + 1.0f, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x);
    g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max.x = g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min.x;
    IM_ASSERT(!g.NavScoringRectScreen.IsInverted()); // Ensure if we have a finite, non-inverted bounding box here will allows us to remove extraneous ImFabs() calls in NavScoreItem().
    //g.OverlayDrawList.AddRect(g.NavScoringRectScreen.Min, g.NavScoringRectScreen.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); // [DEBUG]
    g.NavScoringCount = 0;
#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS
    if (g.NavWindow) { for (int layer = 0; layer < 2; layer++) GetOverlayDrawList()->AddRect(g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Min, g.NavWindow->Pos + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer].Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); } // [DEBUG]
    if (g.NavWindow) { ImU32 col = (g.NavWindow->HiddenFrames == 0) ? IM_COL32(255,0,255,255) : IM_COL32(255,0,0,255); ImVec2 p = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); char buf[32]; ImFormatString(buf, 32, "%d", g.NavLayer); g.OverlayDrawList.AddCircleFilled(p, 3.0f, col); g.OverlayDrawList.AddText(NULL, 13.0f, p + ImVec2(8,-4), col, buf); }
#endif
}

void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    // Set ActiveId even if the _NoMove flag is set. Without it, dragging away from a window with _NoMove would activate hover on other windows.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    FocusWindow(window);
    SetActiveID(window->MoveId, window);
    g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
    g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - window->RootWindow->Pos;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) && !(window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
        g.MovingWindow = window;
}

// Handle mouse moving window
// Note: moving window with the navigation keys (Square + d-pad / CTRL+TAB + Arrows) are processed in NavUpdateWindowing()
void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindow()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.MovingWindow != NULL)
    {
        // We actually want to move the root window. g.MovingWindow == window we clicked on (could be a child window).
        // We track it to preserve Focus and so that generally ActiveIdWindow == MovingWindow and ActiveId == MovingWindow->MoveId for consistency.
        KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
        IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindow);
        ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.MovingWindow->RootWindow;
        if (g.IO.MouseDown[0] && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos))
        {
            ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset;
            if (moving_window->Pos.x != pos.x || moving_window->Pos.y != pos.y)
            {
                MarkIniSettingsDirty(moving_window);
                SetWindowPos(moving_window, pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
            }
            FocusWindow(g.MovingWindow);
        }
        else
        {
            ClearActiveID();
            g.MovingWindow = NULL;
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // When clicking/dragging from a window that has the _NoMove flag, we still set the ActiveId in order to prevent hovering others.
        if (g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->MoveId == g.ActiveId)
        {
            KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
                ClearActiveID();
        }
    }
}

static bool IsWindowActiveAndVisible(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    return (window->Active) && (!window->Hidden);
}

static void ImGui::UpdateMouseInputs()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // If mouse just appeared or disappeared (usually denoted by -FLT_MAX component, but in reality we test for -256000.0f) we cancel out movement in MouseDelta
    if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePosPrev))
        g.IO.MouseDelta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MousePosPrev;
    else
        g.IO.MouseDelta = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || g.IO.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)
        g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;

    g.IO.MousePosPrev = g.IO.MousePos;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
    {
        g.IO.MouseClicked[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f;
        g.IO.MouseReleased[i] = !g.IO.MouseDown[i] && g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] >= 0.0f;
        g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i];
        g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] = g.IO.MouseDown[i] ? (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.MouseDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
        g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = false;
        if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
        {
            if ((float)(g.Time - g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i]) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickTime)
            {
                ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
                if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) < g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist * g.IO.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist)
                    g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = true;
                g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = -FLT_MAX;    // so the third click isn't turned into a double-click
            }
            else
            {
                g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] = g.Time;
            }
            g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i] = g.IO.MousePos;
            g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i] = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
            g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = 0.0f;
        }
        else if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
        {
            // Maintain the maximum distance we reaching from the initial click position, which is used with dragging threshold
            ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
            g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i], ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos));
            g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x, delta_from_click_pos.x < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.x : delta_from_click_pos.x);
            g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y = ImMax(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y, delta_from_click_pos.y < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.y : delta_from_click_pos.y);
        }
        if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i]) // Clicking any mouse button reactivate mouse hovering which may have been deactivated by gamepad/keyboard navigation
            g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
    }
}

void ImGui::UpdateMouseWheel()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!g.HoveredWindow || g.HoveredWindow->Collapsed)
        return;
    if (g.IO.MouseWheel == 0.0f && g.IO.MouseWheelH == 0.0f)
        return;

    // If a child window has the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag, we give a chance to scroll its parent (unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set).
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.HoveredWindow;
    ImGuiWindow* scroll_window = window;
    while ((scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) && scroll_window->ParentWindow)
        scroll_window = scroll_window->ParentWindow;
    const bool scroll_allowed = !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(scroll_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs);

    if (g.IO.MouseWheel != 0.0f)
    {
        if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.IO.FontAllowUserScaling)
        {
            // Zoom / Scale window
            const float new_font_scale = ImClamp(window->FontWindowScale + g.IO.MouseWheel * 0.10f, 0.50f, 2.50f);
            const float scale = new_font_scale / window->FontWindowScale;
            window->FontWindowScale = new_font_scale;

            const ImVec2 offset = window->Size * (1.0f - scale) * (g.IO.MousePos - window->Pos) / window->Size;
            window->Pos += offset;
            window->Size *= scale;
            window->SizeFull *= scale;
        }
        else if (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && scroll_allowed)
        {
            // Mouse wheel vertical scrolling
            float scroll_amount = 5 * scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
            scroll_amount = (float)(int)ImMin(scroll_amount, (scroll_window->ContentsRegionRect.GetHeight() + scroll_window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f) * 0.67f);
            SetWindowScrollY(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.y - g.IO.MouseWheel * scroll_amount);
        }
    }
    if (g.IO.MouseWheelH != 0.0f && scroll_allowed && !g.IO.KeyCtrl)
    {
        // Mouse wheel horizontal scrolling (for hardware that supports it)
        float scroll_amount = scroll_window->CalcFontSize();
        SetWindowScrollX(scroll_window, scroll_window->Scroll.x - g.IO.MouseWheelH * scroll_amount);
    }
}

// The reason this is exposed in imgui_internal.h is: on touch-based system that don't have hovering, we want to dispatch inputs to the right target (imgui vs imgui+app)
void ImGui::UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Find the window hovered by mouse:
    // - Child windows can extend beyond the limit of their parent so we need to derive HoveredRootWindow from HoveredWindow.
    // - When moving a window we can skip the search, which also conveniently bypasses the fact that window->WindowRectClipped is lagging as this point of the frame.
    // - We also support the moved window toggling the NoInputs flag after moving has started in order to be able to detect windows below it, which is useful for e.g. docking mechanisms.
    FindHoveredWindow();

    // Modal windows prevents cursor from hovering behind them.
    ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
    if (modal_window)
        if (g.HoveredRootWindow && !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredRootWindow, modal_window))
            g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow = NULL;

    // Disabled mouse?
    if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)
        g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;

    // We track click ownership. When clicked outside of a window the click is owned by the application and won't report hovering nor request capture even while dragging over our windows afterward.
    int mouse_earliest_button_down = -1;
    bool mouse_any_down = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); i++)
    {
        if (g.IO.MouseClicked[i])
            g.IO.MouseDownOwned[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());
        mouse_any_down |= g.IO.MouseDown[i];
        if (g.IO.MouseDown[i])
            if (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1 || g.IO.MouseClickedTime[i] < g.IO.MouseClickedTime[mouse_earliest_button_down])
                mouse_earliest_button_down = i;
    }
    const bool mouse_avail_to_imgui = (mouse_earliest_button_down == -1) || g.IO.MouseDownOwned[mouse_earliest_button_down];

    // If mouse was first clicked outside of ImGui bounds we also cancel out hovering.
    // FIXME: For patterns of drag and drop across OS windows, we may need to rework/remove this test (first committed 311c0ca9 on 2015/02)
    const bool mouse_dragging_extern_payload = g.DragDropActive && (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern) != 0;
    if (!mouse_avail_to_imgui && !mouse_dragging_extern_payload)
        g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;

    // Update io.WantCaptureMouse for the user application (true = dispatch mouse info to imgui, false = dispatch mouse info to imgui + app)
    if (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != -1)
        g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != 0);
    else
        g.IO.WantCaptureMouse = (mouse_avail_to_imgui && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || (!g.OpenPopupStack.empty());

    // Update io.WantCaptureKeyboard for the user application (true = dispatch keyboard info to imgui, false = dispatch keyboard info to imgui + app)
    if (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != -1)
        g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != 0);
    else
        g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.ActiveId != 0) || (modal_window != NULL);
    if (g.IO.NavActive && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard))
        g.IO.WantCaptureKeyboard = true;

    // Update io.WantTextInput flag, this is to allow systems without a keyboard (e.g. mobile, hand-held) to show a software keyboard if possible
    g.IO.WantTextInput = (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != -1) ? (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != 0) : false;
}

void ImGui::NewFrame()
{
    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Check user data
    // (We pass an error message in the assert expression to make it visible to programmers who are not using a debugger, as most assert handlers display their argument)
    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DeltaTime >= 0.0f                                    && "Need a positive DeltaTime (zero is tolerated but will cause some timing issues)");
    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DisplaySize.x >= 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y >= 0.0f  && "Invalid DisplaySize value");
    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts.Size > 0                                && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]->IsLoaded()                          && "Font Atlas not built. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8() ?");
    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f                       && "Invalid style setting");
    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.Alpha >= 0.0f && g.Style.Alpha <= 1.0f            && "Invalid style setting. Alpha cannot be negative (allows us to avoid a few clamps in color computations)");
    IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount)  && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() at the end of the previous frame?");
    for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiKey_COUNT; n++)
        IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] >= -1 && g.IO.KeyMap[n] < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown) && "io.KeyMap[] contains an out of bound value (need to be 0..512, or -1 for unmapped key)");

    // Perform simple check for required key mapping (we intentionally do NOT check all keys to not pressure user into setting up everything, but Space is required and was only recently added in 1.60 WIP)
    if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard)
        IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space] != -1 && "ImGuiKey_Space is not mapped, required for keyboard navigation.");

    // The beta io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges option requires back-end to honor mouse cursor changes and set the ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag accordingly.
    if (g.IO.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges && !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors))
        g.IO.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges = false;

    // Load settings on first frame (if not explicitly loaded manually before)
    if (!g.SettingsLoaded)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsWindows.empty());
        if (g.IO.IniFilename)
            LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
        g.SettingsLoaded = true;
    }

    // Save settings (with a delay after the last modification, so we don't spam disk too much)
    if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer > 0.0f)
    {
        g.SettingsDirtyTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime;
        if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
        {
            if (g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
                SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
            else
                g.IO.WantSaveIniSettings = true;  // Let user know they can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory(). user will need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings themselves.
            g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
        }
    }

    g.Time += g.IO.DeltaTime;
    g.FrameScopeActive = true;
    g.FrameCount += 1;
    g.TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
    g.WindowsActiveCount = 0;

    // Setup current font and draw list
    g.IO.Fonts->Locked = true;
    SetCurrentFont(GetDefaultFont());
    IM_ASSERT(g.Font->IsLoaded());
    g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
    g.DrawListSharedData.CurveTessellationTol = g.Style.CurveTessellationTol;

    g.OverlayDrawList.Clear();
    g.OverlayDrawList.PushTextureID(g.IO.Fonts->TexID);
    g.OverlayDrawList.PushClipRectFullScreen();
    g.OverlayDrawList.Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);

    // Mark rendering data as invalid to prevent user who may have a handle on it to use it
    g.DrawData.Clear();

    // Drag and drop keep the source ID alive so even if the source disappear our state is consistent
    if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == g.ActiveId)
        KeepAliveID(g.DragDropPayload.SourceId);

    // Clear reference to active widget if the widget isn't alive anymore
    if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame)
        g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
    if (g.HoveredId)
        g.HoveredIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
    g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame = g.HoveredId;
    g.HoveredId = 0;
    g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
    if (g.ActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.ActiveId && g.ActiveId != 0)
        ClearActiveID();
    if (g.ActiveId)
        g.ActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
    g.LastActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame = g.ActiveId;
    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = g.ActiveIdWindow;
    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited = g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited;
    g.ActiveIdIsAlive = 0;
    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
    g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
    if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId && g.ActiveId != g.ScalarAsInputTextId)
        g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;

    // Drag and drop
    g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr;
    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0;
    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
    g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;

    // Update keyboard input state
    memcpy(g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev, g.IO.KeysDownDuration, sizeof(g.IO.KeysDownDuration));
    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown); i++)
        g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] = g.IO.KeysDown[i] ? (g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : g.IO.KeysDownDuration[i] + g.IO.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;

    // Update gamepad/keyboard directional navigation
    NavUpdate();

    // Update mouse input state
    UpdateMouseInputs();

    // Calculate frame-rate for the user, as a purely luxurious feature
    g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum += g.IO.DeltaTime - g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx];
    g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx] = g.IO.DeltaTime;
    g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame);
    g.IO.Framerate = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum > 0.0f) ? (1.0f / (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum / (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame))) : FLT_MAX;

    // Handle user moving window with mouse (at the beginning of the frame to avoid input lag or sheering)
    UpdateMouseMovingWindow();
    UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();

    // Background darkening/whitening
    if (GetFrontMostPopupModal() != NULL || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha > 0.0f))
        g.DimBgRatio = ImMin(g.DimBgRatio + g.IO.DeltaTime * 6.0f, 1.0f);
    else
        g.DimBgRatio = ImMax(g.DimBgRatio - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);

    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow;
    g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = g.WantTextInputNextFrame = -1;
    g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f); // OS Input Method Editor showing on top-left of our window by default

    // Mouse wheel scrolling, scale
    UpdateMouseWheel();

    // Pressing TAB activate widget focus
    if (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.NavWindow != NULL && g.NavWindow->Active && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab, false))
    {
        if (g.NavId != 0 && g.NavIdTabCounter != INT_MAX)
            g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.NavIdTabCounter + 1 + (g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 1);
        else
            g.NavWindow->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : 0;
    }
    g.NavIdTabCounter = INT_MAX;

    // Mark all windows as not visible
    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
        window->WasActive = window->Active;
        window->Active = false;
        window->WriteAccessed = false;
    }

    // Closing the focused window restore focus to the first active root window in descending z-order
    if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->WasActive)
        FocusFrontMostActiveWindowIgnoringOne(NULL);

    // No window should be open at the beginning of the frame.
    // But in order to allow the user to call NewFrame() multiple times without calling Render(), we are doing an explicit clear.
    g.CurrentWindowStack.resize(0);
    g.CurrentPopupStack.resize(0);
    ClosePopupsOverWindow(g.NavWindow);

    // Create implicit window - we will only render it if the user has added something to it.
    // We don't use "Debug" to avoid colliding with user trying to create a "Debug" window with custom flags.
    SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(400,400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
    Begin("Debug##Default");
}

static void* SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
{
    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImHash(name, 0));
    if (!settings)
        settings = CreateNewWindowSettings(name);
    return (void*)settings;
}

static void SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line)
{
    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (ImGuiWindowSettings*)entry;
    float x, y;
    int i;
    if (sscanf(line, "Pos=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2)         settings->Pos = ImVec2(x, y);
    else if (sscanf(line, "Size=%f,%f", &x, &y) == 2)   settings->Size = ImMax(ImVec2(x, y), GImGui->Style.WindowMinSize);
    else if (sscanf(line, "Collapsed=%d", &i) == 1)     settings->Collapsed = (i != 0);
}

static void SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* imgui_ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
{
    // Gather data from windows that were active during this session
    ImGuiContext& g = *imgui_ctx;
    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)
            continue;

        ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (window->SettingsIdx != -1) ? &g.SettingsWindows[window->SettingsIdx] : ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID);
        if (!settings)
        {
            settings = CreateNewWindowSettings(window->Name);
            window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_pointer(settings);
        }
        IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == window->ID);
        settings->Pos = window->Pos;
        settings->Size = window->SizeFull;
        settings->Collapsed = window->Collapsed;
    }

    // Write a buffer
    // If a window wasn't opened in this session we preserve its settings
    buf->reserve(buf->size() + g.SettingsWindows.Size * 96); // ballpark reserve
    for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
    {
        const ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows[i];
        if (settings->Pos.x == FLT_MAX)
            continue;
        const char* name = settings->Name;
        if (const char* p = strstr(name, "###"))  // Skip to the "###" marker if any. We don't skip past to match the behavior of GetID()
            name = p;
        buf->appendf("[%s][%s]\n", handler->TypeName, name);
        buf->appendf("Pos=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Pos.x, (int)settings->Pos.y);
        buf->appendf("Size=%d,%d\n", (int)settings->Size.x, (int)settings->Size.y);
        buf->appendf("Collapsed=%d\n", settings->Collapsed);
        buf->appendf("\n");
    }
}

void ImGui::Initialize(ImGuiContext* context)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *context;
    IM_ASSERT(!g.Initialized && !g.SettingsLoaded);

    // Add .ini handle for ImGuiWindow type
    ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
    ini_handler.TypeName = "Window";
    ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHash("Window", 0, 0);
    ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadOpen;
    ini_handler.ReadLineFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_ReadLine;
    ini_handler.WriteAllFn = SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll;
    g.SettingsHandlers.push_front(ini_handler);

    g.Initialized = true;
}

// This function is merely here to free heap allocations.
void ImGui::Shutdown(ImGuiContext* context)
{
    // The fonts atlas can be used prior to calling NewFrame(), so we clear it even if g.Initialized is FALSE (which would happen if we never called NewFrame)
    ImGuiContext& g = *context;
    if (g.IO.Fonts && g.FontAtlasOwnedByContext)
        IM_DELETE(g.IO.Fonts);
    g.IO.Fonts = NULL;

    // Cleanup of other data are conditional on actually having initialized ImGui.
    if (!g.Initialized)
        return;

    // Save settings (unless we haven't attempted to load them: CreateContext/DestroyContext without a call to NewFrame shouldn't save an empty file)
    if (g.SettingsLoaded && g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
        SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);

    // Clear everything else
    for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
        IM_DELETE(g.Windows[i]);
    g.Windows.clear();
    g.WindowsSortBuffer.clear();
    g.CurrentWindow = NULL;
    g.CurrentWindowStack.clear();
    g.WindowsById.Clear();
    g.NavWindow = NULL;
    g.HoveredWindow = NULL;
    g.HoveredRootWindow = NULL;
    g.ActiveIdWindow = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
    g.MovingWindow = NULL;
    g.ColorModifiers.clear();
    g.StyleModifiers.clear();
    g.FontStack.clear();
    g.OpenPopupStack.clear();
    g.CurrentPopupStack.clear();
    g.DrawDataBuilder.ClearFreeMemory();
    g.OverlayDrawList.ClearFreeMemory();
    g.PrivateClipboard.clear();
    g.InputTextState.TextW.clear();
    g.InputTextState.InitialText.clear();
    g.InputTextState.TempBuffer.clear();

    for (int i = 0; i < g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
        IM_DELETE(g.SettingsWindows[i].Name);
    g.SettingsWindows.clear();
    g.SettingsHandlers.clear();

    if (g.LogFile && g.LogFile != stdout)
    {
        fclose(g.LogFile);
        g.LogFile = NULL;
    }
    g.LogClipboard.clear();

    g.Initialized = false;
}

ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int i = 0; i != g.SettingsWindows.Size; i++)
        if (g.SettingsWindows[i].ID == id)
            return &g.SettingsWindows[i];
    return NULL;
}

static ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.SettingsWindows.push_back(ImGuiWindowSettings());
    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = &g.SettingsWindows.back();
    settings->Name = ImStrdup(name);
    settings->ID = ImHash(name, 0);
    return settings;
}

void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename)
{
    size_t file_data_size = 0;
    char* file_data = (char*)ImFileLoadToMemory(ini_filename, "rb", &file_data_size);
    if (!file_data)
        return;
    LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(file_data, (size_t)file_data_size);
    ImGui::MemFree(file_data);
}

ImGuiSettingsHandler* ImGui::FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID type_hash = ImHash(type_name, 0, 0);
    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
        if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].TypeHash == type_hash)
            return &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
    return NULL;
}

// Zero-tolerance, no error reporting, cheap .ini parsing
void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
    IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsLoaded == false && g.FrameCount == 0);

    // For user convenience, we allow passing a non zero-terminated string (hence the ini_size parameter).
    // For our convenience and to make the code simpler, we'll also write zero-terminators within the buffer. So let's create a writable copy..
    if (ini_size == 0)
        ini_size = strlen(ini_data);
    char* buf = (char*)ImGui::MemAlloc(ini_size + 1);
    char* buf_end = buf + ini_size;
    memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size);
    buf[ini_size] = 0;

    void* entry_data = NULL;
    ImGuiSettingsHandler* entry_handler = NULL;

    char* line_end = NULL;
    for (char* line = buf; line < buf_end; line = line_end + 1)
    {
        // Skip new lines markers, then find end of the line
        while (*line == '\n' || *line == '\r')
            line++;
        line_end = line;
        while (line_end < buf_end && *line_end != '\n' && *line_end != '\r')
            line_end++;
        line_end[0] = 0;

        if (line[0] == '[' && line_end > line && line_end[-1] == ']')
        {
            // Parse "[Type][Name]". Note that 'Name' can itself contains [] characters, which is acceptable with the current format and parsing code.
            line_end[-1] = 0;
            const char* name_end = line_end - 1;
            const char* type_start = line + 1;
            char* type_end = (char*)(intptr_t)ImStrchrRange(type_start, name_end, ']');
            const char* name_start = type_end ? ImStrchrRange(type_end + 1, name_end, '[') : NULL;
            if (!type_end || !name_start)
            {
                name_start = type_start; // Import legacy entries that have no type
                type_start = "Window";
            }
            else
            {
                *type_end = 0; // Overwrite first ']'
                name_start++;  // Skip second '['
            }
            entry_handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_start);
            entry_data = entry_handler ? entry_handler->ReadOpenFn(&g, entry_handler, name_start) : NULL;
        }
        else if (entry_handler != NULL && entry_data != NULL)
        {
            // Let type handler parse the line
            entry_handler->ReadLineFn(&g, entry_handler, entry_data, line);
        }
    }
    ImGui::MemFree(buf);
    g.SettingsLoaded = true;
}

void ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
    if (!ini_filename)
        return;

    size_t ini_data_size = 0;
    const char* ini_data = SaveIniSettingsToMemory(&ini_data_size);
    FILE* f = ImFileOpen(ini_filename, "wt");
    if (!f)
        return;
    fwrite(ini_data, sizeof(char), ini_data_size, f);
    fclose(f);
}

// Call registered handlers (e.g. SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll() + custom handlers) to write their stuff into a text buffer
const char* ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_size)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
    g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize(0);
    g.SettingsIniData.Buf.push_back(0);
    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
    {
        ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
        handler->WriteAllFn(&g, handler, &g.SettingsIniData);
    }
    if (out_size)
        *out_size = (size_t)g.SettingsIniData.size();
    return g.SettingsIniData.c_str();
}

void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
        g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
}

void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
        if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
            g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
}

// FIXME: Add a more explicit sort order in the window structure.
static int IMGUI_CDECL ChildWindowComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
{
    const ImGuiWindow* const a = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs;
    const ImGuiWindow* const b = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)rhs;
    if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
        return d;
    if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
        return d;
    return (a->BeginOrderWithinParent - b->BeginOrderWithinParent);
}

static void AddWindowToSortedBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    out_sorted_windows->push_back(window);
    if (window->Active)
    {
        int count = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
        if (count > 1)
            ImQsort(window->DC.ChildWindows.begin(), (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), ChildWindowComparer);
        for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)
        {
            ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
            if (child->Active)
                AddWindowToSortedBuffer(out_sorted_windows, child);
        }
    }
}

static void AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list)
{
    if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
        return;

    // Remove trailing command if unused
    ImDrawCmd& last_cmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.back();
    if (last_cmd.ElemCount == 0 && last_cmd.UserCallback == NULL)
    {
        draw_list->CmdBuffer.pop_back();
        if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.empty())
            return;
    }

    // Draw list sanity check. Detect mismatch between PrimReserve() calls and incrementing _VtxCurrentIdx, _VtxWritePtr etc. May trigger for you if you are using PrimXXX functions incorrectly.
    IM_ASSERT(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_VtxWritePtr == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
    IM_ASSERT(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_IdxWritePtr == draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
    IM_ASSERT((int)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);

    // Check that draw_list doesn't use more vertices than indexable (default ImDrawIdx = unsigned short = 2 bytes = 64K vertices per ImDrawList = per window)
    // If this assert triggers because you are drawing lots of stuff manually:
    // A) Make sure you are coarse clipping, because ImDrawList let all your vertices pass. You can use the Metrics window to inspect draw list contents.
    // B) If you need/want meshes with more than 64K vertices, uncomment the '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' line in imconfig.h to set the index size to 4 bytes.
    //    You'll need to handle the 4-bytes indices to your renderer. For example, the OpenGL example code detect index size at compile-time by doing:
    //      glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer_offset);
    //    Your own engine or render API may use different parameters or function calls to specify index sizes. 2 and 4 bytes indices are generally supported by most API.
    // C) If for some reason you cannot use 4 bytes indices or don't want to, a workaround is to call BeginChild()/EndChild() before reaching the 64K limit to split your draw commands in multiple draw lists.
    if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2)
        IM_ASSERT(draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx < (1 << 16) && "Too many vertices in ImDrawList using 16-bit indices. Read comment above");

    out_list->push_back(draw_list);
}

static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_render_list, ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows++;
    AddDrawListToDrawData(out_render_list, window->DrawList);
    for (int i = 0; i < window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; i++)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(child)) // clipped children may have been marked not active
            AddWindowToDrawData(out_render_list, child);
    }
}

static void AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
        AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[1], window);
    else
        AddWindowToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], window);
}

void ImDrawDataBuilder::FlattenIntoSingleLayer()
{
    int n = Layers[0].Size;
    int size = n;
    for (int i = 1; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); i++)
        size += Layers[i].Size;
    Layers[0].resize(size);
    for (int layer_n = 1; layer_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); layer_n++)
    {
        ImVector<ImDrawList*>& layer = Layers[layer_n];
        if (layer.empty())
            continue;
        memcpy(&Layers[0][n], &layer[0], layer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawList*));
        n += layer.Size;
        layer.resize(0);
    }
}

static void SetupDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* draw_lists, ImDrawData* out_draw_data)
{
    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
    out_draw_data->Valid = true;
    out_draw_data->CmdLists = (draw_lists->Size > 0) ? draw_lists->Data : NULL;
    out_draw_data->CmdListsCount = draw_lists->Size;
    out_draw_data->TotalVtxCount = out_draw_data->TotalIdxCount = 0;
    out_draw_data->DisplayPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    out_draw_data->DisplaySize = io.DisplaySize;
    for (int n = 0; n < draw_lists->Size; n++)
    {
        out_draw_data->TotalVtxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->VtxBuffer.Size;
        out_draw_data->TotalIdxCount += draw_lists->Data[n]->IdxBuffer.Size;
    }
}

// When using this function it is sane to ensure that float are perfectly rounded to integer values, to that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render produce correct result.
void ImGui::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DrawList->PushClipRect(clip_rect_min, clip_rect_max, intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
    window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
}

void ImGui::PopClipRect()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
    window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
}

// This is normally called by Render(). You may want to call it directly if you want to avoid calling Render() but the gain will be very minimal.
void ImGui::EndFrame()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
    if (g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount)          // Don't process EndFrame() multiple times.
        return;
    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameScopeActive && "Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()");

    // Notify OS when our Input Method Editor cursor has moved (e.g. CJK inputs using Microsoft IME)
    if (g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn && ImLengthSqr(g.PlatformImeLastPos - g.PlatformImePos) > 0.0001f)
    {
        g.IO.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn((int)g.PlatformImePos.x, (int)g.PlatformImePos.y);
        g.PlatformImeLastPos = g.PlatformImePos;
    }

    // Hide implicit "Debug" window if it hasn't been used
    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1);    // Mismatched Begin()/End() calls, did you forget to call end on g.CurrentWindow->Name?
    if (g.CurrentWindow && !g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed)
        g.CurrentWindow->Active = false;
    End();

    // Show CTRL+TAB list
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget)
        NavUpdateWindowingList();

    // Drag and Drop: Elapse payload (if delivered, or if source stops being submitted)
    if (g.DragDropActive)
    {
        bool is_delivered = g.DragDropPayload.Delivery;
        bool is_elapsed = (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount + 1 < g.FrameCount) && ((g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload) || !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton));
        if (is_delivered || is_elapsed)
            ClearDragDrop();
    }

    // Drag and Drop: Fallback for source tooltip. This is not ideal but better than nothing.
    if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropSourceFrameCount < g.FrameCount)
    {
        g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
        SetTooltip("...");
        g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
    }

    // Initiate moving window
    if (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.HoveredId == 0)
    {
        if (!g.NavWindow || !g.NavWindow->Appearing) // Unless we just made a window/popup appear
        {
            // Click to focus window and start moving (after we're done with all our widgets)
            if (g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
            {
                if (g.HoveredRootWindow != NULL)
                    StartMouseMovingWindow(g.HoveredWindow);
                else if (g.NavWindow != NULL && GetFrontMostPopupModal() == NULL)
                    FocusWindow(NULL);  // Clicking on void disable focus
            }

            // With right mouse button we close popups without changing focus
            // (The left mouse button path calls FocusWindow which will lead NewFrame->ClosePopupsOverWindow to trigger)
            if (g.IO.MouseClicked[1])
            {
                // Find the top-most window between HoveredWindow and the front most Modal Window.
                // This is where we can trim the popup stack.
                ImGuiWindow* modal = GetFrontMostPopupModal();
                bool hovered_window_above_modal = false;
                if (modal == NULL)
                    hovered_window_above_modal = true;
                for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0 && hovered_window_above_modal == false; i--)
                {
                    ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
                    if (window == modal)
                        break;
                    if (window == g.HoveredWindow)
                        hovered_window_above_modal = true;
                }
                ClosePopupsOverWindow(hovered_window_above_modal ? g.HoveredWindow : modal);
            }
        }
    }

    // Sort the window list so that all child windows are after their parent
    // We cannot do that on FocusWindow() because childs may not exist yet
    g.WindowsSortBuffer.resize(0);
    g.WindowsSortBuffer.reserve(g.Windows.Size);
    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
        if (window->Active && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))       // if a child is active its parent will add it
            continue;
        AddWindowToSortedBuffer(&g.WindowsSortBuffer, window);
    }

    IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == g.WindowsSortBuffer.Size);  // we done something wrong
    g.Windows.swap(g.WindowsSortBuffer);
    g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows = g.WindowsActiveCount;

    // Unlock font atlas
    g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;

    // Clear Input data for next frame
    g.IO.MouseWheel = g.IO.MouseWheelH = 0.0f;
    memset(g.IO.InputCharacters, 0, sizeof(g.IO.InputCharacters));
    memset(g.IO.NavInputs, 0, sizeof(g.IO.NavInputs));

    g.FrameScopeActive = false;
    g.FrameCountEnded = g.FrameCount;
}

void ImGui::Render()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);

    if (g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount)
        ImGui::EndFrame();
    g.FrameCountRendered = g.FrameCount;

    // Gather ImDrawList to render (for each active window)
    g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows = 0;
    g.DrawDataBuilder.Clear();
    ImGuiWindow* windows_to_render_front_most[2];
    windows_to_render_front_most[0] = (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)) ? g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow : NULL;
    windows_to_render_front_most[1] = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingList : NULL;
    for (int n = 0; n != g.Windows.Size; n++)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0 && window != windows_to_render_front_most[0] && window != windows_to_render_front_most[1])
            AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(window);
    }
    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(windows_to_render_front_most); n++)
        if (windows_to_render_front_most[n] && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(windows_to_render_front_most[n])) // NavWindowingTarget is always temporarily displayed as the front-most window
            AddWindowToDrawDataSelectLayer(windows_to_render_front_most[n]);
    g.DrawDataBuilder.FlattenIntoSingleLayer();

    // Draw software mouse cursor if requested
    if (g.IO.MouseDrawCursor)
        RenderMouseCursor(&g.OverlayDrawList, g.IO.MousePos, g.Style.MouseCursorScale, g.MouseCursor);

    if (!g.OverlayDrawList.VtxBuffer.empty())
        AddDrawListToDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.OverlayDrawList);

    // Setup ImDrawData structure for end-user
    SetupDrawData(&g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], &g.DrawData);
    g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.DrawData.TotalVtxCount;
    g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = g.DrawData.TotalIdxCount;

    // Render. If user hasn't set a callback then they may retrieve the draw data via GetDrawData()
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
    if (g.DrawData.CmdListsCount > 0 && g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn != NULL)
        g.IO.RenderDrawListsFn(&g.DrawData);
#endif
}

const char* ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end)
{
    const char* text_display_end = text;
    if (!text_end)
        text_end = (const char*)-1;

    while (text_display_end < text_end && *text_display_end != '\0' && (text_display_end[0] != '#' || text_display_end[1] != '#'))
        text_display_end++;
    return text_display_end;
}

// Pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
void ImGui::LogText(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!g.LogEnabled)
        return;

    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    if (g.LogFile)
        vfprintf(g.LogFile, fmt, args);
    else
        g.LogClipboard.appendfv(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

// Internal version that takes a position to decide on newline placement and pad items according to their depth.
// We split text into individual lines to add current tree level padding
void ImGui::LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (!text_end)
        text_end = ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);

    const bool log_new_line = ref_pos && (ref_pos->y > window->DC.LogLinePosY + 1);
    if (ref_pos)
        window->DC.LogLinePosY = ref_pos->y;

    const char* text_remaining = text;
    if (g.LogStartDepth > window->DC.TreeDepth)  // Re-adjust padding if we have popped out of our starting depth
        g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
    const int tree_depth = (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogStartDepth);
    for (;;)
    {
        // Split the string. Each new line (after a '\n') is followed by spacing corresponding to the current depth of our log entry.
        const char* line_end = text_remaining;
        while (line_end < text_end)
            if (*line_end == '\n')
                break;
            else
                line_end++;
        if (line_end >= text_end)
            line_end = NULL;

        const bool is_first_line = (text == text_remaining);
        bool is_last_line = false;
        if (line_end == NULL)
        {
            is_last_line = true;
            line_end = text_end;
        }
        if (line_end != NULL && !(is_last_line && (line_end - text_remaining)==0))
        {
            const int char_count = (int)(line_end - text_remaining);
            if (log_new_line || !is_first_line)
                ImGui::LogText(IM_NEWLINE "%*s%.*s", tree_depth*4, "", char_count, text_remaining);
            else
                ImGui::LogText(" %.*s", char_count, text_remaining);
        }

        if (is_last_line)
            break;
        text_remaining = line_end + 1;
    }
}

// Internal ImGui functions to render text
// RenderText***() functions calls ImDrawList::AddText() calls ImBitmapFont::RenderText()
void ImGui::RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_hash)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // Hide anything after a '##' string
    const char* text_display_end;
    if (hide_text_after_hash)
    {
        text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
    }
    else
    {
        if (!text_end)
            text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
        text_display_end = text_end;
    }

    if (text != text_display_end)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
    }
}

void ImGui::RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (!text_end)
        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT

    if (text != text_end)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_end, wrap_width);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_end);
    }
}

// Default clip_rect uses (pos_min,pos_max)
// Handle clipping on CPU immediately (vs typically let the GPU clip the triangles that are overlapping the clipping rectangle edges)
void ImGui::RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
{
    // Hide anything after a '##' string
    const char* text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
    const int text_len = (int)(text_display_end - text);
    if (text_len == 0)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    // Perform CPU side clipping for single clipped element to avoid using scissor state
    ImVec2 pos = pos_min;
    const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_display_end, false, 0.0f);

    const ImVec2* clip_min = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Min : &pos_min;
    const ImVec2* clip_max = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Max : &pos_max;
    bool need_clipping = (pos.x + text_size.x >= clip_max->x) || (pos.y + text_size.y >= clip_max->y);
    if (clip_rect) // If we had no explicit clipping rectangle then pos==clip_min
        need_clipping |= (pos.x < clip_min->x) || (pos.y < clip_min->y);

    // Align whole block. We should defer that to the better rendering function when we'll have support for individual line alignment.
    if (align.x > 0.0f) pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, pos.x + (pos_max.x - pos.x - text_size.x) * align.x);
    if (align.y > 0.0f) pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, pos.y + (pos_max.y - pos.y - text_size.y) * align.y);

    // Render
    if (need_clipping)
    {
        ImVec4 fine_clip_rect(clip_min->x, clip_min->y, clip_max->x, clip_max->y);
        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, &fine_clip_rect);
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, NULL);
    }
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
}

// Render a rectangle shaped with optional rounding and borders
void ImGui::RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border, float rounding)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, fill_col, rounding);
    const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
    if (border && border_size > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
    }
}

void ImGui::RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
    if (border_size > 0.0f)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min+ImVec2(1,1), p_max+ImVec2(1,1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, border_size);
    }
}

// Render an arrow aimed to be aligned with text (p_min is a position in the same space text would be positioned). To e.g. denote expanded/collapsed state
void ImGui::RenderArrow(ImVec2 p_min, ImGuiDir dir, float scale)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    const float h = g.FontSize * 1.00f;
    float r = h * 0.40f * scale;
    ImVec2 center = p_min + ImVec2(h * 0.50f, h * 0.50f * scale);

    ImVec2 a, b, c;
    switch (dir)
    {
    case ImGuiDir_Up:
    case ImGuiDir_Down:
        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) r = -r;
        a = ImVec2(+0.000f,+0.750f) * r;
        b = ImVec2(-0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
        c = ImVec2(+0.866f,-0.750f) * r;
        break;
    case ImGuiDir_Left:
    case ImGuiDir_Right:
        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) r = -r;
        a = ImVec2(+0.750f,+0.000f) * r;
        b = ImVec2(-0.750f,+0.866f) * r;
        c = ImVec2(-0.750f,-0.866f) * r;
        break;
    case ImGuiDir_None:
    case ImGuiDir_COUNT:
        IM_ASSERT(0);
        break;
    }

    g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(center + a, center + b, center + c, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
}

void ImGui::RenderBullet(ImVec2 pos)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(pos, GImGui->FontSize*0.20f, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), 8);
}

void ImGui::RenderCheckMark(ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    float thickness = ImMax(sz / 5.0f, 1.0f);
    sz -= thickness*0.5f;
    pos += ImVec2(thickness*0.25f, thickness*0.25f);

    float third = sz / 3.0f;
    float bx = pos.x + third;
    float by = pos.y + sz - third*0.5f;
    window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx - third, by - third));
    window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx, by));
    window->DrawList->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx + third*2, by - third*2));
    window->DrawList->PathStroke(col, false, thickness);
}

void ImGui::RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (id != g.NavId)
        return;
    if (g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw))
        return;
    ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame)
        return;

    float rounding = (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding) ? 0.0f : g.Style.FrameRounding;
    ImRect display_rect = bb;
    display_rect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
    if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault)
    {
        const float THICKNESS = 2.0f;
        const float DISTANCE = 3.0f + THICKNESS * 0.5f;
        display_rect.Expand(ImVec2(DISTANCE,DISTANCE));
        bool fully_visible = window->ClipRect.Contains(display_rect);
        if (!fully_visible)
            window->DrawList->PushClipRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max);
        window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min + ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), display_rect.Max - ImVec2(THICKNESS*0.5f,THICKNESS*0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, THICKNESS);
        if (!fully_visible)
            window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin)
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, ~0, 1.0f);
    }
}

// Calculate text size. Text can be multi-line. Optionally ignore text after a ## marker.
// CalcTextSize("") should return ImVec2(0.0f, GImGui->FontSize)
ImVec2 ImGui::CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_double_hash, float wrap_width)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    const char* text_display_end;
    if (hide_text_after_double_hash)
        text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);      // Hide anything after a '##' string
    else
        text_display_end = text_end;

    ImFont* font = g.Font;
    const float font_size = g.FontSize;
    if (text == text_display_end)
        return ImVec2(0.0f, font_size);
    ImVec2 text_size = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, wrap_width, text, text_display_end, NULL);

    // Cancel out character spacing for the last character of a line (it is baked into glyph->AdvanceX field)
    const float font_scale = font_size / font->FontSize;
    const float character_spacing_x = 1.0f * font_scale;
    if (text_size.x > 0.0f)
        text_size.x -= character_spacing_x;
    text_size.x = (float)(int)(text_size.x + 0.95f);

    return text_size;
}

// Helper to calculate coarse clipping of large list of evenly sized items.
// NB: Prefer using the ImGuiListClipper higher-level helper if you can! Read comments and instructions there on how those use this sort of pattern.
// NB: 'items_count' is only used to clamp the result, if you don't know your count you can use INT_MAX
void ImGui::CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.LogEnabled)
    {
        // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping
        *out_items_display_start = 0;
        *out_items_display_end = items_count;
        return;
    }
    if (window->SkipItems)
    {
        *out_items_display_start = *out_items_display_end = 0;
        return;
    }

    // We create the union of the ClipRect and the NavScoringRect which at worst should be 1 page away from ClipRect
    ImRect unclipped_rect = window->ClipRect;
    if (g.NavMoveRequest)
        unclipped_rect.Add(g.NavScoringRectScreen);

    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    int start = (int)((unclipped_rect.Min.y - pos.y) / items_height);
    int end = (int)((unclipped_rect.Max.y - pos.y) / items_height);

    // When performing a navigation request, ensure we have one item extra in the direction we are moving to
    if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up)
        start--;
    if (g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
        end++;

    start = ImClamp(start, 0, items_count);
    end = ImClamp(end + 1, start, items_count);
    *out_items_display_start = start;
    *out_items_display_end = end;
}

// Find window given position, search front-to-back
// FIXME: Note that we have a lag here because WindowRectClipped is updated in Begin() so windows moved by user via SetWindowPos() and not SetNextWindowPos() will have that rectangle lagging by a frame at the time FindHoveredWindow() is called, aka before the next Begin(). Moving window thankfully isn't affected.
static void FindHoveredWindow()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = NULL;
    if (g.MovingWindow && !(g.MovingWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs))
        hovered_window = g.MovingWindow;

    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0 && hovered_window == NULL; i--)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
        if (!window->Active || window->Hidden)
            continue;
        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
            continue;

        // Using the clipped AABB, a child window will typically be clipped by its parent (not always)
        ImRect bb(window->OuterRectClipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, window->OuterRectClipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
        if (bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
        {
            if (hovered_window == NULL)
                hovered_window = window;
            if (hovered_window)
                break;
        }
    }

    g.HoveredWindow = hovered_window;
    g.HoveredRootWindow = g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow : NULL;

}

// Test if mouse cursor is hovering given rectangle
// NB- Rectangle is clipped by our current clip setting
// NB- Expand the rectangle to be generous on imprecise inputs systems (g.Style.TouchExtraPadding)
bool ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Clip
    ImRect rect_clipped(r_min, r_max);
    if (clip)
        rect_clipped.ClipWith(g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect);

    // Expand for touch input
    const ImRect rect_for_touch(rect_clipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, rect_clipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
    return rect_for_touch.Contains(g.IO.MousePos);
}

int ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey imgui_key)
{
    IM_ASSERT(imgui_key >= 0 && imgui_key < ImGuiKey_COUNT);
    return GImGui->IO.KeyMap[imgui_key];
}

// Note that imgui doesn't know the semantic of each entry of io.KeysDown[]. Use your own indices/enums according to how your back-end/engine stored them into io.KeysDown[]!
bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(int user_key_index)
{
    if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
    IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(GImGui->IO.KeysDown));
    return GImGui->IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
}

int ImGui::CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(float t, float t_prev, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
{
    if (t == 0.0f)
        return 1;
    if (t <= repeat_delay || repeat_rate <= 0.0f)
        return 0;
    const int count = (int)((t - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate) - (int)((t_prev - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate);
    return (count > 0) ? count : 0;
}

int ImGui::GetKeyPressedAmount(int key_index, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (key_index < 0) return false;
    IM_ASSERT(key_index >= 0 && key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
    const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[key_index];
    return CalcTypematicPressedRepeatAmount(t, t - g.IO.DeltaTime, repeat_delay, repeat_rate);
}

bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(int user_key_index, bool repeat)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
    IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
    const float t = g.IO.KeysDownDuration[user_key_index];
    if (t == 0.0f)
        return true;
    if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
        return GetKeyPressedAmount(user_key_index, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(int user_key_index)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (user_key_index < 0) return false;
    IM_ASSERT(user_key_index >= 0 && user_key_index < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.KeysDown));
    return g.IO.KeysDownDurationPrev[user_key_index] >= 0.0f && !g.IO.KeysDown[user_key_index];
}

bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(int button)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    return g.IO.MouseDown[button];
}

bool ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); n++)
        if (g.IO.MouseDown[n])
            return true;
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(int button, bool repeat)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    const float t = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[button];
    if (t == 0.0f)
        return true;

    if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
    {
        float delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
        if ((ImFmod(t - delay, rate) > rate*0.5f) != (ImFmod(t - delay - g.IO.DeltaTime, rate) > rate*0.5f))
            return true;
    }

    return false;
}

bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(int button)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    return g.IO.MouseReleased[button];
}

bool ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(int button)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    return g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[button];
}

bool ImGui::IsMouseDragging(int button, float lock_threshold)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button])
        return false;
    if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
        lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
    return g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePos()
{
    return GImGui->IO.MousePos;
}

// NB: prefer to call right after BeginPopup(). At the time Selectable/MenuItem is activated, the popup is already closed!
ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentPopupStack.Size > 0)
        return g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size-1].OpenMousePos;
    return g.IO.MousePos;
}

// We typically use ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote an invalid mouse position
bool ImGui::IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos)
{
    if (mouse_pos == NULL)
        mouse_pos = &GImGui->IO.MousePos;
    const float MOUSE_INVALID = -256000.0f;
    return mouse_pos->x >= MOUSE_INVALID && mouse_pos->y >= MOUSE_INVALID;
}

// NB: This is only valid if IsMousePosValid(). Back-ends in theory should always keep mouse position valid when dragging even outside the client window.
ImVec2 ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(int button, float lock_threshold)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
        lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
    if (g.IO.MouseDown[button])
        if (g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold)
            return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button];     // Assume we can only get active with left-mouse button (at the moment).
    return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
}

void ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(int button)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
    // NB: We don't need to reset g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr
    g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] = g.IO.MousePos;
}

ImGuiMouseCursor ImGui::GetMouseCursor()
{
    return GImGui->MouseCursor;
}

void ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type)
{
    GImGui->MouseCursor = cursor_type;
}

void ImGui::CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool capture)
{
    GImGui->WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
}

void ImGui::CaptureMouseFromApp(bool capture)
{
    GImGui->WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = capture ? 1 : 0;
}

bool ImGui::IsItemActive()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId)
    {
        ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
        return g.ActiveId == window->DC.LastItemId;
    }
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    return (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == window->DC.LastItemId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.ActiveId != window->DC.LastItemId);
}

bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return IsItemDeactivated() && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEdited || (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEdited));
}

bool ImGui::IsItemFocused()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.NavId && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId;
}

bool ImGui::IsItemClicked(int mouse_button)
{
    return IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_None);
}

bool ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.HoveredId != 0 || g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0;
}

bool ImGui::IsAnyItemActive()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.ActiveId != 0;
}

bool ImGui::IsAnyItemFocused()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight;
}

bool ImGui::IsItemVisible()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(window->DC.LastItemRect);
}

bool ImGui::IsItemEdited()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited) != 0;
}

// Allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Both may be activated during the same frame before the later one takes priority.
void ImGui::SetItemAllowOverlap()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.HoveredId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
        g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true;
    if (g.ActiveId == g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId)
        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = true;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMin()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.LastItemRect.Min;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMax()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.LastItemRect.Max;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectSize()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.LastItemRect.GetSize();
}

static ImRect GetViewportRect()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin.x != g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax.x && g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin.y != g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax.y)
        return ImRect(g.IO.DisplayVisibleMin, g.IO.DisplayVisibleMax);
    return ImRect(0.0f, 0.0f, g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.IO.DisplaySize.y);
}

// Not exposed publicly as BeginTooltip() because bool parameters are evil. Let's see if other needs arise first.
void ImGui::BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags, bool override_previous_tooltip)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    char window_name[16];
    ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", g.TooltipOverrideCount);
    if (override_previous_tooltip)
        if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(window_name))
            if (window->Active)
            {
                // Hide previous tooltip from being displayed. We can't easily "reset" the content of a window so we create a new one.
                window->Hidden = true;
                window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
                ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", ++g.TooltipOverrideCount);
            }
    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
    Begin(window_name, NULL, flags | extra_flags);
}

void ImGui::SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget)
        BeginTooltip();
    else
        BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
    TextV(fmt, args);
    EndTooltip();
}

void ImGui::SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    SetTooltipV(fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
}

void ImGui::BeginTooltip()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget)
    {
        // The default tooltip position is a little offset to give space to see the context menu (it's also clamped within the current viewport/monitor)
        // In the context of a dragging tooltip we try to reduce that offset and we enforce following the cursor.
        // Whatever we do we want to call SetNextWindowPos() to enforce a tooltip position and disable clipping the tooltip without our display area, like regular tooltip do.
        //ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - g.Style.WindowPadding;
        ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos + ImVec2(16 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale, 8 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale);
        SetNextWindowPos(tooltip_pos);
        SetNextWindowBgAlpha(g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg].w * 0.60f);
        //PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * 0.60f); // This would be nice but e.g ColorButton with checkboard has issue with transparent colors :(
        BeginTooltipEx(0, true);
    }
    else
    {
        BeginTooltipEx(0, false);
    }
}

void ImGui::EndTooltip()
{
    IM_ASSERT(GetCurrentWindowRead()->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip);   // Mismatched BeginTooltip()/EndTooltip() calls
    End();
}

// Mark popup as open (toggle toward open state).
// Popups are closed when user click outside, or activate a pressable item, or CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block.
// Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level).
// One open popup per level of the popup hierarchy (NB: when assigning we reset the Window member of ImGuiPopupRef to NULL)
void ImGui::OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
    int current_stack_size = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size;
    ImGuiPopupRef popup_ref; // Tagged as new ref as Window will be set back to NULL if we write this into OpenPopupStack.
    popup_ref.PopupId = id;
    popup_ref.Window = NULL;
    popup_ref.ParentWindow = parent_window;
    popup_ref.OpenFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
    popup_ref.OpenParentId = parent_window->IDStack.back();
    popup_ref.OpenMousePos = g.IO.MousePos;
    popup_ref.OpenPopupPos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();

    //printf("[%05d] OpenPopupEx(0x%08X)\n", g.FrameCount, id);
    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size < current_stack_size + 1)
    {
        g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
    }
    else
    {
        // Gently handle the user mistakenly calling OpenPopup() every frame. It is a programming mistake! However, if we were to run the regular code path, the ui
        // would become completely unusable because the popup will always be in hidden-while-calculating-size state _while_ claiming focus. Which would be a very confusing
        // situation for the programmer. Instead, we silently allow the popup to proceed, it will keep reappearing and the programming error will be more obvious to understand.
        if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id && g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1)
        {
            g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount = popup_ref.OpenFrameCount;
        }
        else
        {
            // Close child popups if any, then flag popup for open/reopen
            g.OpenPopupStack.resize(current_stack_size + 1);
            g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size] = popup_ref;
        }

        // When reopening a popup we first refocus its parent, otherwise if its parent is itself a popup it would get closed by ClosePopupsOverWindow().
        // This is equivalent to what ClosePopupToLevel() does.
        //if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id)
        //    FocusWindow(parent_window);
    }
}

void ImGui::OpenPopup(const char* str_id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    OpenPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id));
}

void ImGui::ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.OpenPopupStack.empty())
        return;

    // When popups are stacked, clicking on a lower level popups puts focus back to it and close popups above it.
    // Don't close our own child popup windows.
    int n = 0;
    if (ref_window)
    {
        for (n = 0; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++)
        {
            ImGuiPopupRef& popup = g.OpenPopupStack[n];
            if (!popup.Window)
                continue;
            IM_ASSERT((popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0);
            if (popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
                continue;

            // Trim the stack if popups are not direct descendant of the reference window (which is often the NavWindow)
            bool has_focus = false;
            for (int m = n; m < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && !has_focus; m++)
                has_focus = (g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window && g.OpenPopupStack[m].Window->RootWindow == ref_window->RootWindow);
            if (!has_focus)
                break;
        }
    }
    if (n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the block below
        ClosePopupToLevel(n);
}

ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetFrontMostPopupModal()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size-1; n >= 0; n--)
        if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window)
            if (popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
                return popup;
    return NULL;
}

void ImGui::ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining)
{
    IM_ASSERT(remaining >= 0);
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* focus_window = (remaining > 0) ? g.OpenPopupStack[remaining-1].Window : g.OpenPopupStack[0].ParentWindow;
    if (g.NavLayer == 0)
        focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(focus_window);
    FocusWindow(focus_window);
    focus_window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = true;
    g.OpenPopupStack.resize(remaining);
}

void ImGui::ClosePopup(ImGuiID id)
{
    if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
}

// Close the popup we have begin-ed into.
void ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    int popup_idx = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size - 1;
    if (popup_idx < 0 || popup_idx >= g.OpenPopupStack.Size || g.CurrentPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId != g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId)
        return;
    while (popup_idx > 0 && g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window && (g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
        popup_idx--;
    ClosePopupToLevel(popup_idx);
}

bool ImGui::BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
    {
        g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
        return false;
    }

    char name[20];
    if (extra_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
        ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Menu_%02d", g.CurrentPopupStack.Size);    // Recycle windows based on depth
    else
        ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Popup_%08x", id); // Not recycling, so we can close/open during the same frame

    bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, extra_flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup);
    if (!is_open) // NB: Begin can return false when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
        EndPopup();

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.CurrentPopupStack.Size) // Early out for performance
    {
        g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
        return false;
    }
    return BeginPopupEx(g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id), flags|ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}

bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].PopupId == id;
}

bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].PopupId == g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
}

bool ImGui::BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(name);
    if (!IsPopupOpen(id))
    {
        g.NextWindowData.Clear(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
        return false;
    }

    // Center modal windows by default
    // FIXME: Should test for (PosCond & window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags) with the upcoming window.
    if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond == 0)
        SetNextWindowPos(g.IO.DisplaySize * 0.5f, ImGuiCond_Appearing, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    bool is_open = Begin(name, p_open, flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
    if (!is_open || (p_open && !*p_open)) // NB: is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
    {
        EndPopup();
        if (is_open)
            ClosePopup(id);
        return false;
    }

    return is_open;
}

void ImGui::NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, const ImRect& bb_rel, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None);
    ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel();
    g.NavMoveDir = move_dir;
    g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir;
    g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
    g.NavMoveRequestFlags = move_flags;
    g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = bb_rel;
}

void ImGui::NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.NavWindow != window || !NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() || g.NavMoveRequestForward != ImGuiNavForward_None || g.NavLayer != 0)
        return;
    IM_ASSERT(move_flags != 0); // No points calling this with no wrapping
    ImRect bb_rel = window->NavRectRel[0];

    ImGuiDir clip_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
    {
        bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, window->SizeContents.x) - window->Scroll.x;
        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(-bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Up; }
        NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
    }
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
    {
        bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = -window->Scroll.x;
        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) { bb_rel.TranslateY(+bb_rel.GetHeight()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Down; }
        NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
    }
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
    {
        bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, window->SizeContents.y) - window->Scroll.y;
        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(-bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Left; }
        NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
    }
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
    {
        bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = -window->Scroll.y;
        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) { bb_rel.TranslateX(+bb_rel.GetWidth()); clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Right; }
        NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, bb_rel, move_flags);
    }
}

void ImGui::EndPopup()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; (void)g;
    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup);  // Mismatched BeginPopup()/EndPopup() calls
    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentPopupStack.Size > 0);

    // Make all menus and popups wrap around for now, may need to expose that policy.
    NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(g.CurrentWindow, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY);

    End();
}

bool ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
    {
        ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
        IM_ASSERT(id != 0);                                                  // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
        OpenPopupEx(id);
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

// This is a helper to handle the simplest case of associating one named popup to one given widget.
// You may want to handle this on user side if you have specific needs (e.g. tweaking IsItemHovered() parameters).
// You can pass a NULL str_id to use the identifier of the last item.
bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : window->DC.LastItemId; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);                                                  // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
        OpenPopupEx(id);
    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}

bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, int mouse_button, bool also_over_items)
{
    if (!str_id)
        str_id = "window_context";
    ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
        if (also_over_items || !IsAnyItemHovered())
            OpenPopupEx(id);
    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}

bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id, int mouse_button)
{
    if (!str_id)
        str_id = "void_context";
    ImGuiID id = GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && !IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow))
        OpenPopupEx(id);
    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
}

static bool ImGui::BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;

    flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize|ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
    flags |= (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);  // Inherit the NoMove flag

    // Size
    const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail();
    ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg);
    const int auto_fit_axises = ((size.x == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_X) : 0x00) | ((size.y == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y) : 0x00);
    if (size.x <= 0.0f)
        size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too much issues)
    if (size.y <= 0.0f)
        size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f);
    SetNextWindowSize(size);

    // Name
    char title[256];
    if (name)
        ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%s", parent_window->Name, name);
    else
        ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/%08X", parent_window->Name, id);

    const float backup_border_size = g.Style.ChildBorderSize;
    if (!border)
        g.Style.ChildBorderSize = 0.0f;
    bool ret = Begin(title, NULL, flags);
    g.Style.ChildBorderSize = backup_border_size;

    ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.CurrentWindow;
    child_window->ChildId = id;
    child_window->AutoFitChildAxises = auto_fit_axises;

    // Process navigation-in immediately so NavInit can run on first frame
    if (g.NavActivateId == id && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (child_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || child_window->DC.NavHasScroll))
    {
        FocusWindow(child_window);
        NavInitWindow(child_window, false);
        SetActiveID(id+1, child_window); // Steal ActiveId with a dummy id so that key-press won't activate child item
        g.ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_Nav;
    }

    return ret;
}

bool ImGui::BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    return BeginChildEx(str_id, window->GetID(str_id), size_arg, border, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
    return BeginChildEx(NULL, id, size_arg, border, extra_flags);
}

void ImGui::EndChild()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);   // Mismatched BeginChild()/EndChild() callss
    if (window->BeginCount > 1)
    {
        End();
    }
    else
    {
        ImVec2 sz = window->Size;
        if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_X)) // Arbitrary minimum zero-ish child size of 4.0f causes less trouble than a 0.0f
            sz.x = ImMax(4.0f, sz.x);
        if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y))
            sz.y = ImMax(4.0f, sz.y);
        End();

        ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
        ImRect bb(parent_window->DC.CursorPos, parent_window->DC.CursorPos + sz);
        ItemSize(sz);
        if ((window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask != 0 || window->DC.NavHasScroll) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
        {
            ItemAdd(bb, window->ChildId);
            RenderNavHighlight(bb, window->ChildId);

            // When browsing a window that has no activable items (scroll only) we keep a highlight on the child
            if (window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask == 0 && window == g.NavWindow)
                RenderNavHighlight(ImRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(2,2), bb.Max + ImVec2(2,2)), g.NavId, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
        }
        else
        {
            // Not navigable into
            ItemAdd(bb, 0);
        }
    }
}

// Helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame.
bool ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, style.FramePadding);
    bool ret = BeginChild(id, size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | extra_flags);
    PopStyleVar(3);
    PopStyleColor();
    return ret;
}

void ImGui::EndChildFrame()
{
    EndChild();
}

// Save and compare stack sizes on Begin()/End() to detect usage errors
static void CheckStacksSize(ImGuiWindow* window, bool write)
{
    // NOT checking: DC.ItemWidth, DC.AllowKeyboardFocus, DC.ButtonRepeat, DC.TextWrapPos (per window) to allow user to conveniently push once and not pop (they are cleared on Begin)
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    int* p_backup = &window->DC.StackSizesBackup[0];
    { int current = window->IDStack.Size;       if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "PushID/PopID or TreeNode/TreePop Mismatch!");   p_backup++; }    // Too few or too many PopID()/TreePop()
    { int current = window->DC.GroupStack.Size; if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginGroup/EndGroup Mismatch!");                p_backup++; }    // Too few or too many EndGroup()
    { int current = g.CurrentPopupStack.Size;   if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup == current && "BeginMenu/EndMenu or BeginPopup/EndPopup Mismatch"); p_backup++;}// Too few or too many EndMenu()/EndPopup()
    // For color, style and font stacks there is an incentive to use Push/Begin/Pop/.../End patterns, so we relax our checks a little to allow them.
    { int current = g.ColorModifiers.Size;      if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleColor/PopStyleColor Mismatch!");       p_backup++; }    // Too few or too many PopStyleColor()
    { int current = g.StyleModifiers.Size;      if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushStyleVar/PopStyleVar Mismatch!");           p_backup++; }    // Too few or too many PopStyleVar()
    { int current = g.FontStack.Size;           if (write) *p_backup = current; else IM_ASSERT(*p_backup >= current && "PushFont/PopFont Mismatch!");                   p_backup++; }    // Too few or too many PopFont()
    IM_ASSERT(p_backup == window->DC.StackSizesBackup + IM_ARRAYSIZE(window->DC.StackSizesBackup));
}

ImRect ImGui::GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow*)
{
    ImVec2 padding = GImGui->Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding;
    ImRect r_screen = GetViewportRect();
    r_screen.Expand(ImVec2((r_screen.GetWidth() > padding.x * 2) ? -padding.x : 0.0f, (r_screen.GetHeight() > padding.y * 2) ? -padding.y : 0.0f));
    return r_screen;
}

// r_avoid = the rectangle to avoid (e.g. for tooltip it is a rectangle around the mouse cursor which we want to avoid. for popups it's a small point around the cursor.)
// r_outer = the visible area rectangle, minus safe area padding. If our popup size won't fit because of safe area padding we ignore it.
ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy)
{
    ImVec2 base_pos_clamped = ImClamp(ref_pos, r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max - size);
    //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
    //GImGui->OverlayDrawList.AddRect(r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max, IM_COL32(0,255,0,255));

    // Combo Box policy (we want a connecting edge)
    if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox)
    {
        const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Left, ImGuiDir_Up };
        for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
        {
            const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
            if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
                continue;
            ImVec2 pos;
            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down)  pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Max.y);          // Below, Toward Right (default)
            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Right
            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left)  pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Left
            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up)    pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Left
            if (!r_outer.Contains(ImRect(pos, pos + size)))
                continue;
            *last_dir = dir;
            return pos;
        }
    }

    // Default popup policy
    const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Up, ImGuiDir_Left };
    for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
    {
        const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
        if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
            continue;
        float avail_w = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left ? r_avoid.Min.x : r_outer.Max.x) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Right ? r_avoid.Max.x : r_outer.Min.x);
        float avail_h = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up ? r_avoid.Min.y : r_outer.Max.y) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Down ? r_avoid.Max.y : r_outer.Min.y);
        if (avail_w < size.x || avail_h < size.y)
            continue;
        ImVec2 pos;
        pos.x = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? r_avoid.Min.x - size.x : (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? r_avoid.Max.x : base_pos_clamped.x;
        pos.y = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up)   ? r_avoid.Min.y - size.y : (dir == ImGuiDir_Down)  ? r_avoid.Max.y : base_pos_clamped.y;
        *last_dir = dir;
        return pos;
    }

    // Fallback, try to keep within display
    *last_dir = ImGuiDir_None;
    ImVec2 pos = ref_pos;
    pos.x = ImMax(ImMin(pos.x + size.x, r_outer.Max.x) - size.x, r_outer.Min.x);
    pos.y = ImMax(ImMin(pos.y + size.y, r_outer.Max.y) - size.y, r_outer.Min.y);
    return pos;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(window);
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
    {
        // Child menus typically request _any_ position within the parent menu item, and then our FindBestWindowPosForPopup() function will move the new menu outside the parent bounds.
        // This is how we end up with child menus appearing (most-commonly) on the right of the parent menu.
        IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window);
        ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindowStack[g.CurrentWindowStack.Size - 2];
        float horizontal_overlap = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;       // We want some overlap to convey the relative depth of each menu (currently the amount of overlap is hard-coded to style.ItemSpacing.x).
        ImRect r_avoid;
        if (parent_window->DC.MenuBarAppending)
            r_avoid = ImRect(-FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight(), FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.y + parent_window->TitleBarHeight() + parent_window->MenuBarHeight());
        else
            r_avoid = ImRect(parent_window->Pos.x + horizontal_overlap, -FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.x + parent_window->Size.x - horizontal_overlap - parent_window->ScrollbarSizes.x, FLT_MAX);
        return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
    }
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
    {
        ImRect r_avoid = ImRect(window->Pos.x - 1, window->Pos.y - 1, window->Pos.x + 1, window->Pos.y + 1);
        return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
    }
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
    {
        // Position tooltip (always follows mouse)
        float sc = g.Style.MouseCursorScale;
        ImVec2 ref_pos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
        ImRect r_avoid;
        if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos))
            r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 16, ref_pos.y + 8);
        else
            r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 24 * sc, ref_pos.y + 24 * sc); // FIXME: Hard-coded based on mouse cursor shape expectation. Exact dimension not very important.
        ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(ref_pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid);
        if (window->AutoPosLastDirection == ImGuiDir_None)
            pos = ref_pos + ImVec2(2, 2); // If there's not enough room, for tooltip we prefer avoiding the cursor at all cost even if it means that part of the tooltip won't be visible.
        return pos;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return window->Pos;
}

static void SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiCond flags, bool enabled)
{
    window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       = enabled ? (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       | flags) : (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       & ~flags);
    window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      = enabled ? (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      | flags) : (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      & ~flags);
    window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & ~flags);
}

ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByName(const char* name)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiID id = ImHash(name, 0);
    return (ImGuiWindow*)g.WindowsById.GetVoidPtr(id);
}

static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImVec2 size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Create window the first time
    ImGuiWindow* window = IM_NEW(ImGuiWindow)(&g, name);
    window->Flags = flags;
    g.WindowsById.SetVoidPtr(window->ID, window);

    // Default/arbitrary window position. Use SetNextWindowPos() with the appropriate condition flag to change the initial position of a window.
    window->Pos = ImVec2(60, 60);

    // User can disable loading and saving of settings. Tooltip and child windows also don't store settings.
    if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
        if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID))
        {
            // Retrieve settings from .ini file
            window->SettingsIdx = g.SettingsWindows.index_from_pointer(settings);
            SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, false);
            window->Pos = ImFloor(settings->Pos);
            window->Collapsed = settings->Collapsed;
            if (ImLengthSqr(settings->Size) > 0.00001f)
                size = ImFloor(settings->Size);
        }
    window->Size = window->SizeFull = window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = size;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->Pos; // So first call to CalcSizeContents() doesn't return crazy values

    if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0)
    {
        window->AutoFitFramesX = window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
    }
    else
    {
        if (window->Size.x <= 0.0f)
            window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
        if (window->Size.y <= 0.0f)
            window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0);
    }

    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)
        g.Windows.insert(g.Windows.begin(), window); // Quite slow but rare and only once
    else
        g.Windows.push_back(window);
    return window;
}

static ImVec2 CalcSizeAfterConstraint(ImGuiWindow* window, ImVec2 new_size)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond != 0)
    {
        // Using -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size.
        ImRect cr = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect;
        new_size.x = (cr.Min.x >= 0 && cr.Max.x >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.x, cr.Min.x, cr.Max.x) : window->SizeFull.x;
        new_size.y = (cr.Min.y >= 0 && cr.Max.y >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.y, cr.Min.y, cr.Max.y) : window->SizeFull.y;
        if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback)
        {
            ImGuiSizeCallbackData data;
            data.UserData = g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData;
            data.Pos = window->Pos;
            data.CurrentSize = window->SizeFull;
            data.DesiredSize = new_size;
            g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback(&data);
            new_size = data.DesiredSize;
        }
    }

    // Minimum size
    if (!(window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)))
    {
        new_size = ImMax(new_size, g.Style.WindowMinSize);
        new_size.y = ImMax(new_size.y, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + ImMax(0.0f, g.Style.WindowRounding - 1.0f)); // Reduce artifacts with very small windows
    }
    return new_size;
}

static ImVec2 CalcSizeContents(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImVec2 sz;
    sz.x = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x));
    sz.y = (float)(int)((window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y));
    return sz + window->WindowPadding;
}

static ImVec2 CalcSizeAutoFit(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_contents)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
    {
        // Tooltip always resize
        return size_contents;
    }
    else
    {
        // When the window cannot fit all contents (either because of constraints, either because screen is too small): we are growing the size on the other axis to compensate for expected scrollbar. FIXME: Might turn bigger than DisplaySize-WindowPadding.
        const bool is_popup = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0;
        const bool is_menu = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0;
        ImVec2 size_min = style.WindowMinSize;
        if (is_popup || is_menu) // Popups and menus bypass style.WindowMinSize by default, but we give then a non-zero minimum size to facilitate understanding problematic cases (e.g. empty popups)
            size_min = ImMin(size_min, ImVec2(4.0f, 4.0f));
        ImVec2 size_auto_fit = ImClamp(size_contents, size_min, ImMax(size_min, g.IO.DisplaySize - style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding * 2.0f));
        ImVec2 size_auto_fit_after_constraint = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
        if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.x < size_contents.x && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar))
            size_auto_fit.y += style.ScrollbarSize;
        if (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.y < size_contents.y && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar))
            size_auto_fit.x += style.ScrollbarSize;
        return size_auto_fit;
    }
}

ImVec2 ImGui::CalcWindowExpectedSize(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImVec2 size_contents = CalcSizeContents(window);
    return CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, CalcSizeAutoFit(window, size_contents));
}

static float GetScrollMaxX(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.x - (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
}

static float GetScrollMaxY(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    return ImMax(0.0f, window->SizeContents.y - (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
}

static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window, bool snap_on_edges)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImVec2 scroll = window->Scroll;
    if (window->ScrollTarget.x < FLT_MAX)
    {
        float cr_x = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x;
        scroll.x = window->ScrollTarget.x - cr_x * (window->SizeFull.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x);
    }
    if (window->ScrollTarget.y < FLT_MAX)
    {
        // 'snap_on_edges' allows for a discontinuity at the edge of scrolling limits to take account of WindowPadding so that scrolling to make the last item visible scroll far enough to see the padding.
        float cr_y = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y;
        float target_y = window->ScrollTarget.y;
        if (snap_on_edges && cr_y <= 0.0f && target_y <= window->WindowPadding.y)
            target_y = 0.0f;
        if (snap_on_edges && cr_y >= 1.0f && target_y >= window->SizeContents.y - window->WindowPadding.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y)
            target_y = window->SizeContents.y;
        scroll.y = target_y - (1.0f - cr_y) * (window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight()) - cr_y * (window->SizeFull.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y);
    }
    scroll = ImMax(scroll, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
    if (!window->Collapsed && !window->SkipItems)
    {
        scroll.x = ImMin(scroll.x, GetScrollMaxX(window));
        scroll.y = ImMin(scroll.y, GetScrollMaxY(window));
    }
    return scroll;
}

static ImGuiCol GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    if (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
        return ImGuiCol_PopupBg;
    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
        return ImGuiCol_ChildBg;
    return ImGuiCol_WindowBg;
}

static void CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& corner_target, const ImVec2& corner_norm, ImVec2* out_pos, ImVec2* out_size)
{
    ImVec2 pos_min = ImLerp(corner_target, window->Pos, corner_norm);                // Expected window upper-left
    ImVec2 pos_max = ImLerp(window->Pos + window->Size, corner_target, corner_norm); // Expected window lower-right
    ImVec2 size_expected = pos_max - pos_min;
    ImVec2 size_constrained = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_expected);
    *out_pos = pos_min;
    if (corner_norm.x == 0.0f)
        out_pos->x -= (size_constrained.x - size_expected.x);
    if (corner_norm.y == 0.0f)
        out_pos->y -= (size_constrained.y - size_expected.y);
    *out_size = size_constrained;
}

struct ImGuiResizeGripDef
{
    ImVec2  CornerPos;
    ImVec2  InnerDir;
    int     AngleMin12, AngleMax12;
};

const ImGuiResizeGripDef resize_grip_def[4] =
{
    { ImVec2(1,1), ImVec2(-1,-1), 0, 3 }, // Lower right
    { ImVec2(0,1), ImVec2(+1,-1), 3, 6 }, // Lower left
    { ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(+1,+1), 6, 9 }, // Upper left
    { ImVec2(1,0), ImVec2(-1,+1), 9,12 }, // Upper right
};

static ImRect GetBorderRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int border_n, float perp_padding, float thickness)
{
    ImRect rect = window->Rect();
    if (thickness == 0.0f) rect.Max -= ImVec2(1,1);
    if (border_n == 0) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Min.y,                rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Min.y + thickness);
    if (border_n == 1) return ImRect(rect.Max.x - thickness,    rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Max.x,                rect.Max.y - perp_padding);
    if (border_n == 2) return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Max.y - thickness,    rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Max.y);
    if (border_n == 3) return ImRect(rect.Min.x,                rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Min.x + thickness,    rect.Max.y - perp_padding);
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return ImRect();
}

// Handle resize for: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
static void ImGui::UpdateManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4])
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
    if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) || window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
        return;

    const int resize_border_count = g.IO.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges ? 4 : 0;
    const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
    const float grip_hover_size = (float)(int)(grip_draw_size * 0.75f);

    ImVec2 pos_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
    ImVec2 size_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);

    // Manual resize grips
    PushID("#RESIZE");
    for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
    {
        const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
        const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPos);

        // Using the FlattenChilds button flag we make the resize button accessible even if we are hovering over a child window
        ImRect resize_rect(corner, corner + grip.InnerDir * grip_hover_size);
        if (resize_rect.Min.x > resize_rect.Max.x) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.x, resize_rect.Max.x);
        if (resize_rect.Min.y > resize_rect.Max.y) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.y, resize_rect.Max.y);
        bool hovered, held;
        ButtonBehavior(resize_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)resize_grip_n), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
        if (hovered || held)
            g.MouseCursor = (resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE;

        if (held && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] && resize_grip_n == 0)
        {
            // Manual auto-fit when double-clicking
            size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
            ClearActiveID();
        }
        else if (held)
        {
            // Resize from any of the four corners
            // We don't use an incremental MouseDelta but rather compute an absolute target size based on mouse position
            ImVec2 corner_target = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset + resize_rect.GetSize() * grip.CornerPos; // Corner of the window corresponding to our corner grip
            CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, corner_target, grip.CornerPos, &pos_target, &size_target);
        }
        if (resize_grip_n == 0 || held || hovered)
            resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n] = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered : ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip);
    }
    for (int border_n = 0; border_n < resize_border_count; border_n++)
    {
        const float BORDER_SIZE = 5.0f;          // FIXME: Only works _inside_ window because of HoveredWindow check.
        const float BORDER_APPEAR_TIMER = 0.05f; // Reduce visual noise
        bool hovered, held;
        ImRect border_rect = GetBorderRect(window, border_n, grip_hover_size, BORDER_SIZE);
        ButtonBehavior(border_rect, window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)(border_n + 4)), &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren);
        if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > BORDER_APPEAR_TIMER) || held)
        {
            g.MouseCursor = (border_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS;
            if (held) *border_held = border_n;
        }
        if (held)
        {
            ImVec2 border_target = window->Pos;
            ImVec2 border_posn;
            if (border_n == 0) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y); }
            if (border_n == 1) { border_posn = ImVec2(1, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + BORDER_SIZE); }
            if (border_n == 2) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 1); border_target.y = (g.IO.MousePos.y - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.y + BORDER_SIZE); }
            if (border_n == 3) { border_posn = ImVec2(0, 0); border_target.x = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x); }
            CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, border_target, border_posn, &pos_target, &size_target);
        }
    }
    PopID();

    // Navigation resize (keyboard/gamepad)
    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow == window)
    {
        ImVec2 nav_resize_delta;
        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard && g.IO.KeyShift)
            nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavGamepad)
            nav_resize_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_Down);
        if (nav_resize_delta.x != 0.0f || nav_resize_delta.y != 0.0f)
        {
            const float NAV_RESIZE_SPEED = 600.0f;
            nav_resize_delta *= ImFloor(NAV_RESIZE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y));
            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
            g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
            resize_grip_col[0] = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive);
            // FIXME-NAV: Should store and accumulate into a separate size buffer to handle sizing constraints properly, right now a constraint will make us stuck.
            size_target = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull + nav_resize_delta);
        }
    }

    // Apply back modified position/size to window
    if (size_target.x != FLT_MAX)
    {
        window->SizeFull = size_target;
        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
    }
    if (pos_target.x != FLT_MAX)
    {
        window->Pos = ImFloor(pos_target);
        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
    }

    window->Size = window->SizeFull;
}

void ImGui::UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window)
{
    window->ParentWindow = parent_window;
    window->RootWindow = window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = window->RootWindowForNav = window;
    if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
        window->RootWindow = parent_window->RootWindow;
    if (parent_window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)))
        window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = parent_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight;
    while (window->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
        window->RootWindowForNav = window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow;
}

// Push a new ImGui window to add widgets to.
// - A default window called "Debug" is automatically stacked at the beginning of every frame so you can use widgets without explicitly calling a Begin/End pair.
// - Begin/End can be called multiple times during the frame with the same window name to append content.
// - The window name is used as a unique identifier to preserve window information across frames (and save rudimentary information to the .ini file).
//   You can use the "##" or "###" markers to use the same label with different id, or same id with different label. See documentation at the top of this file.
// - Return false when window is collapsed, so you can early out in your code. You always need to call ImGui::End() even if false is returned.
// - Passing 'bool* p_open' displays a Close button on the upper-right corner of the window, the pointed value will be set to false when the button is pressed.
bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    IM_ASSERT(name != NULL);                        // Window name required
    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameScopeActive);                  // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount);   // Called ImGui::Render() or ImGui::EndFrame() and haven't called ImGui::NewFrame() again yet

    // Find or create
    ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name);
    const bool window_just_created = (window == NULL);
    if (window_just_created)
    {
        ImVec2 size_on_first_use = (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond != 0) ? g.NextWindowData.SizeVal : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // Any condition flag will do since we are creating a new window here.
        window = CreateNewWindow(name, size_on_first_use, flags);
    }

    // Automatically disable manual moving/resizing when NoInputs is set
    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
        flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;

    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
        IM_ASSERT(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);

    const int current_frame = g.FrameCount;
    const bool first_begin_of_the_frame = (window->LastFrameActive != current_frame);
    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
        window->Flags = (ImGuiWindowFlags)flags;
    else
        flags = window->Flags;

    // Parent window is latched only on the first call to Begin() of the frame, so further append-calls can be done from a different window stack
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack = g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back();
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = first_begin_of_the_frame ? ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) ? parent_window_in_stack : NULL) : window->ParentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT(parent_window != NULL || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow));
    window->HasCloseButton = (p_open != NULL);

    // Update the Appearing flag
    bool window_just_activated_by_user = (window->LastFrameActive < current_frame - 1);   // Not using !WasActive because the implicit "Debug" window would always toggle off->on
    const bool window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize = (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0);
    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
    {
        ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size];
        window_just_activated_by_user |= (window->PopupId != popup_ref.PopupId); // We recycle popups so treat window as activated if popup id changed
        window_just_activated_by_user |= (window != popup_ref.Window);
    }
    window->Appearing = (window_just_activated_by_user || window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize);
    if (window->Appearing)
        SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true);

    // Add to stack
    g.CurrentWindowStack.push_back(window);
    SetCurrentWindow(window);
    CheckStacksSize(window, true);
    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
    {
        ImGuiPopupRef& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size];
        popup_ref.Window = window;
        g.CurrentPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
        window->PopupId = popup_ref.PopupId;
    }

    if (window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
        window->NavLastIds[0] = 0;

    // Process SetNextWindow***() calls
    bool window_pos_set_by_api = false;
    bool window_size_x_set_by_api = false, window_size_y_set_by_api = false;
    if (g.NextWindowData.PosCond)
    {
        window_pos_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) != 0;
        if (window_pos_set_by_api && ImLengthSqr(g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal) > 0.00001f)
        {
            // May be processed on the next frame if this is our first frame and we are measuring size
            // FIXME: Look into removing the branch so everything can go through this same code path for consistency.
            window->SetWindowPosVal = g.NextWindowData.PosVal;
            window->SetWindowPosPivot = g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal;
            window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
        }
        else
        {
            SetWindowPos(window, g.NextWindowData.PosVal, g.NextWindowData.PosCond);
        }
    }
    if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCond)
    {
        window_size_x_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x > 0.0f);
        window_size_y_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y > 0.0f);
        SetWindowSize(window, g.NextWindowData.SizeVal, g.NextWindowData.SizeCond);
    }
    if (g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond)
    {
        // Adjust passed "client size" to become a "window size"
        window->SizeContentsExplicit = g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal;
        if (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f)
            window->SizeContentsExplicit.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
    }
    else if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
    {
        window->SizeContentsExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    }
    if (g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond)
        SetWindowCollapsed(window, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond);
    if (g.NextWindowData.FocusCond)
        FocusWindow(window);
    if (window->Appearing)
        SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, false);

    // When reusing window again multiple times a frame, just append content (don't need to setup again)
    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
    {
        // Initialize
        const bool window_is_child_tooltip = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // FIXME-WIP: Undocumented behavior of Child+Tooltip for pinned tooltip (#1345)
        UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, flags, parent_window);

        window->Active = true;
        window->BeginOrderWithinParent = 0;
        window->BeginOrderWithinContext = g.WindowsActiveCount++;
        window->BeginCount = 0;
        window->ClipRect = ImVec4(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX,+FLT_MAX);
        window->LastFrameActive = current_frame;
        window->IDStack.resize(1);

        // UPDATE CONTENTS SIZE, UPDATE HIDDEN STATUS

        // Update contents size from last frame for auto-fitting (or use explicit size)
        window->SizeContents = CalcSizeContents(window);
        if (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0)
            window->HiddenFramesRegular--;
        if (window->HiddenFramesForResize > 0)
            window->HiddenFramesForResize--;

        // Hide new windows for one frame until they calculate their size
        if (window_just_created && (!window_size_x_set_by_api || !window_size_y_set_by_api))
            window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;

        // Hide popup/tooltip window when re-opening while we measure size (because we recycle the windows)
        // We reset Size/SizeContents for reappearing popups/tooltips early in this function, so further code won't be tempted to use the old size.
        if (window_just_activated_by_user && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) != 0)
        {
            window->HiddenFramesForResize = 1;
            if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)
            {
                if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
                    window->Size.x = window->SizeFull.x = 0.f;
                if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
                    window->Size.y = window->SizeFull.y = 0.f;
                window->SizeContents = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f);
            }
        }

        SetCurrentWindow(window);

        // Lock border size and padding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
        window->WindowBorderSize = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildBorderSize : ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupBorderSize : style.WindowBorderSize;
        window->WindowPadding = style.WindowPadding;
        if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) && window->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f)
            window->WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? style.WindowPadding.y : 0.0f);
        window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = ImMax(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, style.ItemSpacing.x), g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.x);
        window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y = g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y;

        // Collapse window by double-clicking on title bar
        // At this point we don't have a clipping rectangle setup yet, so we can use the title bar area for hit detection and drawing
        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
        {
            // We don't use a regular button+id to test for double-click on title bar (mostly due to legacy reason, could be fixed), so verify that we don't have items over the title bar.
            ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
            if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredId == 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == 0 && IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max) && g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
                window->WantCollapseToggle = true;
            if (window->WantCollapseToggle)
            {
                window->Collapsed = !window->Collapsed;
                MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
        }
        else
        {
            window->Collapsed = false;
        }
        window->WantCollapseToggle = false;

        // SIZE

        // Calculate auto-fit size, handle automatic resize
        const ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcSizeAutoFit(window, window->SizeContents);
        ImVec2 size_full_modified(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
        if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && !window->Collapsed)
        {
            // Using SetNextWindowSize() overrides ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize, so it can be used on tooltips/popups, etc.
            if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
                window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = size_auto_fit.x;
            if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
                window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = size_auto_fit.y;
        }
        else if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
        {
            // Auto-fit may only grow window during the first few frames
            // We still process initial auto-fit on collapsed windows to get a window width, but otherwise don't honor ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize when collapsed.
            if (!window_size_x_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
                window->SizeFull.x = size_full_modified.x = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, size_auto_fit.x) : size_auto_fit.x;
            if (!window_size_y_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
                window->SizeFull.y = size_full_modified.y = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, size_auto_fit.y) : size_auto_fit.y;
            if (!window->Collapsed)
                MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
        }

        // Apply minimum/maximum window size constraints and final size
        window->SizeFull = CalcSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull);
        window->Size = window->Collapsed && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? window->TitleBarRect().GetSize() : window->SizeFull;

        // SCROLLBAR STATUS

        // Update scrollbar status (based on the Size that was effective during last frame or the auto-resized Size).
        if (!window->Collapsed)
        {
            // When reading the current size we need to read it after size constraints have been applied
            float size_x_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.x != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.x;
            float size_y_for_scrollbars = size_full_modified.y != FLT_MAX ? window->SizeFull.y : window->SizeFullAtLastBegin.y;
            window->ScrollbarY = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar));
            window->ScrollbarX = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar) || ((window->SizeContents.x > size_x_for_scrollbars - (window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar));
            if (window->ScrollbarX && !window->ScrollbarY)
                window->ScrollbarY = (window->SizeContents.y > size_y_for_scrollbars - style.ScrollbarSize) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
            window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f, window->ScrollbarX ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f);
        }

        // POSITION

        // Popup latch its initial position, will position itself when it appears next frame
        if (window_just_activated_by_user)
        {
            window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
            if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api)
                window->Pos = g.CurrentPopupStack.back().OpenPopupPos;
        }

        // Position child window
        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
        {
            window->BeginOrderWithinParent = parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
            parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.push_back(window);
            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
                window->Pos = parent_window->DC.CursorPos;
        }

        const bool window_pos_with_pivot = (window->SetWindowPosVal.x != FLT_MAX && window->HiddenFramesForResize == 0);
        if (window_pos_with_pivot)
            SetWindowPos(window, ImMax(style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, window->SetWindowPosVal - window->SizeFull * window->SetWindowPosPivot), 0); // Position given a pivot (e.g. for centering)
        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0)
            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize)
            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);

        // Clamp position so it stays visible
        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
        {
            if (!window_pos_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && g.IO.DisplaySize.x > 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y > 0.0f) // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing.
            {
                ImVec2 padding = ImMax(style.DisplayWindowPadding, style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding);
                window->Pos = ImMax(window->Pos + window->Size, padding) - window->Size;
                window->Pos = ImMin(window->Pos, g.IO.DisplaySize - padding);
            }
        }
        window->Pos = ImFloor(window->Pos);

        // Lock window rounding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
        window->WindowRounding = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildRounding : ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupRounding : style.WindowRounding;

        // Prepare for item focus requests
        window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxAllCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxAllCounter+1);
        window->FocusIdxTabRequestCurrent = (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext == INT_MAX || window->FocusIdxTabCounter == -1) ? INT_MAX : (window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext + (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1)) % (window->FocusIdxTabCounter+1);
        window->FocusIdxAllCounter = window->FocusIdxTabCounter = -1;
        window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;

        // Apply scrolling
        window->Scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window, true);
        window->ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);

        // Apply window focus (new and reactivated windows are moved to front)
        bool want_focus = false;
        if (window_just_activated_by_user && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing))
            if (!(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
                want_focus = true;

        // Handle manual resize: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
        int border_held = -1;
        ImU32 resize_grip_col[4] = { 0 };
        const int resize_grip_count = g.IO.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges ? 2 : 1; // 4
        const float grip_draw_size = (float)(int)ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f);
        if (!window->Collapsed)
            UpdateManualResize(window, size_auto_fit, &border_held, resize_grip_count, &resize_grip_col[0]);

        // Default item width. Make it proportional to window size if window manually resizes
        if (window->Size.x > 0.0f && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
            window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(window->Size.x * 0.65f);
        else
            window->ItemWidthDefault = (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 16.0f);

        // DRAWING

        // Setup draw list and outer clipping rectangle
        window->DrawList->Clear();
        window->DrawList->Flags = (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines : 0) | (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill ? ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill : 0);
        window->DrawList->PushTextureID(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
        ImRect viewport_rect(GetViewportRect());
        if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip)
            PushClipRect(parent_window->ClipRect.Min, parent_window->ClipRect.Max, true);
        else
            PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, true);

        // Draw modal window background (darkens what is behind them, all viewports)
        const bool dim_bg_for_modal = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && window == GetFrontMostPopupModal() && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;
        const bool dim_bg_for_window_list = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && (window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->RootWindow);
        if (dim_bg_for_modal || dim_bg_for_window_list)
        {
            const ImU32 dim_bg_col = GetColorU32(dim_bg_for_modal ? ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg : ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio);
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, dim_bg_col);
        }

        // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle background
        if (dim_bg_for_window_list && window == g.NavWindowingTargetAnim)
        {
            ImRect bb = window->Rect();
            bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
            if (!bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // Avoid drawing if the window covers all the viewport anyway
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha * 0.25f), g.Style.WindowRounding);
        }

        // Draw window + handle manual resize
        const float window_rounding = window->WindowRounding;
        const float window_border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
        const ImGuiWindow* window_to_highlight = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget : g.NavWindow;
        const bool title_bar_is_highlight = want_focus || (window_to_highlight && window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == window_to_highlight->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight);
        const ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
        if (window->Collapsed)
        {
            // Title bar only
            float backup_border_size = style.FrameBorderSize;
            g.Style.FrameBorderSize = window->WindowBorderSize;
            ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32((title_bar_is_highlight && !g.NavDisableHighlight) ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed);
            RenderFrame(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, true, window_rounding);
            g.Style.FrameBorderSize = backup_border_size;
        }
        else
        {
            // Window background
            ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(GetWindowBgColorIdxFromFlags(flags));
            if (g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond != 0)
            {
                bg_col = (bg_col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
                g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = 0;
            }
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(window->Pos + ImVec2(0, window->TitleBarHeight()), window->Pos + window->Size, bg_col, window_rounding, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot);

            // Title bar
            ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(window->Collapsed ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed : title_bar_is_highlight ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg);
            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, window_rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);

            // Menu bar
            if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)
            {
                ImRect menu_bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
                menu_bar_rect.ClipWith(window->Rect());  // Soft clipping, in particular child window don't have minimum size covering the menu bar so this is useful for them.
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(menu_bar_rect.Min, menu_bar_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg), (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? window_rounding : 0.0f, ImDrawCornerFlags_Top);
                if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f && menu_bar_rect.Max.y < window->Pos.y + window->Size.y)
                    window->DrawList->AddLine(menu_bar_rect.GetBL(), menu_bar_rect.GetBR(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
            }

            // Scrollbars
            if (window->ScrollbarX)
                Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
            if (window->ScrollbarY)
                Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical);

            // Render resize grips (after their input handling so we don't have a frame of latency)
            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize))
            {
                for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
                {
                    const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
                    const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPos);
                    window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size) : ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size)));
                    window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(grip_draw_size, window_border_size) : ImVec2(window_border_size, grip_draw_size)));
                    window->DrawList->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(corner.x + grip.InnerDir.x * (window_rounding + window_border_size), corner.y + grip.InnerDir.y * (window_rounding + window_border_size)), window_rounding, grip.AngleMin12, grip.AngleMax12);
                    window->DrawList->PathFillConvex(resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n]);
                }
            }

            // Borders
            if (window_border_size > 0.0f)
                window->DrawList->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), window_rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All, window_border_size);
            if (border_held != -1)
            {
                ImRect border = GetBorderRect(window, border_held, grip_draw_size, 0.0f);
                window->DrawList->AddLine(border.Min, border.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive), ImMax(1.0f, window_border_size));
            }
            if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0 && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
                window->DrawList->AddLine(title_bar_rect.GetBL() + ImVec2(style.WindowBorderSize, -1), title_bar_rect.GetBR() + ImVec2(-style.WindowBorderSize, -1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
        }

        // Draw navigation selection/windowing rectangle border
        if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim == window)
        {
            float rounding = ImMax(window->WindowRounding, g.Style.WindowRounding);
            ImRect bb = window->Rect();
            bb.Expand(g.FontSize);
            if (bb.Contains(viewport_rect)) // If a window fits the entire viewport, adjust its highlight inward
            {
                bb.Expand(-g.FontSize - 1.0f);
                rounding = window->WindowRounding;
            }
            window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha), rounding, ~0, 3.0f);
        }

        // Store a backup of SizeFull which we will use next frame to decide if we need scrollbars.
        window->SizeFullAtLastBegin = window->SizeFull;

        // Update various regions. Variables they depends on are set above in this function.
        // FIXME: window->ContentsRegionRect.Max is currently very misleading / partly faulty, but some BeginChild() patterns relies on it.
        window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
        window->ContentsRegionRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + window->WindowPadding.y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
        window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x - window->WindowPadding.x + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.x : (window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
        window->ContentsRegionRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y - window->WindowPadding.y + (window->SizeContentsExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->SizeContentsExplicit.y : (window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));

        // Setup drawing context
        // (NB: That term "drawing context / DC" lost its meaning a long time ago. Initially was meant to hold transient data only. Nowadays difference between window-> and window->DC-> is dubious.)
        window->DC.Indent.x = 0.0f + window->WindowPadding.x - window->Scroll.x;
        window->DC.GroupOffset.x = 0.0f;
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
        window->DC.CursorStartPos = window->Pos + ImVec2(window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x, window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + window->WindowPadding.y - window->Scroll.y);
        window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
        window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPos;
        window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
        window->DC.CurrentLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
        window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
        window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false;
        window->DC.NavHasScroll = (GetScrollMaxY() > 0.0f);
        window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask = window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext;
        window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
        window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
        window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f;
        window->DC.ChildWindows.resize(0);
        window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
        window->DC.ParentLayoutType = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.LayoutType : ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
        window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.ItemFlags : ImGuiItemFlags_Default_;
        window->DC.ItemWidth = window->ItemWidthDefault;
        window->DC.TextWrapPos = -1.0f; // disabled
        window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.resize(0);
        window->DC.ItemWidthStack.resize(0);
        window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.resize(0);
        window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
        window->DC.TreeDepth = 0;
        window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop = 0x00;
        window->DC.StateStorage = &window->StateStorage;
        window->DC.GroupStack.resize(0);
        window->MenuColumns.Update(3, style.ItemSpacing.x, window_just_activated_by_user);

        if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (window->DC.ItemFlags != parent_window->DC.ItemFlags))
        {
            window->DC.ItemFlags = parent_window->DC.ItemFlags;
            window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
        }

        if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
            window->AutoFitFramesX--;
        if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
            window->AutoFitFramesY--;

        // Apply focus (we need to call FocusWindow() AFTER setting DC.CursorStartPos so our initial navigation reference rectangle can start around there)
        if (want_focus)
        {
            FocusWindow(window);
            NavInitWindow(window, false);
        }

        // Title bar
        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
        {
            // Close & collapse button are on layer 1 (same as menus) and don't default focus
            const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
            window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
            window->DC.NavLayerCurrent++;
            window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask <<= 1;

            // Collapse button
            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse))
                if (CollapseButton(window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), window->Pos))
                    window->WantCollapseToggle = true; // Defer collapsing to next frame as we are too far in the Begin() function

            // Close button
            if (p_open != NULL)
            {
                const float pad = style.FramePadding.y;
                const float rad = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
                if (CloseButton(window->GetID("#CLOSE"), window->Rect().GetTR() + ImVec2(-pad - rad, pad + rad), rad + 1))
                    *p_open = false;
            }

            window->DC.NavLayerCurrent--;
            window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask >>= 1;
            window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;

            // Title text (FIXME: refactor text alignment facilities along with RenderText helpers, this is too much code for what it does.)
            ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(name, NULL, true);
            ImRect text_r = title_bar_rect;
            float pad_left = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            float pad_right = (p_open == NULL)                     ? style.FramePadding.x : (style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            if (style.WindowTitleAlign.x > 0.0f)
                pad_right = ImLerp(pad_right, pad_left, style.WindowTitleAlign.x);
            text_r.Min.x += pad_left;
            text_r.Max.x -= pad_right;
            ImRect clip_rect = text_r;
            clip_rect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - (p_open ? title_bar_rect.GetHeight() - 3 : style.FramePadding.x); // Match the size of CloseButton()
            RenderTextClipped(text_r.Min, text_r.Max, name, NULL, &text_size, style.WindowTitleAlign, &clip_rect);
        }

        // Save clipped aabb so we can access it in constant-time in FindHoveredWindow()
        window->OuterRectClipped = window->Rect();
        window->OuterRectClipped.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);

        // Pressing CTRL+C while holding on a window copy its content to the clipboard
        // This works but 1. doesn't handle multiple Begin/End pairs, 2. recursing into another Begin/End pair - so we need to work that out and add better logging scope.
        // Maybe we can support CTRL+C on every element?
        /*
        if (g.ActiveId == move_id)
            if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C))
                ImGui::LogToClipboard();
        */

        // Inner rectangle
        // We set this up after processing the resize grip so that our clip rectangle doesn't lag by a frame
        // Note that if our window is collapsed we will end up with an inverted (~null) clipping rectangle which is the correct behavior.
        window->InnerMainRect.Min.x = title_bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
        window->InnerMainRect.Min.y = title_bar_rect.Max.y + window->MenuBarHeight() + (((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? style.FrameBorderSize : window->WindowBorderSize);
        window->InnerMainRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
        window->InnerMainRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y + window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y - window->WindowBorderSize;
        //window->DrawList->AddRect(window->InnerRect.Min, window->InnerRect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE);

        // Inner clipping rectangle
        // Force round operator last to ensure that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render code produce correct result.
        window->InnerClipRect.Min.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.x + ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
        window->InnerClipRect.Min.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Min.y);
        window->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.x - ImMax(0.0f, ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f - window->WindowBorderSize)));
        window->InnerClipRect.Max.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerMainRect.Max.y);

        // After Begin() we fill the last item / hovered data based on title bar data. It is a standard behavior (to allow creation of context menus on title bar only, etc.).
        window->DC.LastItemId = window->MoveId;
        window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags = IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, false) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0;
        window->DC.LastItemRect = title_bar_rect;
    }

    PushClipRect(window->InnerClipRect.Min, window->InnerClipRect.Max, true);

    // Clear 'accessed' flag last thing (After PushClipRect which will set the flag. We want the flag to stay false when the default "Debug" window is unused)
    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
        window->WriteAccessed = false;

    window->BeginCount++;
    g.NextWindowData.Clear();

    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
    {
        // Child window can be out of sight and have "negative" clip windows.
        // Mark them as collapsed so commands are skipped earlier (we can't manually collapse them because they have no title bar).
        IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) != 0);

        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
            if (window->OuterRectClipped.Min.x >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.x || window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.y)
                window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;

        // Completely hide along with parent or if parent is collapsed
        if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->Hidden))
            window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
    }

    // Don't render if style alpha is 0.0 at the time of Begin(). This is arbitrary and inconsistent but has been there for a long while (may remove at some point)
    if (style.Alpha <= 0.0f)
        window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;

    // Update the Hidden flag
    window->Hidden = (window->HiddenFramesRegular > 0) || (window->HiddenFramesForResize);

    // Return false if we don't intend to display anything to allow user to perform an early out optimization
    window->SkipItems = (window->Collapsed || !window->Active || window->Hidden) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && window->HiddenFramesForResize <= 0;

    return !window->SkipItems;
}

// Old Begin() API with 5 parameters, avoid calling this version directly! Use SetNextWindowSize()/SetNextWindowBgAlpha() + Begin() instead.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, const ImVec2& size_first_use, float bg_alpha_override, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
{
    // Old API feature: we could pass the initial window size as a parameter. This was misleading because it only had an effect if the window didn't have data in the .ini file.
    if (size_first_use.x != 0.0f || size_first_use.y != 0.0f)
        ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(size_first_use, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);

    // Old API feature: override the window background alpha with a parameter.
    if (bg_alpha_override >= 0.0f)
        ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(bg_alpha_override);

    return ImGui::Begin(name, p_open, flags);
}
#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS

void ImGui::End()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
        EndColumns();
    PopClipRect();   // Inner window clip rectangle

    // Stop logging
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))    // FIXME: add more options for scope of logging
        LogFinish();

    // Pop from window stack
    g.CurrentWindowStack.pop_back();
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
        g.CurrentPopupStack.pop_back();
    CheckStacksSize(window, false);
    SetCurrentWindow(g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back());
}

// Vertical scrollbar
// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiLayoutType direction)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const bool horizontal = (direction == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal);
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(horizontal ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");

    // Render background
    bool other_scrollbar = (horizontal ? window->ScrollbarY : window->ScrollbarX);
    float other_scrollbar_size_w = other_scrollbar ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f;
    const ImRect window_rect = window->Rect();
    const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
    ImRect bb = horizontal
        ? ImRect(window->Pos.x + border_size, window_rect.Max.y - style.ScrollbarSize, window_rect.Max.x - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - border_size)
        : ImRect(window_rect.Max.x - style.ScrollbarSize, window->Pos.y + border_size, window_rect.Max.x - border_size, window_rect.Max.y - other_scrollbar_size_w - border_size);
    if (!horizontal)
        bb.Min.y += window->TitleBarHeight() + ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? window->MenuBarHeight() : 0.0f);
    if (bb.GetWidth() <= 0.0f || bb.GetHeight() <= 0.0f)
        return;

    int window_rounding_corners;
    if (horizontal)
        window_rounding_corners = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
    else
        window_rounding_corners = (((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight : 0) | (other_scrollbar ? 0 : ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg), window->WindowRounding, window_rounding_corners);
    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.x - bb.Min.x - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp((float)(int)((bb.Max.y - bb.Min.y - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));

    // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
    float scrollbar_size_v = horizontal ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();
    float scroll_v = horizontal ? window->Scroll.x : window->Scroll.y;
    float win_size_avail_v = (horizontal ? window->SizeFull.x : window->SizeFull.y) - other_scrollbar_size_w;
    float win_size_contents_v = horizontal ? window->SizeContents.x : window->SizeContents.y;

    // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
    // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
    IM_ASSERT(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
    const float win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(win_size_contents_v, win_size_avail_v), 1.0f);
    const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * (win_size_avail_v / win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
    const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;

    // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
    bool held = false;
    bool hovered = false;
    const bool previously_held = (g.ActiveId == id);
    ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);

    float scroll_max = ImMax(1.0f, win_size_contents_v - win_size_avail_v);
    float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
    float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
    if (held && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
    {
        float scrollbar_pos_v = horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y;
        float mouse_pos_v = horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;
        float* click_delta_to_grab_center_v = horizontal ? &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.x : &g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter.y;

        // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
        const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
        SetHoveredID(id);

        bool seek_absolute = false;
        if (!previously_held)
        {
            // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
            if (clicked_v_norm >= grab_v_norm && clicked_v_norm <= grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm)
            {
                *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
            }
            else
            {
                seek_absolute = true;
                *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = 0.0f;
            }
        }

        // Apply scroll
        // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of SizeContents and before setting up our starting position
        const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - *click_delta_to_grab_center_v - grab_h_norm*0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
        scroll_v = (float)(int)(0.5f + scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);//(win_size_contents_v - win_size_v));
        if (horizontal)
            window->Scroll.x = scroll_v;
        else
            window->Scroll.y = scroll_v;

        // Update values for rendering
        scroll_ratio = ImSaturate(scroll_v / scroll_max);
        grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;

        // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
        if (seek_absolute)
            *click_delta_to_grab_center_v = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm*0.5f;
    }

    // Render
    const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab);
    ImRect grab_rect;
    if (horizontal)
        grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.x), bb.Max.y);
    else
        grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImMin(ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, window_rect.Max.y));
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);
}

void ImGui::BringWindowToFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* current_front_window = g.Windows.back();
    if (current_front_window == window || current_front_window->RootWindow == window)
        return;
    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the front most window
        if (g.Windows[i] == window)
        {
            g.Windows.erase(g.Windows.Data + i);
            g.Windows.push_back(window);
            break;
        }
}

void ImGui::BringWindowToBack(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.Windows[0] == window)
        return;
    for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
        if (g.Windows[i] == window)
        {
            memmove(&g.Windows[1], &g.Windows[0], (size_t)i * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
            g.Windows[0] = window;
            break;
        }
}

// Moving window to front of display and set focus (which happens to be back of our sorted list)
void ImGui::FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    if (g.NavWindow != window)
    {
        g.NavWindow = window;
        if (window && g.NavDisableMouseHover)
            g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
        g.NavInitRequest = false;
        g.NavId = window ? window->NavLastIds[0] : 0; // Restore NavId
        g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
        g.NavLayer = 0;
        //printf("[%05d] FocusWindow(\"%s\")\n", g.FrameCount, window ? window->Name : NULL);
    }

    // Passing NULL allow to disable keyboard focus
    if (!window)
        return;

    // Move the root window to the top of the pile
    if (window->RootWindow)
        window = window->RootWindow;

    // Steal focus on active widgets
    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) // FIXME: This statement should be unnecessary. Need further testing before removing it..
        if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow != window)
            ClearActiveID();

    // Bring to front
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus))
        BringWindowToFront(window);
}

void ImGui::FocusFrontMostActiveWindowIgnoringOne(ImGuiWindow* ignore_window)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
        if (g.Windows[i] != ignore_window && g.Windows[i]->WasActive && !(g.Windows[i]->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
        {
            ImGuiWindow* focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.Windows[i]);
            FocusWindow(focus_window);
            return;
        }
}

void ImGui::PushItemWidth(float item_width)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.ItemWidth = (item_width == 0.0f ? window->ItemWidthDefault : item_width);
    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth);
}

void ImGui::PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float w_full)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
    if (w_full <= 0.0f)
        w_full = CalcItemWidth();
    const float w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_full - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
    const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_full - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));
    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_last);
    for (int i = 0; i < components-1; i++)
        window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_one);
    window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
}

void ImGui::PopItemWidth()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.pop_back();
    window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.empty() ? window->ItemWidthDefault : window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
}

float ImGui::CalcItemWidth()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    float w = window->DC.ItemWidth;
    if (w < 0.0f)
    {
        // Align to a right-side limit. We include 1 frame padding in the calculation because this is how the width is always used (we add 2 frame padding to it), but we could move that responsibility to the widget as well.
        float width_to_right_edge = GetContentRegionAvail().x;
        w = ImMax(1.0f, width_to_right_edge + w);
    }
    w = (float)(int)w;
    return w;
}

void ImGui::SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(font && font->IsLoaded());    // Font Atlas not created. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32 / GetTexDataAsAlpha8 ?
    IM_ASSERT(font->Scale > 0.0f);
    g.Font = font;
    g.FontBaseSize = g.IO.FontGlobalScale * g.Font->FontSize * g.Font->Scale;
    g.FontSize = g.CurrentWindow ? g.CurrentWindow->CalcFontSize() : 0.0f;

    ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
    g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel = atlas->TexUvWhitePixel;
    g.DrawListSharedData.Font = g.Font;
    g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = g.FontSize;
}

void ImGui::PushFont(ImFont* font)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!font)
        font = GetDefaultFont();
    SetCurrentFont(font);
    g.FontStack.push_back(font);
    g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PushTextureID(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
}

void  ImGui::PopFont()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PopTextureID();
    g.FontStack.pop_back();
    SetCurrentFont(g.FontStack.empty() ? GetDefaultFont() : g.FontStack.back());
}

void ImGui::PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (enabled)
        window->DC.ItemFlags |= option;
    else
        window->DC.ItemFlags &= ~option;
    window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemFlags);
}

void ImGui::PopItemFlag()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back();
    window->DC.ItemFlags = window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.empty() ? ImGuiItemFlags_Default_ : window->DC.ItemFlagsStack.back();
}

void ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus)
{
    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_AllowKeyboardFocus, allow_keyboard_focus);
}

void ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus()
{
    PopItemFlag();
}

void ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat)
{
    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat, repeat);
}

void ImGui::PopButtonRepeat()
{
    PopItemFlag();
}

void ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.TextWrapPos = wrap_pos_x;
    window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.push_back(wrap_pos_x);
}

void ImGui::PopTextWrapPos()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.pop_back();
    window->DC.TextWrapPos = window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.empty() ? -1.0f : window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.back();
}

// FIXME: This may incur a round-trip (if the end user got their data from a float4) but eventually we aim to store the in-flight colors as ImU32
void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColorMod backup;
    backup.Col = idx;
    backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
    g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
    g.Style.Colors[idx] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col);
}

void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColorMod backup;
    backup.Col = idx;
    backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
    g.ColorModifiers.push_back(backup);
    g.Style.Colors[idx] = col;
}

void ImGui::PopStyleColor(int count)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    while (count > 0)
    {
        ImGuiColorMod& backup = g.ColorModifiers.back();
        g.Style.Colors[backup.Col] = backup.BackupValue;
        g.ColorModifiers.pop_back();
        count--;
    }
}

struct ImGuiStyleVarInfo
{
    ImGuiDataType   Type;
    ImU32           Count;
    ImU32           Offset;
    void*           GetVarPtr(ImGuiStyle* style) const { return (void*)((unsigned char*)style + Offset); }
};

static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo GStyleVarInfo[] =
{
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, Alpha) },              // ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowPadding) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowRounding) },     // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowBorderSize) },   // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowMinSize) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowTitleAlign) },   // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildRounding) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildBorderSize) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupRounding) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupBorderSize) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FramePadding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameRounding) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameBorderSize) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemSpacing) },        // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemInnerSpacing) },   // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, IndentSpacing) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarSize) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarRounding) },  // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabMinSize) },        // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabRounding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding
    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ButtonTextAlign) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign
};

static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx)
{
    IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
    IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GStyleVarInfo) == ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
    return &GStyleVarInfo[idx];
}

void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val)
{
    const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
    if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 1)
    {
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        float* pvar = (float*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
        g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
        *pvar = val;
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a float.
}

void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val)
{
    const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
    if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 2)
    {
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImVec2* pvar = (ImVec2*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
        g.StyleModifiers.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
        *pvar = val;
        return;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0); // Called function with wrong-type? Variable is not a ImVec2.
}

void ImGui::PopStyleVar(int count)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    while (count > 0)
    {
        // We avoid a generic memcpy(data, &backup.Backup.., GDataTypeSize[info->Type] * info->Count), the overhead in Debug is not worth it.
        ImGuiStyleMod& backup = g.StyleModifiers.back();
        const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* info = GetStyleVarInfo(backup.VarIdx);
        void* data = info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
        if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 1)      { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; }
        else if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 2) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; ((float*)data)[1] = backup.BackupFloat[1]; }
        g.StyleModifiers.pop_back();
        count--;
    }
}

const char* ImGui::GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx)
{
    // Create switch-case from enum with regexp: ImGuiCol_{.*}, --> case ImGuiCol_\1: return "\1";
    switch (idx)
    {
    case ImGuiCol_Text: return "Text";
    case ImGuiCol_TextDisabled: return "TextDisabled";
    case ImGuiCol_WindowBg: return "WindowBg";
    case ImGuiCol_ChildBg: return "ChildBg";
    case ImGuiCol_PopupBg: return "PopupBg";
    case ImGuiCol_Border: return "Border";
    case ImGuiCol_BorderShadow: return "BorderShadow";
    case ImGuiCol_FrameBg: return "FrameBg";
    case ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered: return "FrameBgHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive: return "FrameBgActive";
    case ImGuiCol_TitleBg: return "TitleBg";
    case ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive: return "TitleBgActive";
    case ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed: return "TitleBgCollapsed";
    case ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg: return "MenuBarBg";
    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg: return "ScrollbarBg";
    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab: return "ScrollbarGrab";
    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered: return "ScrollbarGrabHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive: return "ScrollbarGrabActive";
    case ImGuiCol_CheckMark: return "CheckMark";
    case ImGuiCol_SliderGrab: return "SliderGrab";
    case ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive: return "SliderGrabActive";
    case ImGuiCol_Button: return "Button";
    case ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered: return "ButtonHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_ButtonActive: return "ButtonActive";
    case ImGuiCol_Header: return "Header";
    case ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered: return "HeaderHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_HeaderActive: return "HeaderActive";
    case ImGuiCol_Separator: return "Separator";
    case ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered: return "SeparatorHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive: return "SeparatorActive";
    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip: return "ResizeGrip";
    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered: return "ResizeGripHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive: return "ResizeGripActive";
    case ImGuiCol_PlotLines: return "PlotLines";
    case ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered: return "PlotLinesHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram: return "PlotHistogram";
    case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered: return "PlotHistogramHovered";
    case ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg: return "TextSelectedBg";
    case ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget: return "DragDropTarget";
    case ImGuiCol_NavHighlight: return "NavHighlight";
    case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight: return "NavWindowingHighlight";
    case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg: return "NavWindowingDimBg";
    case ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg: return "ModalWindowDimBg";
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return "Unknown";
}

bool ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent)
{
    if (window->RootWindow == potential_parent)
        return true;
    while (window != NULL)
    {
        if (window == potential_parent)
            return true;
        window = window->ParentWindow;
    }
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
{
    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped) == 0);   // Flags not supported by this function
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)
    {
        if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL)
            return false;
    }
    else
    {
        switch (flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows))
        {
        case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
            if (g.HoveredRootWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
                return false;
            break;
        case ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow:
            if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow)
                return false;
            break;
        case ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows:
            if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || !IsWindowChildOf(g.HoveredWindow, g.CurrentWindow))
                return false;
            break;
        default:
            if (g.HoveredWindow != g.CurrentWindow)
                return false;
            break;
        }
    }

    if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(g.HoveredRootWindow, flags))
        return false;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
        if (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredWindow->MoveId)
            return false;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow);     // Not inside a Begin()/End()

    if (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)
        return g.NavWindow != NULL;

    switch (flags & (ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
    {
    case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
        return g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
    case ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow:
        return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow->RootWindow;
    case ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows:
        return g.NavWindow && IsWindowChildOf(g.NavWindow, g.CurrentWindow);
    default:
        return g.NavWindow == g.CurrentWindow;
    }
}

// Can we focus this window with CTRL+TAB (or PadMenu + PadFocusPrev/PadFocusNext)
bool ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window)
{
    return window->Active && window == window->RootWindow && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus);
}

float ImGui::GetWindowWidth()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
    return window->Size.x;
}

float ImGui::GetWindowHeight()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
    return window->Size.y;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowPos()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    return window->Pos;
}

void ImGui::SetWindowScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_x)
{
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x += window->Scroll.x; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
    window->Scroll.x = new_scroll_x;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x -= window->Scroll.x;
}

void ImGui::SetWindowScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float new_scroll_y)
{
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y += window->Scroll.y; // SizeContents is generally computed based on CursorMaxPos which is affected by scroll position, so we need to apply our change to it.
    window->Scroll.y = new_scroll_y;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y -= window->Scroll.y;
}

static void SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
    if (cond && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
        return;

    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
    window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
    window->SetWindowPosVal = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);

    // Set
    const ImVec2 old_pos = window->Pos;
    window->Pos = ImFloor(pos);
    window->DC.CursorPos += (window->Pos - old_pos);    // As we happen to move the window while it is being appended to (which is a bad idea - will smear) let's at least offset the cursor
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos += (window->Pos - old_pos); // And more importantly we need to adjust this so size calculation doesn't get affected.
}

void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
}

void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
        SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowSize()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->Size;
}

static void SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
    if (cond && (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
        return;

    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
    window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);

    // Set
    if (size.x > 0.0f)
    {
        window->AutoFitFramesX = 0;
        window->SizeFull.x = size.x;
    }
    else
    {
        window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
    }
    if (size.y > 0.0f)
    {
        window->AutoFitFramesY = 0;
        window->SizeFull.y = size.y;
    }
    else
    {
        window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
    }
}

void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    SetWindowSize(GImGui->CurrentWindow, size, cond);
}

void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
        SetWindowSize(window, size, cond);
}

static void SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
    if (cond && (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
        return;
    window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);

    // Set
    window->Collapsed = collapsed;
}

void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    SetWindowCollapsed(GImGui->CurrentWindow, collapsed, cond);
}

bool ImGui::IsWindowCollapsed()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->Collapsed;
}

bool ImGui::IsWindowAppearing()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->Appearing;
}

void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
        SetWindowCollapsed(window, collapsed, cond);
}

void ImGui::SetWindowFocus()
{
    FocusWindow(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
}

void ImGui::SetWindowFocus(const char* name)
{
    if (name)
    {
        if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
            FocusWindow(window);
    }
    else
    {
        FocusWindow(NULL);
    }
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond, const ImVec2& pivot)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
    g.NextWindowData.PosVal = pos;
    g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal = pivot;
    g.NextWindowData.PosCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
    g.NextWindowData.SizeVal = size;
    g.NextWindowData.SizeCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback, void* custom_callback_user_data)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
    g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect = ImRect(size_min, size_max);
    g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback = custom_callback;
    g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData = custom_callback_user_data;
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal = size;  // In Begin() we will add the size of window decorations (title bar, menu etc.) to that to form a SizeContents value.
    g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeCond = ImGuiCond_Always;
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
    g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal = collapsed;
    g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowFocus()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.FocusCond = ImGuiCond_Always;   // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
}

void ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal = alpha;
    g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaCond = ImGuiCond_Always; // Using a Cond member for consistency (may transition all of them to single flag set for fast Clear() op)
}

// In window space (not screen space!)
ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMax()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImVec2 mx = window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
        mx.x = GetColumnOffset(window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current + 1) - window->WindowPadding.x;
    return mx;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return GetContentRegionMax() - (window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos);
}

float ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth()
{
    return GetContentRegionAvail().x;
}

// In window space (not screen space!)
ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMin()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ContentsRegionRect.Min - window->Pos;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ContentsRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
}

float ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionWidth()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ContentsRegionRect.GetWidth();
}

float ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize;
}

float ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
}

float ImGui::GetFrameHeight()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
}

float ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
}

ImDrawList* ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    return window->DrawList;
}

ImFont* ImGui::GetFont()
{
    return GImGui->Font;
}

float ImGui::GetFontSize()
{
    return GImGui->FontSize;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetFontTexUvWhitePixel()
{
    return GImGui->DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel;
}

void ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(float scale)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->FontWindowScale = scale;
    g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
}

// User generally sees positions in window coordinates. Internally we store CursorPos in absolute screen coordinates because it is more convenient.
// Conversion happens as we pass the value to user, but it makes our naming convention confusing because GetCursorPos() == (DC.CursorPos - window.Pos). May want to rename 'DC.CursorPos'.
ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorPos()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos + window->Scroll;
}

float ImGui::GetCursorPosX()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x;
}

float ImGui::GetCursorPosY()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CursorPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y;
}

void ImGui::SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.CursorPos = window->Pos - window->Scroll + local_pos;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
}

void ImGui::SetCursorPosX(float x)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + x;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.x);
}

void ImGui::SetCursorPosY(float y)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + y;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorStartPos()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CursorStartPos - window->Pos;
}

ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.CursorPos;
}

void ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& screen_pos)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.CursorPos = screen_pos;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
}

float ImGui::GetScrollX()
{
    return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.x;
}

float ImGui::GetScrollY()
{
    return GImGui->CurrentWindow->Scroll.y;
}

float ImGui::GetScrollMaxX()
{
    return GetScrollMaxX(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
}

float ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()
{
    return GetScrollMaxY(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
}

void ImGui::SetScrollX(float scroll_x)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->ScrollTarget.x = scroll_x;
    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
}

void ImGui::SetScrollY(float scroll_y)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->ScrollTarget.y = scroll_y + window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight(); // title bar height canceled out when using ScrollTargetRelY
    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
}

void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(float pos_y, float center_y_ratio)
{
    // We store a target position so centering can occur on the next frame when we are guaranteed to have a known window size
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    IM_ASSERT(center_y_ratio >= 0.0f && center_y_ratio <= 1.0f);
    window->ScrollTarget.y = (float)(int)(pos_y + window->Scroll.y);
    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = center_y_ratio;
}

// center_y_ratio: 0.0f top of last item, 0.5f vertical center of last item, 1.0f bottom of last item.
void ImGui::SetScrollHere(float center_y_ratio)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    float target_y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y - window->Pos.y; // Top of last item, in window space
    target_y += (window->DC.PrevLineSize.y * center_y_ratio) + (GImGui->Style.ItemSpacing.y * (center_y_ratio - 0.5f) * 2.0f); // Precisely aim above, in the middle or below the last line.
    SetScrollFromPosY(target_y, center_y_ratio);
}

void ImGui::ActivateItem(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NavNextActivateId = id;
}

void ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset)
{
    IM_ASSERT(offset >= -1);    // -1 is allowed but not below
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->FocusIdxAllRequestNext = window->FocusIdxAllCounter + 1 + offset;
    window->FocusIdxTabRequestNext = INT_MAX;
}

void ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (!window->Appearing)
        return;
    if (g.NavWindow == window->RootWindowForNav && (g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0) && g.NavLayer == g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
    {
        g.NavInitRequest = false;
        g.NavInitResultId = g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemId;
        g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect(g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Min - g.NavWindow->Pos, g.NavWindow->DC.LastItemRect.Max - g.NavWindow->Pos);
        NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
        if (!IsItemVisible())
            SetScrollHere();
    }
}

void ImGui::SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* tree)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.StateStorage = tree ? tree : &window->StateStorage;
}

ImGuiStorage* ImGui::GetStateStorage()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.StateStorage;
}

void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
}

// Start logging ImGui output to TTY
void ImGui::LogToTTY(int max_depth)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        return;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
    g.LogFile = stdout;
    g.LogEnabled = true;
    g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
    if (max_depth >= 0)
        g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}

// Start logging ImGui output to given file
void ImGui::LogToFile(int max_depth, const char* filename)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        return;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    if (!filename)
    {
        filename = g.IO.LogFilename;
        if (!filename)
            return;
    }

    IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
    g.LogFile = ImFileOpen(filename, "ab");
    if (!g.LogFile)
    {
        IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile != NULL); // Consider this an error
        return;
    }
    g.LogEnabled = true;
    g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
    if (max_depth >= 0)
        g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}

// Start logging ImGui output to clipboard
void ImGui::LogToClipboard(int max_depth)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        return;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
    g.LogFile = NULL;
    g.LogEnabled = true;
    g.LogStartDepth = window->DC.TreeDepth;
    if (max_depth >= 0)
        g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth = max_depth;
}

void ImGui::LogFinish()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!g.LogEnabled)
        return;

    LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
    if (g.LogFile != NULL)
    {
        if (g.LogFile == stdout)
            fflush(g.LogFile);
        else
            fclose(g.LogFile);
        g.LogFile = NULL;
    }
    if (g.LogClipboard.size() > 1)
    {
        SetClipboardText(g.LogClipboard.begin());
        g.LogClipboard.clear();
    }
    g.LogEnabled = false;
}

// Helper to display logging buttons
void ImGui::LogButtons()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    PushID("LogButtons");
    const bool log_to_tty = Button("Log To TTY"); SameLine();
    const bool log_to_file = Button("Log To File"); SameLine();
    const bool log_to_clipboard = Button("Log To Clipboard"); SameLine();
    PushItemWidth(80.0f);
    PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
    SliderInt("Depth", &g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, 0, 9, NULL);
    PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
    PopItemWidth();
    PopID();

    // Start logging at the end of the function so that the buttons don't appear in the log
    if (log_to_tty)
        LogToTTY(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
    if (log_to_file)
        LogToFile(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth, g.IO.LogFilename);
    if (log_to_clipboard)
        LogToClipboard(g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
        return true;

    // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use SetNextTreeNode*** functions)
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;

    bool is_open;
    if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond != 0)
    {
        if (g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
        {
            is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
            storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
        }
        else
        {
            // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
            const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
            if (stored_value == -1)
            {
                is_open = g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal;
                storage->SetInt(id, is_open);
            }
            else
            {
                is_open = stored_value != 0;
            }
        }
        g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = 0;
    }
    else
    {
        is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
    }

    // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
    // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
    if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && window->DC.TreeDepth < g.LogAutoExpandMaxDepth)
        is_open = true;

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
    const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0.0f);

    if (!label_end)
        label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);

    // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
    const float text_base_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it
    const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y*2), label_size.y + padding.y*2);
    ImRect frame_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, ImVec2(window->Pos.x + GetContentRegionMax().x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height));
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding
        frame_bb.Min.x -= (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
        frame_bb.Max.x += (float)(int)(window->WindowPadding.x*0.5f) - 1;
    }

    const float text_offset_x = (g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x*3 : padding.x*2));   // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
    const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x*2 : 0.0f);   // Include collapser
    ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), text_base_offset_y);

    // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
    // (Ideally we'd want to add a flag for the user to specify if we want the hit test to be done up to the right side of the content or not)
    const ImRect interact_bb = display_frame ? frame_bb : ImRect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x*2, frame_bb.Max.y);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(id, flags);

    // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
    // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
    // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
    if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);

    bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
    window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
    window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect = frame_bb;

    if (!item_add)
    {
        if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
            TreePushRawID(id);
        return is_open;
    }

    // Flags that affects opening behavior:
    // - 0(default) ..................... single-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick .............. double-click anywhere to open
    // - OpenOnArrow .................... single-click on arrow to open
    // - OpenOnDoubleClick|OpenOnArrow .. single-click on arrow or double-click anywhere to open
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap : 0);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : 0);

    bool hovered, held, pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
    {
        bool toggled = false;
        if (pressed)
        {
            toggled = !(flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) || (g.NavActivateId == id);
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
                toggled |= IsMouseHoveringRect(interact_bb.Min, ImVec2(interact_bb.Min.x + text_offset_x, interact_bb.Max.y)) && (!g.NavDisableMouseHover);
            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
                toggled |= g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0];
            if (g.DragDropActive && is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
                toggled = false;
        }

        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
        {
            toggled = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }

        if (toggled)
        {
            is_open = !is_open;
            window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
        }
    }
    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
    const ImVec2 text_pos = frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x, text_base_offset_y);
    if (display_frame)
    {
        // Framed type
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
        RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
        {
            // NB: '##' is normally used to hide text (as a library-wide feature), so we need to specify the text range to make sure the ## aren't stripped out here.
            const char log_prefix[] = "\n##";
            const char log_suffix[] = "##";
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_prefix, log_prefix+3);
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, log_suffix+1, log_suffix+3);
        }
        else
        {
            RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Unframed typed for tree nodes
        if (hovered || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected))
        {
            RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, col, false);
            RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
        }

        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
            RenderBullet(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(text_offset_x * 0.5f, g.FontSize*0.50f + text_base_offset_y));
        else if (!(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf))
            RenderArrow(frame_bb.Min + ImVec2(padding.x, g.FontSize*0.15f + text_base_offset_y), is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
        if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(&text_pos, ">");
        RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
    }

    if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
        TreePushRawID(id);
    return is_open;
}

// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
}

bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (p_open && !*p_open)
        return false;

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader | (p_open ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap : 0), label);
    if (p_open)
    {
        // Create a small overlapping close button // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiItemHoveredDataBackup last_item_backup;
        float button_radius = g.FontSize * 0.5f;
        ImVec2 button_center = ImVec2(ImMin(window->DC.LastItemRect.Max.x, window->ClipRect.Max.x) - g.Style.FramePadding.x - button_radius, window->DC.LastItemRect.GetCenter().y);
        if (CloseButton(window->GetID((void*)(intptr_t)(id+1)), button_center, button_radius))
            *p_open = false;
        last_item_backup.Restore();
    }

    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const char* label_end = g.TempBuffer + ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), fmt, args);
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, g.TempBuffer, label_end);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
{
    return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...)
{
    va_list args;
    va_start(args, fmt);
    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
    va_end(args);
    return is_open;
}

bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
}

void ImGui::TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos.x += GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing();
}

// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
}

void ImGui::SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
        return;
    g.NextTreeNodeOpenVal = is_open;
    g.NextTreeNodeOpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
}

void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(str_id));
}

void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(str_id_begin, str_id_end));
}

void ImGui::PushID(const void* ptr_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(ptr_id));
}

void ImGui::PushID(int int_id)
{
    const void* ptr_id = (void*)(intptr_t)int_id;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    window->IDStack.push_back(window->GetIDNoKeepAlive(ptr_id));
}

void ImGui::PopID()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    window->IDStack.pop_back();
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id)
{
    return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
{
    return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end);
}

ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const void* ptr_id)
{
    return GImGui->CurrentWindow->GetID(ptr_id);
}

static inline int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32)   // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)   // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing the argument
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)data_ptr);
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)data_ptr);
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return 0;
}

// FIXME: Adding support for clamping on boundaries of the data type would be nice.
static void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, void* arg1, const void* arg2)
{
    IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
    switch (data_type)
    {
        case ImGuiDataType_S32:
            if (op == '+')      *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 + *(const int*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(int*)output = *(const int*)arg1 - *(const int*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U32:
            if (op == '+')      *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 + *(const ImU32*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(unsigned int*)output = *(const unsigned int*)arg1 - *(const ImU32*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_S64:
            if (op == '+')      *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 + *(const ImS64*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(ImS64*)output = *(const ImS64*)arg1 - *(const ImS64*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_U64:
            if (op == '+')      *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 + *(const ImU64*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(ImU64*)output = *(const ImU64*)arg1 - *(const ImU64*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Float:
            if (op == '+')      *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_Double:
            if (op == '+')      *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2;
            else if (op == '-') *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2;
            return;
        case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
}

struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo
{
    size_t      Size;
    const char* PrintFmt;   // Unused
    const char* ScanFmt;
};

static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
{
    { sizeof(int),          "%d",   "%d"    },
    { sizeof(unsigned int), "%u",   "%u"    },
#ifdef _MSC_VER
    { sizeof(ImS64),        "%I64d","%I64d" },
    { sizeof(ImU64),        "%I64u","%I64u" },
#else
    { sizeof(ImS64),        "%lld", "%lld"  },
    { sizeof(ImU64),        "%llu", "%llu"  },
#endif
    { sizeof(float),        "%f",   "%f"    },  // float are promoted to double in va_arg
    { sizeof(double),       "%f",   "%lf"   },
};
IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);

// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
static bool DataTypeApplyOpFromText(const char* buf, const char* initial_value_buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
        buf++;

    // We don't support '-' op because it would conflict with inputing negative value.
    // Instead you can use +-100 to subtract from an existing value
    char op = buf[0];
    if (op == '+' || op == '*' || op == '/')
    {
        buf++;
        while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
            buf++;
    }
    else
    {
        op = 0;
    }
    if (!buf[0])
        return false;

    // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    int data_backup[2];
    IM_ASSERT(GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size <= sizeof(data_backup));
    memcpy(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size);

    if (format == NULL)
        format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].ScanFmt;

    int arg1i = 0;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32)
    {
        int* v = (int*)data_ptr;
        int arg0i = *v;
        float arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0i) < 1)
            return false;
        // Store operand in a float so we can use fractional value for multipliers (*1.1), but constant always parsed as integer so we can fit big integers (e.g. 2000000003) past float precision
        if (op == '+')      { if (sscanf(buf, "%d", &arg1i)) *v = (int)(arg0i + arg1i); }                   // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f)) *v = (int)(arg0i * arg1f); }                   // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (sscanf(buf, "%f", &arg1f) && arg1f != 0.0f) *v = (int)(arg0i / arg1f); }  // Divide
        else                { if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1i) == 1) *v = arg1i; }                           // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
    {
        // Assign constant
        // FIXME: We don't bother handling support for legacy operators since they are a little too crappy. Instead we may implement a proper expression evaluator in the future.
        sscanf(buf, format, data_ptr);
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
    {
        // For floats we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in
        format = "%f";
        float* v = (float*)data_ptr;
        float arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0f;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
    {
        format = "%lf"; // scanf differentiate float/double unlike printf which forces everything to double because of ellipsis
        double* v = (double*)data_ptr;
        double arg0f = *v, arg1f = 0.0;
        if (op && sscanf(initial_value_buf, format, &arg0f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (sscanf(buf, format, &arg1f) < 1)
            return false;
        if (op == '+')      { *v = arg0f + arg1f; }                    // Add (use "+-" to subtract)
        else if (op == '*') { *v = arg0f * arg1f; }                    // Multiply
        else if (op == '/') { if (arg1f != 0.0f) *v = arg0f / arg1f; } // Divide
        else                { *v = arg1f; }                            // Assign constant
    }
    return memcmp(data_backup, data_ptr, GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size) != 0;
}

// Create text input in place of a slider (when CTRL+Clicking on slider)
// FIXME: Logic is messy and confusing.
bool ImGui::InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const char* format)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    // Our replacement widget will override the focus ID (registered previously to allow for a TAB focus to happen)
    // On the first frame, g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id
    SetActiveID(g.ScalarAsInputTextId, window);
    g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
    SetHoveredID(0);
    FocusableItemUnregister(window);

    char fmt_buf[32];
    char data_buf[32];
    format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
    DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);
    ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);
    ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ((data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
    bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), bb.GetSize(), flags);
    if (g.ScalarAsInputTextId == 0)     // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget
    {
        IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);    // InputText ID expected to match the Slider ID
        g.ScalarAsInputTextId = g.ActiveId;
        SetHoveredID(id);
    }
    if (value_changed)
        return DataTypeApplyOpFromText(data_buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, NULL);
    return false;
}

// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt)
{
    while (char c = fmt[0])
    {
        if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
            return fmt;
        else if (c == '%')
            fmt++;
        fmt++;
    }
    return fmt;
}

const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt)
{
    // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
    const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
    for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
    {
        if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
        if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
            return fmt + 1;
    }
    return fmt;
}

// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
//  fmt = "blah blah"  -> return fmt
//  fmt = "%.3f"       -> return fmt
//  fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
//  fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, int buf_size)
{
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
        return fmt;
    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
    if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
        return fmt_start;
    ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((int)(fmt_end + 1 - fmt_start), buf_size));
    return buf;
}

// Parse display precision back from the display format string
// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, int default_precision)
{
    fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
    if (fmt[0] != '%')
        return default_precision;
    fmt++;
    while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
        fmt++;
    int precision = INT_MAX;
    if (*fmt == '.')
    {
        fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
        if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
            precision = default_precision;
    }
    if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
        precision = -1;
    if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
        precision = -1;
    return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
}

static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
{
    static const float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
    if (decimal_precision < 0)
        return FLT_MIN;
    return (decimal_precision >= 0 && decimal_precision < 10) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
}

template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE>
static inline TYPE RoundScalarWithFormat(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
{
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
    if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
        return v;
    char v_str[64];
    ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
    const char* p = v_str;
    while (*p == ' ')
        p++;
    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
        v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
    else
        ImAtoi(p, (SIGNEDTYPE*)&v);
    return v;
}

template<typename TYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
static inline float SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, float power, float linear_zero_pos)
{
    if (v_min == v_max)
        return 0.0f;

    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
    if (is_power)
    {
        if (v_clamped < 0.0f)
        {
            const float f = 1.0f - (float)((v_clamped - v_min) / (ImMin((TYPE)0, v_max) - v_min));
            return (1.0f - ImPow(f, 1.0f/power)) * linear_zero_pos;
        }
        else
        {
            const float f = (float)((v_clamped - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)) / (v_max - ImMax((TYPE)0, v_min)));
            return linear_zero_pos + ImPow(f, 1.0f/power) * (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
        }
    }

    // Linear slider
    return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
}

// FIXME: Move some of the code into SliderBehavior(). Current responsability is larger than what the equivalent DragBehaviorT<> does, we also do some rendering, etc.
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
static bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const bool is_horizontal = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) == 0;
    const bool is_decimal = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f) && is_decimal;

    const float grab_padding = 2.0f;
    const float slider_sz = is_horizontal ? (bb.GetWidth() - grab_padding * 2.0f) : (bb.GetHeight() - grab_padding * 2.0f);
    float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
    SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
    if (!is_decimal && v_range >= 0)                                             // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
        grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize);  // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
    grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
    const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
    const float slider_usable_pos_min = (is_horizontal ? bb.Min.x : bb.Min.y) + grab_padding + grab_sz*0.5f;
    const float slider_usable_pos_max = (is_horizontal ? bb.Max.x : bb.Max.y) - grab_padding - grab_sz*0.5f;

    // For power curve sliders that cross over sign boundary we want the curve to be symmetric around 0.0f
    float linear_zero_pos;   // 0.0->1.0f
    if (is_power && v_min * v_max < 0.0f)
    {
        // Different sign
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_min_to_0 = ImPow(v_min >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_min : -(FLOATTYPE)v_min, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
        const FLOATTYPE linear_dist_max_to_0 = ImPow(v_max >= 0 ? (FLOATTYPE)v_max : -(FLOATTYPE)v_max, (FLOATTYPE)1.0f/power);
        linear_zero_pos = (float)(linear_dist_min_to_0 / (linear_dist_min_to_0 + linear_dist_max_to_0));
    }
    else
    {
        // Same sign
        linear_zero_pos = v_min < 0.0f ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
    }

    // Process interacting with the slider
    bool value_changed = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        bool set_new_value = false;
        float clicked_t = 0.0f;
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
        {
            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else
            {
                const float mouse_abs_pos = is_horizontal ? g.IO.MousePos.x : g.IO.MousePos.y;
                clicked_t = (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) ? ImClamp((mouse_abs_pos - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz, 0.0f, 1.0f) : 0.0f;
                if (!is_horizontal)
                    clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
                set_new_value = true;
            }
        }
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
        {
            const ImVec2 delta2 = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard | ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 0.0f, 0.0f);
            float delta = is_horizontal ? delta2.x : -delta2.y;
            if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            {
                ClearActiveID();
            }
            else if (delta != 0.0f)
            {
                clicked_t = SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
                const int decimal_precision = is_decimal ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
                if ((decimal_precision > 0) || is_power)
                {
                    delta /= 100.0f;    // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
                    if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta /= 10.0f;
                }
                else
                {
                    if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow))
                        delta = ((delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
                    else
                        delta /= 100.0f;
                }
                if (IsNavInputDown(ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast))
                    delta *= 10.0f;
                set_new_value = true;
                if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
                    set_new_value = false;
                else
                    clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
            }
        }

        if (set_new_value)
        {
            TYPE v_new;
            if (is_power)
            {
                // Account for power curve scale on both sides of the zero
                if (clicked_t < linear_zero_pos)
                {
                    // Negative: rescale to the negative range before powering
                    float a = 1.0f - (clicked_t / linear_zero_pos);
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMin(v_max, (TYPE)0), v_min, a);
                }
                else
                {
                    // Positive: rescale to the positive range before powering
                    float a;
                    if (ImFabs(linear_zero_pos - 1.0f) > 1.e-6f)
                        a = (clicked_t - linear_zero_pos) / (1.0f - linear_zero_pos);
                    else
                        a = clicked_t;
                    a = ImPow(a, power);
                    v_new = ImLerp(ImMax(v_min, (TYPE)0), v_max, a);
                }
            }
            else
            {
                // Linear slider
                if (is_decimal)
                {
                    v_new = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, clicked_t);
                }
                else
                {
                    // For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
                    // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
                    FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (v_max - v_min) * clicked_t;
                    TYPE v_new_off_floor = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f);
                    TYPE v_new_off_round = (TYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)0.5);
                    if (!is_decimal && v_new_off_floor < v_new_off_round)
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_round;
                    else
                        v_new = v_min + v_new_off_floor;
                }
            }

            // Round to user desired precision based on format string
            v_new = RoundScalarWithFormat<TYPE,SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);

            // Apply result
            if (*v != v_new)
            {
                *v = v_new;
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
    }

    // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
    float grab_t = SliderBehaviorCalcRatioFromValue<TYPE,FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, power, linear_zero_pos);
    if (!is_horizontal)
        grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
    const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
    if (is_horizontal)
        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
    else
        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz*0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz*0.5f);

    return value_changed;
}

// For 32-bits and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
{
    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)v_min >= IM_S32_MIN/2 && *(const ImS32*)v_max <= IM_S32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)v,  *(const ImS32*)v_min,  *(const ImS32*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)v_min <= IM_U32_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)v,  *(const ImU32*)v_min,  *(const ImU32*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)v_min >= IM_S64_MIN/2 && *(const ImS64*)v_max <= IM_S64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)v,  *(const ImS64*)v_min,  *(const ImS64*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)v_min <= IM_U64_MAX/2);
        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)v,  *(const ImU64*)v_min,  *(const ImU64*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)v_min >= -FLT_MAX/2.0f && *(const float*)v_max <= FLT_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)v,  *(const float*)v_min,  *(const float*)v_max,  format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
        IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)v_min >= -DBL_MAX/2.0f && *(const double*)v_max <= DBL_MAX/2.0f);
        return SliderBehaviorT<double,double,double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)v, *(const double*)v_min, *(const double*)v_max, format, power, flags, out_grab_bb);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
static const char* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(const char* fmt)
{
    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
        return "%d";
    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);    // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);  // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
    if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
    {
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
        if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
            return "%d";
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImFormatString(g.TempBuffer, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.TempBuffer), "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
        return g.TempBuffer;
#else
        IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
#endif
    }
    return fmt;
}

bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    // NB- we don't call ItemSize() yet because we may turn into a text edit box below
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
    {
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        return false;
    }

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    if (format == NULL)
        format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
    bool start_text_input = false;
    const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
    {
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
        if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            start_text_input = true;
            g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
        }
    }
    if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
        return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);

    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_None, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
        return false;

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    if (format == NULL)
        format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavInputId == id)
    {
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
    }


    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    // Slider behavior
    ImRect grab_bb;
    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power, ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render grab
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max)
{
    float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2*IM_PI);
    bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, "%.0f deg", 1.0f);
    *v_rad = v_deg * (2*IM_PI) / 360.0f;
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        value_changed |= SliderScalar("##v", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, power);
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
static bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Default tweak speed
    bool has_min_max = (v_min != v_max) && (v_max - v_max < FLT_MAX);
    if (v_speed == 0.0f && has_min_max)
        v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);

    // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
    float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[0] > 1.0f*1.0f)
    {
        adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta.x;
        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
            adjust_delta *= 1.0f/100.0f;
        if (g.IO.KeyShift)
            adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
    }
    else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
    {
        int decimal_precision = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
        adjust_delta = GetNavInputAmount2d(ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_Keyboard|ImGuiNavDirSourceFlags_PadDPad, ImGuiInputReadMode_RepeatFast, 1.0f/10.0f, 10.0f).x;
        v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
    }
    adjust_delta *= v_speed;

    // Clear current value on activation
    // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
    bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
    bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = has_min_max && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
    if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    }
    else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
    }

    if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
        return false;

    TYPE v_cur = *v;
    FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;

    const bool is_power = (power != 1.0f && (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) && has_min_max);
    if (is_power)
    {
        // Offset + round to user desired precision, with a curve on the v_min..v_max range to get more precision on one side of the range
        FLOATTYPE v_old_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        FLOATTYPE v_new_norm_curved = v_old_norm_curved + (g.DragCurrentAccum / (v_max - v_min));
        v_cur = v_min + (TYPE)ImPow(ImSaturate((float)v_new_norm_curved), power) * (v_max - v_min);
        v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_norm_curved;
    }
    else
    {
        v_cur += (TYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
    }

    // Round to user desired precision based on format string
    v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormat<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);

    // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
    g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
    if (is_power)
    {
        FLOATTYPE v_cur_norm_curved = ImPow((FLOATTYPE)(v_cur - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(v_max - v_min), (FLOATTYPE)1.0f / power);
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_cur_norm_curved - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
    }
    else
    {
        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
    }

    // Lose zero sign for float/double
    if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
        v_cur = (TYPE)0;

    // Clamp values (handle overflow/wrap-around)
    if (*v != v_cur && has_min_max)
    {
        if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f))
            v_cur = v_min;
        if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f))
            v_cur = v_max;
    }

    // Apply result
    if (*v == v_cur)
        return false;
    *v = v_cur;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
            ClearActiveID();
        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
            ClearActiveID();
    }
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        return false;

    switch (data_type)
    {
    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS32* )v_min : IM_S32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS32* )v_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU32* )v_min : IM_U32_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU32* )v_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImS64* )v_min : IM_S64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImS64* )v_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const ImU64* )v_min : IM_U64_MIN, v_max ? *(const ImU64* )v_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)v,  v_speed, v_min ? *(const float* )v_min : -FLT_MAX,   v_max ? *(const float* )v_max : FLT_MAX,    format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)v, v_speed, v_min ? *(const double*)v_min : -DBL_MAX,   v_max ? *(const double*)v_max : DBL_MAX,    format, power);
    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
    }
    IM_ASSERT(0);
    return false;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    if (power != 1.0f)
        IM_ASSERT(v_min != NULL && v_max != NULL); // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const float w = CalcItemWidth();

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    // NB- we don't call ItemSize() yet because we may turn into a text edit box below
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
    {
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        return false;
    }
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);

    // Default format string when passing NULL
    // Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function comments for more details.
    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    if (format == NULL)
        format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;
    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0)
        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);

    // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an input box
    bool start_text_input = false;
    const bool tab_focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id);
    if (tab_focus_requested || (hovered && (g.IO.MouseClicked[0] || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0])) || g.NavActivateId == id || (g.NavInputId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId != id))
    {
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags = (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
        if (tab_focus_requested || g.IO.KeyCtrl || g.IO.MouseDoubleClicked[0] || g.NavInputId == id)
        {
            start_text_input = true;
            g.ScalarAsInputTextId = 0;
        }
    }
    if (start_text_input || (g.ActiveId == id && g.ScalarAsInputTextId == id))
        return InputScalarAsWidgetReplacement(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, v, format);

    // Actual drag behavior
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Draw frame
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);

    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
    char value_buf[64];
    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, v, format);
    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, float v_speed, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        value_changed |= DragScalar("##v", data_type, v, v_speed, v_min, v_max, format, power);
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power);
}

bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, float power)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2);

    bool value_changed = DragFloat("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragFloat("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format, power);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();
    return value_changed;
}

// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format)
{
    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format);
}

bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();
    PushMultiItemsWidths(2);

    bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max), format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min), (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max, format_max ? format_max : format);
    PopItemWidth();
    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

    TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

void ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    if (graph_size.x == 0.0f)
        graph_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
    if (graph_size.y == 0.0f)
        graph_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);

    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(graph_size.x, graph_size.y));
    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
        return;
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(inner_bb, 0);

    // Determine scale from values if not specified
    if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
    {
        float v_min = FLT_MAX;
        float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
        for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
        {
            const float v = values_getter(data, i);
            v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
            v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
        }
        if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
            scale_min = v_min;
        if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
            scale_max = v_max;
    }

    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);

    if (values_count > 0)
    {
        int res_w = ImMin((int)graph_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
        int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);

        // Tooltip on hover
        int v_hovered = -1;
        if (hovered)
        {
            const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
            const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
            IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);

            const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx+1, v1);
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
            v_hovered = v_idx;
        }

        const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
        const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));

        float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
        float t0 = 0.0f;
        ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );                       // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
        float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (-scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f);   // Where does the zero line stands

        const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
        const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);

        for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
        {
            const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
            const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
            IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
            const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );

            // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
            ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
            ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
            {
                window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }
            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
            {
                if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
                    pos1.x -= 1.0f;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, v_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
            }

            t0 = t1;
            tp0 = tp1;
        }
    }

    // Text overlay
    if (overlay_text)
        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f,0.0f));

    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
}

struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
{
    const float* Values;
    int Stride;

    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
};

static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
    const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
    return v;
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
{
    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
{
    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
}

static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end)
{
    int line_count = 0;
    const char* s = text_begin;
    while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
        if (c == '\n')
            line_count++;
    s--;
    if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
        line_count++;
    *out_text_end = s;
    return line_count;
}

static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line)
{
    ImFont* font = GImGui->Font;
    const float line_height = GImGui->FontSize;
    const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;

    ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0,0);
    float line_width = 0.0f;

    const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
    while (s < text_end)
    {
        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
        if (c == '\n')
        {
            text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
            text_size.y += line_height;
            line_width = 0.0f;
            if (stop_on_new_line)
                break;
            continue;
        }
        if (c == '\r')
            continue;

        const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((unsigned short)c) * scale;
        line_width += char_width;
    }

    if (text_size.x < line_width)
        text_size.x = line_width;

    if (out_offset)
        *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height);  // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n

    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f)                        // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
        text_size.y += line_height;

    if (remaining)
        *remaining = s;

    return text_size;
}

// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
namespace ImGuiStb
{

static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj)                             { return obj->CurLenW; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)                      { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
static float   STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx)  { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx+char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; return GImGui->Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (GImGui->FontSize / GImGui->Font->FontSize); }
static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key)                                                    { return key >= 0x10000 ? 0 : key; }
static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
static void    STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int line_start_idx)
{
    const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
    const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
    r->x0 = 0.0f;
    r->x1 = size.x;
    r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
    r->ymin = 0.0f;
    r->ymax = size.y;
    r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
}

static bool is_separator(unsigned int c)                                        { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|'; }
static int  is_word_boundary_from_right(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)      { return idx > 0 ? (is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && !is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)   { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
#ifdef __APPLE__    // FIXME: Move setting to IO structure
static int  is_word_boundary_from_left(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)       { return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator( obj->TextW[idx-1] ) && is_separator( obj->TextW[idx] ) ) : 1; }
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#else
static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int idx)  { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
#endif
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT   STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL    // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL

static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, int n)
{
    ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;

    // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
    obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
    obj->CurLenW -= n;

    // Offset remaining text
    const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
    while (ImWchar c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';
}

static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len)
{
    const bool is_resizable = (obj->UserFlags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
    IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);

    const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
    if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
        return false;

    // Grow internal buffer if needed
    if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return false;
        IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
        obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
    }

    ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
    if (pos != text_len)
        memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
    memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));

    obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
    obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
    obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';

    return true;
}

// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT         0x10000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT        0x10001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP           0x10002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN         0x10003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART    0x10004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND      0x10005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART    0x10006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND      0x10007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE       0x10008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE    0x10009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO         0x1000A // keyboard input to perform undo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO         0x1000B // keyboard input to perform redo
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT     0x1000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT    0x1000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT        0x20000

#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
#include "stb_textedit.h"

}

void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
{
    stb_textedit_key(this, &StbState, key);
    CursorFollow = true;
    CursorAnimReset();
}

ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
{
    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
}

// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
{
    IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
    char* dst = Buf + pos;
    const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
    while (char c = *src++)
        *dst++ = c;
    *dst = '\0';

    if (CursorPos + bytes_count >= pos)
        CursorPos -= bytes_count;
    else if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos = pos;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
}

void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end)
{
    const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
    if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize)
    {
        if (!is_resizable)
            return;

        // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the midly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer alltogether!)
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
        IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
        IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TempBuffer.Data);
        int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
        edit_state->TempBuffer.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
        Buf = edit_state->TempBuffer.Data;
        BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
    }

    if (BufTextLen != pos)
        memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
    memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
    Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';

    if (CursorPos >= pos)
        CursorPos += new_text_len;
    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
    BufDirty = true;
    BufTextLen += new_text_len;
}

// Return false to discard a character.
static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    unsigned int c = *p_char;

    if (c < 128 && c != ' ' && !isprint((int)(c & 0xFF)))
    {
        bool pass = false;
        pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline));
        pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
        if (!pass)
            return false;
    }

    if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF) // Filter private Unicode range. I don't imagine anybody would want to input them. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys.
        return false;

    if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != '.') && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
                return false;

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
            if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
                *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A'-'a'));

        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
            if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
                return false;
    }

    if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
    {
        ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
        memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
        callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
        callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
        callback_data.Flags = flags;
        callback_data.UserData = user_data;
        if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
            return false;
        *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
        if (!callback_data.EventChar)
            return false;
    }

    return true;
}

// Edit a string of text
// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
//   This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match 
//   Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/stl/imgui_stl.h
// (FIXME: Rather messy function partly because we are doing UTF8 > u16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to more easily handle stb_textedit calls. Ideally we should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)));        // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
    const bool is_editable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) == 0;
    const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
    const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
    const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
    if (is_resizable)
        IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!

    if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope, 
        BeginGroup();
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? GetTextLineHeight() * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x) : 0.0f, 0.0f));

    ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
    if (is_multiline)
    {
        ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb);
        if (!BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()))
        {
            EndChildFrame();
            EndGroup();
            return false;
        }
        draw_window = GetCurrentWindow();
        draw_window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext |= draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask; // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight
        size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
    }
    else
    {
        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
            return false;
    }
    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
    if (hovered)
        g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;

    // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
    if (is_password)
    {
        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
        ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
        password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
        password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
        password_font->DisplayOffset = g.Font->DisplayOffset;
        password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
        password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
        password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
        password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
        password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
        IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
        PushFont(password_font);
    }

    // NB: we are only allowed to access 'edit_state' if we are the active widget.
    ImGuiInputTextState& edit_state = g.InputTextState;

    const bool focus_requested = FocusableItemRegister(window, id, (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion|ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) == 0);    // Using completion callback disable keyboard tabbing
    const bool focus_requested_by_code = focus_requested && (window->FocusIdxAllCounter == window->FocusIdxAllRequestCurrent);
    const bool focus_requested_by_tab = focus_requested && !focus_requested_by_code;

    const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
    const bool user_scrolled = is_multiline && g.ActiveId == 0 && edit_state.ID == id && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY");
    const bool user_nav_input_start = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_NavKeyboard));

    bool clear_active_id = false;

    bool select_all = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) != 0 || user_nav_input_start) && (!is_multiline);
    if (focus_requested || user_clicked || user_scrolled || user_nav_input_start)
    {
        if (g.ActiveId != id)
        {
            // Start edition
            // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
            // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
            const int prev_len_w = edit_state.CurLenW;
            const int init_buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
            edit_state.TextW.resize(buf_size+1);             // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
            edit_state.InitialText.resize(init_buf_len + 1); // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data isn't NULL so it doesn't crash.
            memcpy(edit_state.InitialText.Data, buf, init_buf_len + 1);
            const char* buf_end = NULL;
            edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
            edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf); // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.
            edit_state.CursorAnimReset();

            // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
            // FIXME: We should probably compare the whole buffer to be on the safety side. Comparing buf (utf8) and edit_state.Text (wchar).
            const bool recycle_state = (edit_state.ID == id) && (prev_len_w == edit_state.CurLenW);
            if (recycle_state)
            {
                // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
                // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
                edit_state.CursorClamp();
            }
            else
            {
                edit_state.ID = id;
                edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
                stb_textedit_initialize_state(&edit_state.StbState, !is_multiline);
                if (!is_multiline && focus_requested_by_code)
                    select_all = true;
            }
            if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode)
                edit_state.StbState.insert_mode = true;
            if (!is_multiline && (focus_requested_by_tab || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)))
                select_all = true;
        }
        SetActiveID(id, window);
        SetFocusID(id, window);
        FocusWindow(window);
        if (!is_multiline && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
            g.ActiveIdAllowNavDirFlags |= ((1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down));
    }
    else if (io.MouseClicked[0])
    {
        // Release focus when we click outside
        clear_active_id = true;
    }

    bool value_changed = false;
    bool enter_pressed = false;
    int backup_current_text_length = 0;

    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        if (!is_editable && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
        {
            // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
            edit_state.TextW.resize(buf_size+1);
            const char* buf_end = NULL;
            edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, edit_state.TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
            edit_state.CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
            edit_state.CursorClamp();
        }

        backup_current_text_length = edit_state.CurLenA;
        edit_state.BufCapacityA = buf_size;
        edit_state.UserFlags = flags;
        edit_state.UserCallback = callback;
        edit_state.UserCallbackData = callback_user_data;

        // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
        // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
        g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;

        // Edit in progress
        const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + edit_state.ScrollX;
        const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y - style.FramePadding.y) : (g.FontSize*0.5f));

        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        if (select_all || (hovered && !is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]))
        {
            edit_state.SelectAll();
            edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
        }
        else if (hovered && is_osx && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0])
        {
            // Double-click select a word only, OS X style (by simulating keystrokes)
            edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
            edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
        }
        else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock)
        {
            if (hovered)
            {
                stb_textedit_click(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
                edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
            }
        }
        else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
        {
            stb_textedit_drag(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, mouse_x, mouse_y);
            edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
            edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
        }
        if (edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
            edit_state.SelectedAllMouseLock = false;

        if (io.InputCharacters[0])
        {
            // Process text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
            // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
            bool ignore_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
            if (!ignore_inputs && is_editable && !user_nav_input_start)
                for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.InputCharacters) && io.InputCharacters[n]; n++)
                {
                    // Insert character if they pass filtering
                    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputCharacters[n];
                    if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
                }

            // Consume characters
            memset(g.IO.InputCharacters, 0, sizeof(g.IO.InputCharacters));
        }
    }

    bool cancel_edit = false;
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
    {
        // Handle key-presses
        const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
        const bool is_shortcut_key = (is_osx ? (io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl) : (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeySuper)) && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyShift; // OS X style: Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl
        const bool is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && io.KeySuper && io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;
        const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl;                     // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
        const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;  // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
        const bool is_ctrl_key_only = io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;
        const bool is_shift_key_only = io.KeyShift && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeySuper;

        const bool is_cut   = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && is_editable && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
        const bool is_copy  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only  && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || edit_state.HasSelection());
        const bool is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && is_editable;
        const bool is_undo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z)) && is_editable && is_undoable);
        const bool is_redo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Z))) && is_editable && is_undoable;

        if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow))                        { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_RightArrow))                  { edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline)     { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline)   { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetWindowScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else edit_state.OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Home))                        { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_End))                         { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Delete) && is_editable)       { edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && is_editable)
        {
            if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
            {
                if (is_wordmove_key_down) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
                else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl) edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
            }
            edit_state.OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Enter))
        {
            bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
            if (!is_multiline || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
            {
                enter_pressed = clear_active_id = true;
            }
            else if (is_editable)
            {
                unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                    edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
            }
        }
        else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyShift && !io.KeyAlt && is_editable)
        {
            unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
            if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                edit_state.OnKeyPressed((int)c);
        }
        else if (IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Escape))
        {
            clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
        }
        else if (is_undo || is_redo)
        {
            edit_state.OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
            edit_state.ClearSelection();
        }
        else if (is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_A))
        {
            edit_state.SelectAll();
            edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
        }
        else if (is_cut || is_copy)
        {
            // Cut, Copy
            if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
            {
                const int ib = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : 0;
                const int ie = edit_state.HasSelection() ? ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end) : edit_state.CurLenW;
                edit_state.TempBuffer.resize((ie-ib) * 4 + 1);
                ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempBuffer.Size, edit_state.TextW.Data+ib, edit_state.TextW.Data+ie);
                SetClipboardText(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data);
            }
            if (is_cut)
            {
                if (!edit_state.HasSelection())
                    edit_state.SelectAll();
                edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
                stb_textedit_cut(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState);
            }
        }
        else if (is_paste)
        {
            if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
            {
                // Filter pasted buffer
                const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
                ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)ImGui::MemAlloc((clipboard_len+1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
                int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
                for (const char* s = clipboard; *s; )
                {
                    unsigned int c;
                    s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
                    if (c == 0)
                        break;
                    if (c >= 0x10000 || !InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data))
                        continue;
                    clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
                }
                clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
                if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
                {
                    stb_textedit_paste(&edit_state, &edit_state.StbState, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
                    edit_state.CursorFollow = true;
                }
                ImGui::MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
            }
        }
    }

    if (g.ActiveId == id)
    {
        const char* apply_new_text = NULL;
        int apply_new_text_length = 0;
        if (cancel_edit)
        {
            // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
            if (is_editable && strcmp(buf, edit_state.InitialText.Data) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = edit_state.InitialText.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = edit_state.InitialText.Size - 1;
            }
        }

        // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
        // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. Also this allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage.
        bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (enter_pressed && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
        if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
        {
            // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
            // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
            // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
            // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
            if (is_editable)
            {
                edit_state.TempBuffer.resize(edit_state.TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
                ImTextStrToUtf8(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, edit_state.TempBuffer.Size, edit_state.TextW.Data, NULL);
            }

            // User callback
            if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
            {
                IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);

                // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
                ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
                ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_COUNT;
                if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_Tab))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
                }
                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
                {
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
                    event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
                }
                else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;

                if (event_flag)
                {
                    ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                    memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
                    callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
                    callback_data.Flags = flags;
                    callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;

                    callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
                    callback_data.Buf = edit_state.TempBuffer.Data;
                    callback_data.BufTextLen = edit_state.CurLenA;
                    callback_data.BufSize = edit_state.BufCapacityA;
                    callback_data.BufDirty = false;

                    // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
                    ImWchar* text = edit_state.TextW.Data;
                    const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.cursor);
                    const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_start);
                    const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + edit_state.StbState.select_end);

                    // Call user code
                    callback(&callback_data);

                    // Read back what user may have modified
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == edit_state.TempBuffer.Data);  // Invalid to modify those fields
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == edit_state.BufCapacityA);
                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
                    if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos)            { edit_state.StbState.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); edit_state.CursorFollow = true; }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start)  { edit_state.StbState.select_start = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); }
                    if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end)      { edit_state.StbState.select_end = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); }
                    if (callback_data.BufDirty)
                    {
                        IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
                        if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
                            edit_state.TextW.resize(edit_state.TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length));
                        edit_state.CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(edit_state.TextW.Data, edit_state.TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
                        edit_state.CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen;  // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
                        edit_state.CursorAnimReset();
                    }
                }
            }

            // Will copy result string if modified
            if (is_editable && strcmp(edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, buf) != 0)
            {
                apply_new_text = edit_state.TempBuffer.Data;
                apply_new_text_length = edit_state.CurLenA;
            }
        }

        // Copy result to user buffer
        if (apply_new_text)
        {
            IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
            if (backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length && is_resizable)
            {
                ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
                callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
                callback_data.Flags = flags;
                callback_data.Buf = buf;
                callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
                callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
                callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
                callback(&callback_data);
                buf = callback_data.Buf;
                buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
                apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
                IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
            }

            // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
            ImStrncpy(buf, edit_state.TempBuffer.Data, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
            value_changed = true;
        }

        // Clear temporary user storage
        edit_state.UserFlags = 0;
        edit_state.UserCallback = NULL;
        edit_state.UserCallbackData = NULL;
    }

    // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
    if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
        ClearActiveID();

    // Render
    // Select which buffer we are going to display. When ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoLiveEdit is set 'buf' might still be the old value. We set buf to NULL to prevent accidental usage from now on.
    const char* buf_display = (g.ActiveId == id && is_editable) ? edit_state.TempBuffer.Data : buf; buf = NULL;

    // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
    // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
    // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
    const int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;

    if (!is_multiline)
    {
        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
    }

    const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
    ImVec2 render_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
    ImVec2 text_size(0.f, 0.f);
    const bool is_currently_scrolling = (edit_state.ID == id && is_multiline && g.ActiveId == draw_window->GetIDNoKeepAlive("#SCROLLY"));
    if (g.ActiveId == id || is_currently_scrolling)
    {
        edit_state.CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;

        // This is going to be messy. We need to:
        // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
        // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
        // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
        // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
        // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
        const ImWchar* text_begin = edit_state.TextW.Data;
        ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;

        {
            // Count lines + find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' and 'select_start' position.
            const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2];
            searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + edit_state.StbState.cursor;
            searches_input_ptr[1] = NULL;
            int searches_remaining = 1;
            int searches_result_line_number[2] = { -1, -999 };
            if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
            {
                searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
                searches_result_line_number[1] = -1;
                searches_remaining++;
            }

            // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
            // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
            searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
            int line_count = 0;
            for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
                if (*s == '\n')
                {
                    line_count++;
                    if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                    if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
                }
            line_count++;
            if (searches_result_line_number[0] == -1) searches_result_line_number[0] = line_count;
            if (searches_result_line_number[1] == -1) searches_result_line_number[1] = line_count;

            // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
            cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
            cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[0] * g.FontSize;
            if (searches_result_line_number[1] >= 0)
            {
                select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
                select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_number[1] * g.FontSize;
            }

            // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
            if (is_multiline)
                text_size = ImVec2(size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
        }

        // Scroll
        if (edit_state.CursorFollow)
        {
            // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
            if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
            {
                const float scroll_increment_x = size.x * 0.25f;
                if (cursor_offset.x < edit_state.ScrollX)
                    edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x);
                else if (cursor_offset.x - size.x >= edit_state.ScrollX)
                    edit_state.ScrollX = (float)(int)(cursor_offset.x - size.x + scroll_increment_x);
            }
            else
            {
                edit_state.ScrollX = 0.0f;
            }

            // Vertical scroll
            if (is_multiline)
            {
                float scroll_y = draw_window->Scroll.y;
                if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
                else if (cursor_offset.y - size.y >= scroll_y)
                    scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - size.y;
                draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y);   // To avoid a frame of lag
                draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
                render_pos.y = draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y;
            }
        }
        edit_state.CursorFollow = false;
        const ImVec2 render_scroll = ImVec2(edit_state.ScrollX, 0.0f);

        // Draw selection
        if (edit_state.StbState.select_start != edit_state.StbState.select_end)
        {
            const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);
            const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(edit_state.StbState.select_start, edit_state.StbState.select_end);

            float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f;    // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
            float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
            ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg);
            ImVec2 rect_pos = render_pos + select_start_offset - render_scroll;
            for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
            {
                if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
                    break;
                if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
                {
                    while (p < text_selected_end)
                        if (*p++ == '\n')
                            break;
                }
                else
                {
                    ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
                    if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = (float)(int)(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((unsigned short)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
                    ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos +ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
                    rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
                    if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
                        draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
                }
                rect_pos.x = render_pos.x - render_scroll.x;
                rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
            }
        }

        const int buf_display_len = edit_state.CurLenA;
        if (is_multiline || buf_display_len < buf_display_max_length)
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos - render_scroll, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_display + buf_display_len, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);

        // Draw blinking cursor
        bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigCursorBlink) || (g.InputTextState.CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(g.InputTextState.CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
        ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = render_pos + cursor_offset - render_scroll;
        ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y-g.FontSize+0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x+1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y-1.5f);
        if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
            draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));

        // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
        if (is_editable)
            g.PlatformImePos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
    }
    else
    {
        // Render text only
        const char* buf_end = NULL;
        if (is_multiline)
            text_size = ImVec2(size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
        else
            buf_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);
        if (is_multiline || (buf_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, render_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), buf_display, buf_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
    }

    if (is_multiline)
    {
        Dummy(text_size + ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); // Always add room to scroll an extra line
        EndChildFrame();
        EndGroup();
    }

    if (is_password)
        PopFont();

    // Log as text
    if (g.LogEnabled && !is_password)
        LogRenderedText(&render_pos, buf_display, NULL);

    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
        return enter_pressed;
    else
        return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
    return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0,0), flags, callback, user_data);
}

bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
{
    return InputTextEx(label, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
}

// NB: format here must be a simple "%xx" format string with no prefix/suffix (unlike the Drag/Slider functions "format" argument)
bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* data_ptr, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
    if (format == NULL)
        format = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].PrintFmt;

    char buf[64];
    DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, data_ptr, format);

    bool value_changed = false;
    if ((extra_flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
        extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
    extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll;

    if (step != NULL)
    {
        const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();

        BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
        PushID(label);
        PushItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
        if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), extra_flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
        PopItemWidth();

        // Step buttons
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups))
        {
            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', data_ptr, data_ptr, g.IO.KeyCtrl && step_fast ? step_fast : step);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));

        PopID();
        EndGroup();
    }
    else
    {
        if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), extra_flags))
            value_changed = DataTypeApplyOpFromText(buf, g.InputTextState.InitialText.Data, data_type, data_ptr, format);
    }

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    extra_flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
    const char* format = (extra_flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step>0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast>0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* step, const void* step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);
    PushMultiItemsWidths(components);
    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
    {
        PushID(i);
        value_changed |= InputScalar("##v", data_type, v, step, step_fast, format, extra_flags);
        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        PopID();
        PopItemWidth();
        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
    }
    PopID();

    TextUnformatted(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
    EndGroup();
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}

// Prefer using "const char* format" directly, which is more flexible and consistent with other API.
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputFloat(label, v, step, step_fast, format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], int decimal_precision, ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    char format[16] = "%f";
    if (decimal_precision >= 0)
        ImFormatString(format, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format), "%%.%df", decimal_precision);
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, extra_flags);
}
#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS

bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
}

bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags extra_flags)
{
    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", extra_flags);
}

static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (items_count <= 0)
        return FLT_MAX;
    return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
}

bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
{
    // Always consume the SetNextWindowSizeConstraint() call in our early return paths
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiCond backup_next_window_size_constraint = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond;
    g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = 0;

    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together

    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y*2.0f));
    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(frame_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
    bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(id);

    const ImRect value_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max - ImVec2(arrow_size, 0.0f));
    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(frame_bb.Min, ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_Left);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size, frame_bb.Min.y), frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button), style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawCornerFlags_All : ImDrawCornerFlags_Right);
        RenderArrow(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x - arrow_size + style.FramePadding.y, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), ImGuiDir_Down);
    }
    RenderFrameBorder(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
    if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
        RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, preview_value, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    if ((pressed || g.NavActivateId == id) && !popup_open)
    {
        if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == 0)
            window->NavLastIds[0] = id;
        OpenPopupEx(id);
        popup_open = true;
    }

    if (!popup_open)
        return false;

    if (backup_next_window_size_constraint)
    {
        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond = backup_next_window_size_constraint;
        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
    }
    else
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
            flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_));    // Only one
        int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
        if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular)     popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall)  popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge)  popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
    }

    char name[16];
    ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.CurrentPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth

    // Peak into expected window size so we can position it
    if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
        if (popup_window->WasActive)
        {
            ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowExpectedSize(popup_window);
            if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft)
                popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_Left;
            ImRect r_outer = GetWindowAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
            ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(frame_bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, frame_bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
            SetNextWindowPos(pos);
        }

    // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y));
    bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
    PopStyleVar();
    if (!ret)
    {
        EndPopup();
        IM_ASSERT(0);   // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
        return false;
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndCombo()
{
    EndPopup();
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
{
    const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = items[idx];
    return true;
}

// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
{
    // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
    const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
    int items_count = 0;
    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
    while (*p)
    {
        if (idx == items_count)
            break;
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    if (!*p)
        return false;
    if (out_text)
        *out_text = p;
    return true;
}

// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
    const char* preview_value = NULL;
    if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
        items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);

    // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
    if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintCond)
        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));

    if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
        return false;

    // Display items
    // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
    bool value_changed = false;
    for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
    {
        PushID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
        const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
        const char* item_text;
        if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
            item_text = "*Unknown item*";
        if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
        {
            value_changed = true;
            *current_item = i;
        }
        if (item_selected)
            SetItemDefaultFocus();
        PopID();
    }

    EndCombo();
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0" 
bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
{
    int items_count = 0;
    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;       // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
    while (*p)
    {
        p += strlen(p) + 1;
        items_count++;
    }
    bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
    return value_changed;
}

// Tip: pass an empty label (e.g. "##dummy") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet) // FIXME-OPT: Avoid if vertically clipped.
        PopClipRect();

    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
    ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    pos.y += window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
    ImRect bb_inner(pos, pos + size);
    ItemSize(bb_inner);

    // Fill horizontal space.
    ImVec2 window_padding = window->WindowPadding;
    float max_x = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? GetWindowContentRegionMax().x : GetContentRegionMax().x;
    float w_draw = ImMax(label_size.x, window->Pos.x + max_x - window_padding.x - window->DC.CursorPos.x);
    ImVec2 size_draw((size_arg.x != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth)) ? size_arg.x : w_draw, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : size.y);
    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size_draw);
    if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth))
        bb.Max.x += window_padding.x;

    // Selectables are tightly packed together, we extend the box to cover spacing between selectable.
    float spacing_L = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
    float spacing_U = (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.5f);
    float spacing_R = style.ItemSpacing.x - spacing_L;
    float spacing_D = style.ItemSpacing.y - spacing_U;
    bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
    bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
    bb.Max.x += spacing_R;
    bb.Max.y += spacing_D;
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) ? 0 : id))
    {
        if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
            PushColumnClipRect();
        return false;
    }

    // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveID;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled;
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled)
        selected = false;

    // Hovering selectable with mouse updates NavId accordingly so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard (this doesn't happen on most widgets)
    if (pressed || hovered)
        if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
        {
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
            SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
        }
    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    // Render
    if (hovered || selected)
    {
        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
        RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
        RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
    }

    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) && window->DC.ColumnsSet)
    {
        PushColumnClipRect();
        bb.Max.x -= (GetContentRegionMax().x - max_x);
    }

    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
    RenderTextClipped(bb_inner.Min, bb.Max, label, NULL, &label_size, ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f));
    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) PopStyleColor();

    // Automatically close popups
    if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(window->DC.ItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
        CloseCurrentPopup();
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
    {
        *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

// FIXME: Rename to BeginListBox()
// Helper to calculate the size of a listbox and display a label on the right.
// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, PushItemWidth(-1) and pass an empty label "##empty"
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();
    const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.4f + style.ItemSpacing.y);
    ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
    ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
    ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
    window->DC.LastItemRect = bb; // Forward storage for ListBoxFooter.. dodgy.

    BeginGroup();
    if (label_size.x > 0)
        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);

    BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
    return true;
}

// FIXME: Rename to BeginListBox()
bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    // Size default to hold ~7 items. Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
    // We don't add +0.40f if items_count <= height_in_items. It is slightly dodgy, because it means a dynamic list of items will make the widget resize occasionally when it crosses that size.
    // I am expecting that someone will come and complain about this behavior in a remote future, then we can advise on a better solution.
    if (height_in_items < 0)
        height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
    float height_in_items_f = height_in_items < items_count ? (height_in_items + 0.40f) : (height_in_items + 0.00f);

    // We include ItemSpacing.y so that a list sized for the exact number of items doesn't make a scrollbar appears. We could also enforce that by passing a flag to BeginChild().
    ImVec2 size;
    size.x = 0.0f;
    size.y = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y;
    return ListBoxHeader(label, size);
}

// FIXME: Rename to EndListBox()
void ImGui::ListBoxFooter()
{
    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = GetCurrentWindow()->ParentWindow;
    const ImRect bb = parent_window->DC.LastItemRect;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = GetStyle();

    EndChildFrame();

    // Redeclare item size so that it includes the label (we have stored the full size in LastItemRect)
    // We call SameLine() to restore DC.CurrentLine* data
    SameLine();
    parent_window->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
    EndGroup();
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
{
    const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
{
    if (!ListBoxHeader(label, items_count, height_in_items))
        return false;

    // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different or variable sizes you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    bool value_changed = false;
    ImGuiListClipper clipper(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
    while (clipper.Step())
        for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
        {
            const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
            const char* item_text;
            if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
                item_text = "*Unknown item*";

            PushID(i);
            if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
            {
                *current_item = i;
                value_changed = true;
            }
            if (item_selected)
                SetItemDefaultFocus();
            PopID();
        }
    ListBoxFooter();
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnRelease | (enabled ? 0 : ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled);
    bool pressed;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
        // Note that in this situation we render neither the shortcut neither the selected tick mark
        float w = label_size.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
        ImVec2 shortcut_size = shortcut ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
        float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, shortcut_size.x, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback for next frame
        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, false, flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        if (shortcut_size.x > 0.0f)
        {
            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[1] + extra_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
            PopStyleColor();
        }
        if (selected)
            RenderCheckMark(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(enabled ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), g.FontSize  * 0.866f);
    }
    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled)
{
    if (MenuItem(label, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
    {
        if (p_selected)
            *p_selected = !*p_selected;
        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

// For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
    SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
    SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(g.IO.DisplaySize.x, g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y + g.FontBaseSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y));
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0,0));
    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
    bool is_open = Begin("##MainMenuBar", NULL, window_flags) && BeginMenuBar();
    PopStyleVar(2);
    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    if (!is_open)
    {
        End();
        return false;
    }
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
{
    EndMenuBar();

    // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == 0)
        FocusFrontMostActiveWindowIgnoringOne(g.NavWindow);

    End();
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;
    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0
    PushID("##menubar");

    // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
    // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
    ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
    ImRect clip_rect(ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.x + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize + 0.5f), ImFloor(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowRounding) + 0.5f), ImFloor(bar_rect.Max.y + 0.5f));
    clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
    PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);

    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent++;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask <<= 1;
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
    AlignTextToFramePadding();
    return true;
}

void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
    if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
        while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
        if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && g.NavMoveRequestForward == ImGuiNavForward_None)
        {
            // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
            // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth the hassle/cost)
            IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayerActiveMaskNext & 0x02); // Sanity check
            FocusWindow(window);
            SetNavIDWithRectRel(window->NavLastIds[1], 1, window->NavRectRel[1]);
            g.NavLayer = 1;
            g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
            g.NavMoveRequestForward = ImGuiNavForward_ForwardQueued;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
    PopClipRect();
    PopID();
    window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->MenuBarRect().Min.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
    window->DC.GroupStack.back().AdvanceCursor = false;
    EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent--;
    window->DC.NavLayerCurrentMask >>= 1;
    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
}

bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);

    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);

    bool pressed;
    bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id);
    bool menuset_is_open = !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back());
    ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = window;  // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent)

    // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu (using FindBestWindowPosForPopup).
    ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
    {
        // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
        // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
        // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - window->WindowPadding.x, pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, style.ItemSpacing * 2.0f);
        float w = label_size.x;
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        PopStyleVar();
        window->DC.CursorPos.x += (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu inside a menu
        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
        float w = window->MenuColumns.DeclColumns(label_size.x, 0.0f, (float)(int)(g.FontSize * 1.20f)); // Feedback to next frame
        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - w);
        pressed = Selectable(label, menu_is_open, ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawFillAvailWidth | (!enabled ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled : 0), ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
        if (!enabled) PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
        RenderArrow(pos + ImVec2(window->MenuColumns.Pos[2] + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), ImGuiDir_Right);
        if (!enabled) PopStyleColor();
    }

    const bool hovered = enabled && ItemHoverable(window->DC.LastItemRect, id);
    if (menuset_is_open)
        g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;

    bool want_open = false, want_close = false;
    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
    {
        // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
        bool moving_within_opened_triangle = false;
        if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].ParentWindow == window && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
        {
            if (ImGuiWindow* next_window = g.OpenPopupStack[g.CurrentPopupStack.Size].Window)
            {
                ImRect next_window_rect = next_window->Rect();
                ImVec2 ta = g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta;
                ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
                ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
                float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, 5.0f, 30.0f); // add a bit of extra slack.
                ta.x += (window->Pos.x < next_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f;   // to avoid numerical issues
                tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -100.0f);            // triangle is maximum 200 high to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus // FIXME: Multiply by fb_scale?
                tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +100.0f);
                moving_within_opened_triangle = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
                //window->DrawList->PushClipRectFullScreen(); window->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_within_opened_triangle ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); // Debug
            }
        }

        want_close = (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && !moving_within_opened_triangle);
        want_open = (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_within_opened_triangle) || (!menu_is_open && hovered && pressed);

        if (g.NavActivateId == id)
        {
            want_close = menu_is_open;
            want_open = !menu_is_open;
        }
        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }
    else
    {
        // Menu bar
        if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
        {
            want_close = true;
            want_open = menu_is_open = false;
        }
        else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
        {
            want_open = true;
        }
        else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveRequest && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
        {
            want_open = true;
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    }

    if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
        want_close = true;
    if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id))
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.CurrentPopupStack.Size);

    if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.CurrentPopupStack.Size)
    {
        // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
        OpenPopup(label);
        return false;
    }

    menu_is_open |= want_open;
    if (want_open)
        OpenPopup(label);

    if (menu_is_open)
    {
        // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
        SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
        ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
        if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
            flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
        menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
    }

    return menu_is_open;
}

void ImGui::EndMenu()
{
    // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close the menu.
    // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
    // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow == window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
    {
        ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1);
        NavMoveRequestCancel();
    }

    EndPopup();
}

// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
    BeginTooltipEx(0, true);

    const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
    if (text_end > text)
    {
        TextUnformatted(text, text_end);
        Separator();
    }

    ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
    ColorButton("##preview", ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]), (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
    SameLine();
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
        Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
    else
        Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
    EndTooltip();
}

static inline ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColor(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b)
{
    float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
    int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
    return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
}

// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
// I spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding alltogether.
void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, int rounding_corners_flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
    {
        ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(204,204,204,255), col));
        ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColor(IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), col));
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);

        int yi = 0;
        for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
        {
            float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
            if (y2 <= y1)
                continue;
            for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
            {
                float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
                if (x2 <= x1)
                    continue;
                int rounding_corners_flags_cell = 0;
                if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight; }
                if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) rounding_corners_flags_cell |= ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight; }
                rounding_corners_flags_cell &= rounding_corners_flags;
                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1,y1), ImVec2(x2,y2), col_bg2, rounding_corners_flags_cell ? rounding : 0.0f, rounding_corners_flags_cell);
            }
        }
    }
    else
    {
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, rounding_corners_flags);
    }
}

void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) == 0)
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask)));   // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))); // Check only 1 option is selected
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask)));   // Check only 1 option is selected
    g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
}

// A little colored square. Return true when clicked.
// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, ImVec2 size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
    float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
    if (size.x == 0.0f)
        size.x = default_size;
    if (size.y == 0.0f)
        size.y = default_size;
    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
        flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);

    ImVec4 col_without_alpha(col.x, col.y, col.z, 1.0f);
    float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
    float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
    ImRect bb_inner = bb;
    float off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
    bb_inner.Expand(off);
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col.w < 1.0f)
    {
        float mid_x = (float)(int)((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f + 0.5f);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight| ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight);
        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft|ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft);
    }
    else
    {
        // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
        ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col : col_without_alpha;
        if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
            RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
        else
            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding, ImDrawCornerFlags_All);
    }
    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
    if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
        RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
    else
        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border

    // Drag and Drop Source
    // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
    if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
    {
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
        else
            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
        ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
        SameLine();
        TextUnformatted("Color");
        EndDragDropSource();
    }

    // Tooltip
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
        ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));

    if (pressed)
        MarkItemEdited(id);

    return pressed;
}

bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
}

void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
    bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
    if (allow_opt_inputs)
    {
        if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB;
        if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV;
        if (RadioButton("HEX", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX;
    }
    if (allow_opt_datatype)
    {
        if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
        if (RadioButton("0..255",     (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
        if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
    }

    if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
        Separator();
    if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1,0)))
        OpenPopup("Copy");
    if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
    {
        int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
        char buf[64];
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "0x%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
        if (Selectable(buf))
            SetClipboardText(buf);
        EndPopup();
    }

    g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
    EndPopup();
}

void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
    bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !ImGui::BeginPopup("context"))
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (allow_opt_picker)
    {
        ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (ImGui::GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
        ImGui::PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
        for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
        {
            // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
            if (picker_type > 0) ImGui::Separator();
            ImGui::PushID(picker_type);
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview|(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
            if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
            if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
            ImVec2 backup_pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
            if (ImGui::Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
                g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
            ImVec4 dummy_ref_col;
            memcpy(&dummy_ref_col.x, ref_col, sizeof(float) * (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha ? 3 : 4));
            ImGui::ColorPicker4("##dummypicker", &dummy_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
            ImGui::PopID();
        }
        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
    }
    if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
    {
        if (allow_opt_picker) ImGui::Separator();
        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", (unsigned int*)&g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
    }
    ImGui::EndPopup();
}

// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// With typical options: Left-click on colored square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    const float w_extra = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
    const float w_items_all = CalcItemWidth() - w_extra;
    const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);

    BeginGroup();
    PushID(label);

    // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
    const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
        flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;

    // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask);
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask);
    flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask));

    const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
    const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
    const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;

    // Convert to the formats we need
    float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
    int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };

    bool value_changed = false;
    bool value_changed_as_float = false;

    if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
        const float w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)((w_items_all - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)) / (float)components));
        const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, (float)(int)(w_items_all - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components-1)));

        const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
        const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
        const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d" }, // Short display
            { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
        {
            {   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f" }, // Short display
            { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
            { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }  // Long display for HSVA
        };
        const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV) ? 2 : 1;

        PushItemWidth(w_item_one);
        for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
        {
            if (n > 0)
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            if (n + 1 == components)
                PushItemWidth(w_item_last);
            if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
                value_changed = value_changed_as_float = value_changed | DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f/255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
            else
                value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
                OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
        }
        PopItemWidth();
        PopItemWidth();
    }
    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        // RGB Hexadecimal Input
        char buf[64];
        if (alpha)
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255), ImClamp(i[3],0,255));
        else
            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0],0,255), ImClamp(i[1],0,255), ImClamp(i[2],0,255));
        PushItemWidth(w_items_all);
        if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
        {
            value_changed = true;
            char* p = buf;
            while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
                p++;
            i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = i[3] = 0;
            if (alpha)
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
            else
                sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
        PopItemWidth();
    }

    ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
    {
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs))
            SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);

        const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
        if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
        {
            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
            {
                // Store current color and open a picker
                g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
                OpenPopup("picker");
                SetNextWindowPos(window->DC.LastItemRect.GetBL() + ImVec2(-1,style.ItemSpacing.y));
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        if (BeginPopup("picker"))
        {
            picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
            if (label != label_display_end)
            {
                TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
                Separator();
            }
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
            PushItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
            value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
            PopItemWidth();
            EndPopup();
        }
    }

    if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
    }

    // Convert back
    if (picker_active_window == NULL)
    {
        if (!value_changed_as_float)
            for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
                f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV)
            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
        if (value_changed)
        {
            col[0] = f[0];
            col[1] = f[1];
            col[2] = f[2];
            if (alpha)
                col[3] = f[3];
        }
    }

    PopID();
    EndGroup();

    // Drag and Drop Target
    // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
    if ((window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
    {
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
        {
            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
            value_changed = true;
        }
        EndDragDropTarget();
    }

    // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
    if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
        window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;

    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    return value_changed;
}

bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
{
    float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
    if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
        return false;
    col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
    return true;
}

static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w)
{
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1,         pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_BLACK);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x,             pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32_WHITE);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32_BLACK);
    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x,     pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32_WHITE);
}

// ColorPicker
// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;

    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;

    PushID(label);
    BeginGroup();

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;

    // Context menu: display and store options.
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))

    // Read stored options
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))
        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags__OptionsDefault) & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__PickerMask))); // Check that only 1 is selected
    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);

    // Setup
    int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
    bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
    ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
    float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
    float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, CalcItemWidth() - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
    float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
    float bars_triangles_half_sz = (float)(int)(bars_width * 0.20f);

    float backup_initial_col[4];
    memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));

    float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
    float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
    float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
    ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size*0.5f);

    // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
    float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
    ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
    ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.

    float H,S,V;
    ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], H, S, V);

    bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;

    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
        InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
            ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
            float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
            if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner-1)*(wheel_r_inner-1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer+1)*(wheel_r_outer+1))
            {
                // Interactive with Hue wheel
                H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI*0.5f;
                if (H < 0.0f)
                    H += 1.0f;
                value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
            }
            float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
            if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
            {
                // Interacting with SV triangle
                ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
                if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
                    current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
                float uu, vv, ww;
                ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
                V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
                value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
            }
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // SV rectangle logic
        InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
        }
        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context");

        // Hue bar logic
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
        }
    }

    // Alpha bar logic
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
        InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
        if (IsItemActive())
        {
            col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size-1));
            value_changed = true;
        }
    }
    PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
        BeginGroup();
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
    {
        const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
        if (label != label_display_end)
        {
            if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
            TextUnformatted(label, label_display_end);
        }
    }

    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
    {
        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
        ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
            Text("Current");
        ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
        if (ref_col != NULL)
        {
            Text("Original");
            ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
            if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview|ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf|ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip)), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
            {
                memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
                value_changed = true;
            }
        }
        PopItemFlag();
        EndGroup();
    }

    // Convert back color to RGB
    if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H >= 1.0f ? H - 10 * 1e-6f : H, S > 0.0f ? S : 10*1e-6f, V > 0.0f ? V : 1e-6f, col[0], col[1], col[2]);

    // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
    bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
    {
        PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags__DataTypeMask | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
            if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB))
            {
                // FIXME: Hackily differenciating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
                // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
                value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
                value_changed = true;
            }
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV);
        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags__InputsMask) == 0)
            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX);
        PopItemWidth();
    }

    // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
    if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap)
    {
        float new_H, new_S, new_V;
        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
        if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
        {
            if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
            else if (new_S <= 0)
                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
        }
    }

    ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, 1); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
    ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
    ImU32 col32_no_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f));

    const ImU32 hue_colors[6+1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,0,255), IM_COL32(0,255,255,255), IM_COL32(0,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,255,255), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255) };
    ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;

    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
    {
        // Render Hue Wheel
        const float aeps = 1.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
        const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
        for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
        {
            const float a0 = (n)     /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
            const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
            const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
            draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
            draw_list->PathStroke(IM_COL32_WHITE, false, wheel_thickness);
            const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;

            // Paint colors over existing vertices
            ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
            ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
            ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, hue_colors[n], hue_colors[n+1]);
        }

        // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
        float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
        ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner+wheel_r_outer)*0.5f);
        float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
        int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), hue_cursor_segments);
        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_cursor_segments);

        // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
        ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
        ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
        draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_WHITE);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK);
        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS);
        draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 1.5f);
        sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
    }
    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
    {
        // Render SV Square
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_WHITE, hue_color32, hue_color32, IM_COL32_WHITE);
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS, IM_COL32_BLACK, IM_COL32_BLACK);
        RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size,sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S)     * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
        sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp((float)(int)(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);

        // Render Hue Bar
        for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i], hue_colors[i + 1], hue_colors[i + 1]);
        float bar0_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
        RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
    }

    // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
    float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col32_no_alpha, 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad+1, IM_COL32(128,128,128,255), 12);
    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, IM_COL32_WHITE, 12);

    // Render alpha bar
    if (alpha_bar)
    {
        float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
        ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, IM_COL32(0,0,0,0), bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, col32_no_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
        float bar1_line_y = (float)(int)(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size + 0.5f);
        RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f);
    }

    EndGroup();

    if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
        value_changed = false;
    if (value_changed)
        MarkItemEdited(window->DC.LastItemId);

    PopID();

    return value_changed;
}

// Horizontal/vertical separating line
void ImGui::Separator()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
    ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo((int)(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical))));   // Check that only 1 option is selected
    if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
    {
        VerticalSeparator();
        return;
    }

    // Horizontal Separator
    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
        PopClipRect();

    float x1 = window->Pos.x;
    float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
    if (!window->DC.GroupStack.empty())
        x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;

    const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y+1.0f));
    ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); // NB: we don't provide our width so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit, we don't provide height to not alter layout.
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
    {
        if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
            PushColumnClipRect();
        return;
    }

    window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x,bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));

    if (g.LogEnabled)
            LogRenderedText(NULL, IM_NEWLINE "--------------------------------");

    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet)
    {
        PushColumnClipRect();
        window->DC.ColumnsSet->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    }
}

void ImGui::VerticalSeparator()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;

    float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y;
    const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + 1.0f, y2));
    ItemSize(ImVec2(bb.GetWidth(), 0.0f));
    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
        return;

    window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
    if (g.LogEnabled)
        LogText(" |");
}

// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = window->DC.ItemFlags;
    window->DC.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
    bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
    window->DC.ItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
    if (!item_add)
        return false;

    bool hovered, held;
    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
    bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
    ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
    if (g.ActiveId != id)
        SetItemAllowOverlap();

    if (held || (g.HoveredId == id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
        SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);

    ImRect bb_render = bb;
    if (held)
    {
        ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
        float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;

        // Minimum pane size
        float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
        float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
        if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
        if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
            mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;

        // Apply resize
        if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
        {
            if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
                IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
            if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
               IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
            *size1 += mouse_delta;
            *size2 -= mouse_delta;
            bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
            MarkItemEdited(id);
        }
    }

    // Render
    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, g.Style.FrameRounding);

    return held;
}

void ImGui::Spacing()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;
    ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
}

void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
    ItemSize(bb);
    ItemAdd(bb, 0);
}

bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size));
}

bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(rect_min, rect_max));
}

// Lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
void ImGui::BeginGroup()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    window->DC.GroupStack.resize(window->DC.GroupStack.Size + 1);
    ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();
    group_data.BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
    group_data.BackupIndent = window->DC.Indent;
    group_data.BackupGroupOffset = window->DC.GroupOffset;
    group_data.BackupCurrentLineSize = window->DC.CurrentLineSize;
    group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
    group_data.BackupLogLinePosY = window->DC.LogLinePosY;
    group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdIsAlive;
    group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
    group_data.AdvanceCursor = true;

    window->DC.GroupOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
    window->DC.Indent = window->DC.GroupOffset;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return
}

void ImGui::EndGroup()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.GroupStack.empty());    // Mismatched BeginGroup()/EndGroup() calls

    ImGuiGroupData& group_data = window->DC.GroupStack.back();

    ImRect group_bb(group_data.BackupCursorPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
    group_bb.Max = ImMax(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max);

    window->DC.CursorPos = group_data.BackupCursorPos;
    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
    window->DC.Indent = group_data.BackupIndent;
    window->DC.GroupOffset = group_data.BackupGroupOffset;
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize = group_data.BackupCurrentLineSize;
    window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset;
    window->DC.LogLinePosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y - 9999.0f; // To enforce Log carriage return

    if (group_data.AdvanceCursor)
    {
        window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset, group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset);      // FIXME: Incorrect, we should grab the base offset from the *first line* of the group but it is hard to obtain now.
        ItemSize(group_bb.GetSize(), group_data.BackupCurrentLineTextBaseOffset);
        ItemAdd(group_bb, 0);
    }

    // If the current ActiveId was declared within the boundary of our group, we copy it to LastItemId so IsItemActive(), IsItemDeactivated() etc. will be functional on the entire group.
    // It would be be neater if we replaced window.DC.LastItemId by e.g. 'bool LastItemIsActive', but would put a little more burden on individual widgets.
    // (and if you grep for LastItemId you'll notice it is only used in that context.
    if ((group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId) && (g.ActiveIdIsAlive == g.ActiveId) && g.ActiveId) // && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
        window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveId;
    else if (!group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive) // && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow->RootWindow == window->RootWindow)
        window->DC.LastItemId = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
    window->DC.LastItemRect = group_bb;

    window->DC.GroupStack.pop_back();

    //window->DrawList->AddRect(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));   // [Debug]
}

// Gets back to previous line and continue with horizontal layout
//      pos_x == 0      : follow right after previous item
//      pos_x != 0      : align to specified x position (relative to window/group left)
//      spacing_w < 0   : use default spacing if pos_x == 0, no spacing if pos_x != 0
//      spacing_w >= 0  : enforce spacing amount
void ImGui::SameLine(float pos_x, float spacing_w)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (pos_x != 0.0f)
    {
        if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = 0.0f;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + pos_x + spacing_w + window->DC.GroupOffset.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
    }
    else
    {
        if (spacing_w < 0.0f) spacing_w = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
        window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x + spacing_w;
        window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
    }
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize;
    window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
}

void ImGui::NewLine()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
    if (window->DC.CurrentLineSize.y > 0.0f)     // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0,0));
    else
        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
    window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
}

void ImGui::NextColumn()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL)
        return;

    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    PopItemWidth();
    PopClipRect();

    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    if (++columns->Current < columns->Count)
    {
        // Columns 1+ cancel out IndentX
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(columns->Current);
    }
    else
    {
        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
        window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
        columns->Current = 0;
        columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
    }
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
    window->DC.CurrentLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
    window->DC.CurrentLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;

    PushColumnClipRect();
    PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f);  // FIXME: Move on columns setup
}

int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Current : 0;
}

int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    return window->DC.ColumnsSet ? window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count : 1;
}

static float OffsetNormToPixels(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset_norm)
{
    return offset_norm * (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
}

static float PixelsToOffsetNorm(const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, float offset)
{
    return offset / (columns->MaxX - columns->MinX);
}

static inline float GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() { return 4.0f; }

static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index)
{
    // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
    // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));

    float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + GetColumnsRectHalfWidth() - window->Pos.x;
    x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
    if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
        x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);

    return x;
}

float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->MinX, columns->MaxX, t);
    return x_offset;
}

static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiColumnsSet* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false)
{
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

    float offset_norm;
    if (before_resize)
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
    else
        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
    return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, offset_norm);
}

float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    return OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
}

void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);

    const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count-1);
    const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;

    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
        offset = ImMin(offset, columns->MaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
    columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = PixelsToOffsetNorm(columns, offset - columns->MinX);

    if (preserve_width)
        SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
}

void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;
    SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
}

void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    if (column_index < 0)
        column_index = columns->Current;

    PushClipRect(columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Min, columns->Columns[column_index].ClipRect.Max, false);
}

static ImGuiColumnsSet* FindOrAddColumnsSet(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)
{
    for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
        if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
            return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];

    window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiColumnsSet());
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
    columns->ID = id;
    return columns;
}

void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiColumnsFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();

    IM_ASSERT(columns_count > 1);
    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.ColumnsSet == NULL); // Nested columns are currently not supported

    // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
    // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
    PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
    PopID();

    // Acquire storage for the columns set
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = FindOrAddColumnsSet(window, id);
    IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
    columns->Current = 0;
    columns->Count = columns_count;
    columns->Flags = flags;
    window->DC.ColumnsSet = columns;

    // Set state for first column
    const float content_region_width = (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? (window->SizeContentsExplicit.x) : (window->InnerClipRect.Max.x - window->Pos.x);
    columns->MinX = window->DC.Indent.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; // Lock our horizontal range
    columns->MaxX = ImMax(content_region_width - window->Scroll.x, columns->MinX + 1.0f);
    columns->StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    columns->StartMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
    columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);

    // Clear data if columns count changed
    if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
        columns->Columns.resize(0);

    // Initialize defaults
    columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
    if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
    {
        columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
        {
            ImGuiColumnData column;
            column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
            columns->Columns.push_back(column);
        }
    }

    for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
    {
        // Compute clipping rectangle
        ImGuiColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
        float clip_x1 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n) - 1.0f);
        float clip_x2 = ImFloor(0.5f + window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
        column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
        column->ClipRect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
    }

    window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(columns->Count);
    PushColumnClipRect();
    PushItemWidth(GetColumnWidth() * 0.65f);
}

void ImGui::EndColumns()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = window->DC.ColumnsSet;
    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);

    PopItemWidth();
    PopClipRect();
    window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();

    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
        window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->StartMaxPosX;  // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent

    // Draw columns borders and handle resize
    bool is_being_resized = false;
    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
    {
        const float y1 = columns->StartPosY;
        const float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
        int dragging_column = -1;
        for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
        {
            float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
            const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
            const float column_hw = GetColumnsRectHalfWidth(); // Half-width for interaction
            const ImRect column_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hw, y2));
            KeepAliveID(column_id);
            if (IsClippedEx(column_rect, column_id, false))
                continue;

            bool hovered = false, held = false;
            if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
            {
                ButtonBehavior(column_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
                if (hovered || held)
                    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
                if (held && !(columns->Columns[n].Flags & ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize))
                    dragging_column = n;
            }

            // Draw column (we clip the Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.)
            const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
            const float xi = (float)(int)x;
            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, ImMax(y1 + 1.0f, window->ClipRect.Min.y)), ImVec2(xi, ImMin(y2, window->ClipRect.Max.y)), col);
        }

        // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
        if (dragging_column != -1)
        {
            if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
                for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
                    columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
            columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
            float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
            SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
        }
    }
    columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;

    window->DC.ColumnsSet = NULL;
    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = (float)(int)(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
}

// [2018-03: This is currently the only public API, while we are working on making BeginColumns/EndColumns user-facing]
void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, const char* id, bool border)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);

    ImGuiColumnsFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder);
    //flags |= ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Count == columns_count && window->DC.ColumnsSet->Flags == flags)
        return;

    if (window->DC.ColumnsSet != NULL)
        EndColumns();

    if (columns_count != 1)
        BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
}

void ImGui::Indent(float indent_w)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.Indent.x += (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
}

void ImGui::Unindent(float indent_w)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    window->DC.Indent.x -= (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(str_id ? str_id : "#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    PushID(ptr_id ? ptr_id : (const void*)"#TreePush");
}

void ImGui::TreePushRawID(ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
    Indent();
    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
}

void ImGui::TreePop()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    Unindent();

    window->DC.TreeDepth--;
    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
        if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop & (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth)))
        {
            SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer);
            NavMoveRequestCancel();
        }
    window->DC.TreeDepthMayJumpToParentOnPop &= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth) - 1;

    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
    PopID();
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, bool b)
{
    Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v)
{
    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
}

void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format)
{
    if (float_format)
    {
        char fmt[64];
        ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
        Text(fmt, prefix, v);
    }
    else
    {
        Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
    }
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// DRAG AND DROP
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::ClearDragDrop()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.DragDropActive = false;
    g.DragDropPayload.Clear();
    g.DragDropAcceptFlags = 0;
    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = 0;
    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
    g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1;

    g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.clear();
    memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
}

// Call when current ID is active.
// When this returns true you need to: a) call SetDragDropPayload() exactly once, b) you may render the payload visual/description, c) call EndDragDropSource()
bool ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;

    bool source_drag_active = false;
    ImGuiID source_id = 0;
    ImGuiID source_parent_id = 0;
    int mouse_button = 0;
    if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
    {
        source_id = window->DC.LastItemId;
        if (source_id != 0 && g.ActiveId != source_id) // Early out for most common case
            return false;
        if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false)
            return false;

        if (source_id == 0)
        {
            // If you want to use BeginDragDropSource() on an item with no unique identifier for interaction, such as Text() or Image(), you need to:
            // A) Read the explanation below, B) Use the ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID flag, C) Swallow your programmer pride.
            if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID))
            {
                IM_ASSERT(0);
                return false;
            }

            // Magic fallback (=somehow reprehensible) to handle items with no assigned ID, e.g. Text(), Image()
            // We build a throwaway ID based on current ID stack + relative AABB of items in window.
            // THE IDENTIFIER WON'T SURVIVE ANY REPOSITIONING OF THE WIDGET, so if your widget moves your dragging operation will be canceled.
            // We don't need to maintain/call ClearActiveID() as releasing the button will early out this function and trigger !ActiveIdIsAlive.
            bool is_hovered = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) != 0;
            if (!is_hovered && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdWindow != window))
                return false;
            source_id = window->DC.LastItemId = window->GetIDFromRectangle(window->DC.LastItemRect);
            if (is_hovered)
                SetHoveredID(source_id);
            if (is_hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[mouse_button])
            {
                SetActiveID(source_id, window);
                FocusWindow(window);
            }
            if (g.ActiveId == source_id) // Allow the underlying widget to display/return hovered during the mouse release frame, else we would get a flicker.
                g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = is_hovered;
        }
        else
        {
            g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
        }
        if (g.ActiveId != source_id)
            return false;
        source_parent_id = window->IDStack.back();
        source_drag_active = IsMouseDragging(mouse_button);
    }
    else
    {
        window = NULL;
        source_id = ImHash("#SourceExtern", 0);
        source_drag_active = true;
    }

    if (source_drag_active)
    {
        if (!g.DragDropActive)
        {
            IM_ASSERT(source_id != 0);
            ClearDragDrop();
            ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
            payload.SourceId = source_id;
            payload.SourceParentId = source_parent_id;
            g.DragDropActive = true;
            g.DragDropSourceFlags = flags;
            g.DragDropMouseButton = mouse_button;
        }
        g.DragDropSourceFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
        g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;

        if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
        {
            // Target can request the Source to not display its tooltip (we use a dedicated flag to make this request explicit)
            // We unfortunately can't just modify the source flags and skip the call to BeginTooltip, as caller may be emitting contents. 
            BeginTooltip();
            if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev && (g.DragDropAcceptFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip))
            {
                ImGuiWindow* tooltip_window = g.CurrentWindow;
                tooltip_window->SkipItems = true;
                tooltip_window->HiddenFramesRegular = 1;
            }
        }

        if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover) && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
            window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags &= ~ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;

        return true;
    }
    return false;
}

void ImGui::EndDragDropSource()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget && "Not after a BeginDragDropSource()?");

    if (!(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
        EndTooltip();

    // Discard the drag if have not called SetDragDropPayload()
    if (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount == -1)
        ClearDragDrop();
    g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
}

// Use 'cond' to choose to submit payload on drag start or every frame
bool ImGui::SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiCond cond)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
    if (cond == 0)
        cond = ImGuiCond_Always;

    IM_ASSERT(type != NULL);
    IM_ASSERT(strlen(type) < IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType) && "Payload type can be at most 32 characters long");
    IM_ASSERT((data != NULL && data_size > 0) || (data == NULL && data_size == 0));
    IM_ASSERT(cond == ImGuiCond_Always || cond == ImGuiCond_Once);
    IM_ASSERT(payload.SourceId != 0);                               // Not called between BeginDragDropSource() and EndDragDropSource()

    if (cond == ImGuiCond_Always || payload.DataFrameCount == -1)
    {
        // Copy payload
        ImStrncpy(payload.DataType, type, IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType));
        g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize(0);
        if (data_size > sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal))
        {
            // Store in heap
            g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize((int)data_size);
            payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.Data;
            memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
        }
        else if (data_size > 0)
        {
            // Store locally
            memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
            payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal;
            memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
        }
        else
        {
            payload.Data = NULL;
        }
        payload.DataSize = (int)data_size;
    }
    payload.DataFrameCount = g.FrameCount;

    return (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount) || (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1);
}

bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!g.DragDropActive)
        return false;

    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
        return false;
    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
    if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max) || (id == g.DragDropPayload.SourceId))
        return false;
    if (window->SkipItems)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
    g.DragDropTargetRect = bb;
    g.DragDropTargetId = id;
    g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
    return true;
}

// We don't use BeginDragDropTargetCustom() and duplicate its code because:
// 1) we use LastItemRectHoveredRect which handles items that pushes a temporarily clip rectangle in their code. Calling BeginDragDropTargetCustom(LastItemRect) would not handle them.
// 2) and it's faster. as this code may be very frequently called, we want to early out as fast as we can.
// Also note how the HoveredWindow test is positioned differently in both functions (in both functions we optimize for the cheapest early out case)
bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    if (!g.DragDropActive)
        return false;

    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    if (!(window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
        return false;
    if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL || window->RootWindow != g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow)
        return false;

    const ImRect& display_rect = (window->DC.LastItemStatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect) ? window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect : window->DC.LastItemRect;
    ImGuiID id = window->DC.LastItemId;
    if (id == 0)
        id = window->GetIDFromRectangle(display_rect);
    if (g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id)
        return false;

    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget == false);
    g.DragDropTargetRect = display_rect;
    g.DragDropTargetId = id;
    g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = true;
    return true;
}

bool ImGui::IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev != 0;
}

const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
    ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);                        // Not called between BeginDragDropTarget() and EndDragDropTarget() ?
    IM_ASSERT(payload.DataFrameCount != -1);            // Forgot to call EndDragDropTarget() ?
    if (type != NULL && !payload.IsDataType(type))
        return NULL;

    // Accept smallest drag target bounding box, this allows us to nest drag targets conveniently without ordering constraints.
    // NB: We currently accept NULL id as target. However, overlapping targets requires a unique ID to function!
    const bool was_accepted_previously = (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev == g.DragDropTargetId);
    ImRect r = g.DragDropTargetRect;
    float r_surface = r.GetWidth() * r.GetHeight();
    if (r_surface < g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface)
    {
        g.DragDropAcceptFlags = flags;
        g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropTargetId;
        g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = r_surface;
    }

    // Render default drop visuals
    payload.Preview = was_accepted_previously;
    flags |= (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect); // Source can also inhibit the preview (useful for external sources that lives for 1 frame)
    if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect) && payload.Preview)
    {
        // FIXME-DRAG: Settle on a proper default visuals for drop target.
        r.Expand(3.5f);
        bool push_clip_rect = !window->ClipRect.Contains(r);
        if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PushClipRect(r.Min-ImVec2(1,1), r.Max+ImVec2(1,1));
        window->DrawList->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, ~0, 2.0f);
        if (push_clip_rect) window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
    }

    g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
    payload.Delivery = was_accepted_previously && !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton); // For extern drag sources affecting os window focus, it's easier to just test !IsMouseDown() instead of IsMouseReleased()
    if (!payload.Delivery && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery))
        return NULL;

    return &payload;
}

// We don't really use/need this now, but added it for the sake of consistency and because we might need it later.
void ImGui::EndDragDropTarget()
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget);
    g.DragDropWithinSourceOrTarget = false;
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WINDOWS_) && (!defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) || !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS))
#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
#endif
#ifndef __MINGW32__
#include <Windows.h>
#else
#include <windows.h>
#endif
#endif

// Win32 API clipboard implementation
#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS)

#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma comment(lib, "user32")
#endif

static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*)
{
    static ImVector<char> buf_local;
    buf_local.clear();
    if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL))
        return NULL;
    HANDLE wbuf_handle = ::GetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT);
    if (wbuf_handle == NULL)
    {
        ::CloseClipboard();
        return NULL;
    }
    if (ImWchar* wbuf_global = (ImWchar*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle))
    {
        int buf_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(wbuf_global, NULL) + 1;
        buf_local.resize(buf_len);
        ImTextStrToUtf8(buf_local.Data, buf_len, wbuf_global, NULL);
    }
    ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle);
    ::CloseClipboard();
    return buf_local.Data;
}

static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text)
{
    if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL))
        return;
    const int wbuf_length = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(text, NULL) + 1;
    HGLOBAL wbuf_handle = ::GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE, (SIZE_T)wbuf_length * sizeof(ImWchar));
    if (wbuf_handle == NULL)
    {
        ::CloseClipboard();
        return;
    }
    ImWchar* wbuf_global = (ImWchar*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle);
    ImTextStrFromUtf8(wbuf_global, wbuf_length, text, NULL);
    ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle);
    ::EmptyClipboard();
    if (::SetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT, wbuf_handle) == NULL)
        ::GlobalFree(wbuf_handle);
    ::CloseClipboard();
}

#else

// Local ImGui-only clipboard implementation, if user hasn't defined better clipboard handlers
static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    return g.PrivateClipboard.empty() ? NULL : g.PrivateClipboard.begin();
}

// Local ImGui-only clipboard implementation, if user hasn't defined better clipboard handlers
static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text)
{
    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
    g.PrivateClipboard.clear();
    const char* text_end = text + strlen(text);
    g.PrivateClipboard.resize((int)(text_end - text) + 1);
    memcpy(&g.PrivateClipboard[0], text, (size_t)(text_end - text));
    g.PrivateClipboard[(int)(text_end - text)] = 0;
}

#endif

// Win32 API IME support (for Asian languages, etc.)
#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS)

#include <imm.h>
#ifdef _MSC_VER
#pragma comment(lib, "imm32")
#endif

static void ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl(int x, int y)
{
    // Notify OS Input Method Editor of text input position
    if (HWND hwnd = (HWND)GImGui->IO.ImeWindowHandle)
        if (HIMC himc = ::ImmGetContext(hwnd))
        {
            COMPOSITIONFORM cf;
            cf.ptCurrentPos.x = x;
            cf.ptCurrentPos.y = y;
            cf.dwStyle = CFS_FORCE_POSITION;
            ::ImmSetCompositionWindow(himc, &cf);
            ::ImmReleaseContext(hwnd, himc);
        }
}

#else

static void ImeSetInputScreenPosFn_DefaultImpl(int, int) {}

#endif

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// HELP, METRICS
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open)
{
    if (ImGui::Begin("ImGui Metrics", p_open))
    {
        static bool show_draw_cmd_clip_rects = true;
        static bool show_window_begin_order = false;
        ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
        ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
        ImGui::Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate);
        ImGui::Text("%d vertices, %d indices (%d triangles)", io.MetricsRenderVertices, io.MetricsRenderIndices, io.MetricsRenderIndices / 3);
        ImGui::Text("%d active windows (%d visible)", io.MetricsActiveWindows, io.MetricsRenderWindows);
        ImGui::Text("%d allocations", io.MetricsActiveAllocations);
        ImGui::Checkbox("Show clipping rectangles when hovering draw commands", &show_draw_cmd_clip_rects);
        ImGui::Checkbox("Ctrl shows window begin order", &show_window_begin_order);

        ImGui::Separator();

        struct Funcs
        {
            static void NodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label)
            {
                bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode(draw_list, "%s: '%s' %d vtx, %d indices, %d cmds", label, draw_list->_OwnerName ? draw_list->_OwnerName : "", draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size, draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size);
                if (draw_list == ImGui::GetWindowDrawList())
                {
                    ImGui::SameLine();
                    ImGui::TextColored(ImColor(255,100,100), "CURRENTLY APPENDING"); // Can't display stats for active draw list! (we don't have the data double-buffered)
                    if (node_open) ImGui::TreePop();
                    return;
                }

                ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList(); // Render additional visuals into the top-most draw list
                if (window && IsItemHovered())
                    overlay_draw_list->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
                if (!node_open)
                    return;

                int elem_offset = 0;
                for (const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin(); pcmd < draw_list->CmdBuffer.end(); elem_offset += pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd++)
                {
                    if (pcmd->UserCallback == NULL && pcmd->ElemCount == 0)
                        continue;
                    if (pcmd->UserCallback)
                    {
                        ImGui::BulletText("Callback %p, user_data %p", pcmd->UserCallback, pcmd->UserCallbackData);
                        continue;
                    }
                    ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL;
                    bool pcmd_node_open = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(pcmd - draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin()), "Draw %4d %s vtx, tex 0x%p, clip_rect (%4.0f,%4.0f)-(%4.0f,%4.0f)", pcmd->ElemCount, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0 ? "indexed" : "non-indexed", pcmd->TextureId, pcmd->ClipRect.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y, pcmd->ClipRect.z, pcmd->ClipRect.w);
                    if (show_draw_cmd_clip_rects && ImGui::IsItemHovered())
                    {
                        ImRect clip_rect = pcmd->ClipRect;
                        ImRect vtxs_rect;
                        for (int i = elem_offset; i < elem_offset + (int)pcmd->ElemCount; i++)
                            vtxs_rect.Add(draw_list->VtxBuffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[i] : i].pos);
                        clip_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255));
                        vtxs_rect.Floor(); overlay_draw_list->AddRect(vtxs_rect.Min, vtxs_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
                    }
                    if (!pcmd_node_open)
                        continue;

                    // Display individual triangles/vertices. Hover on to get the corresponding triangle highlighted.
                    ImGuiListClipper clipper(pcmd->ElemCount/3); // Manually coarse clip our print out of individual vertices to save CPU, only items that may be visible.
                    while (clipper.Step())
                        for (int prim = clipper.DisplayStart, vtx_i = elem_offset + clipper.DisplayStart*3; prim < clipper.DisplayEnd; prim++)
                        {
                            char buf[300];
                            char *buf_p = buf, *buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
                            ImVec2 triangles_pos[3];
                            for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, vtx_i++)
                            {
                                ImDrawVert& v = draw_list->VtxBuffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[vtx_i] : vtx_i];
                                triangles_pos[n] = v.pos;
                                buf_p += ImFormatString(buf_p, (int)(buf_end - buf_p), "%s %04d: pos (%8.2f,%8.2f), uv (%.6f,%.6f), col %08X\n", (n == 0) ? "vtx" : "   ", vtx_i, v.pos.x, v.pos.y, v.uv.x, v.uv.y, v.col);
                            }
                            ImGui::Selectable(buf, false);
                            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
                            {
                                ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = overlay_draw_list->Flags;
                                overlay_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines at is more readable for very large and thin triangles.
                                overlay_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangles_pos, 3, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255), true, 1.0f);
                                overlay_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags;
                            }
                        }
                    ImGui::TreePop();
                }
                ImGui::TreePop();
            }

            static void NodeWindows(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>& windows, const char* label)
            {
                if (!ImGui::TreeNode(label, "%s (%d)", label, windows.Size))
                    return;
                for (int i = 0; i < windows.Size; i++)
                    Funcs::NodeWindow(windows[i], "Window");
                ImGui::TreePop();
            }

            static void NodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label)
            {
                if (!ImGui::TreeNode(window, "%s '%s', %d @ 0x%p", label, window->Name, window->Active || window->WasActive, window))
                    return;
                ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
                NodeDrawList(window, window->DrawList, "DrawList");
                ImGui::BulletText("Pos: (%.1f,%.1f), Size: (%.1f,%.1f), SizeContents (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Pos.x, window->Pos.y, window->Size.x, window->Size.y, window->SizeContents.x, window->SizeContents.y);
                ImGui::BulletText("Flags: 0x%08X (%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s..)", flags,
                    (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? "Child " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)   ? "Tooltip "   : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) ? "Popup " : "",
                    (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)       ? "Modal " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? "ChildMenu " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) ? "NoSavedSettings " : "",
                    (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)    ? "NoInputs":"", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) ? "AlwaysAutoResize" : "");
                ImGui::BulletText("Scroll: (%.2f/%.2f,%.2f/%.2f)", window->Scroll.x, GetScrollMaxX(window), window->Scroll.y, GetScrollMaxY(window));
                ImGui::BulletText("Active: %d/%d, WriteAccessed: %d, BeginOrderWithinContext: %d", window->Active, window->WasActive, window->WriteAccessed, (window->Active || window->WasActive) ? window->BeginOrderWithinContext : -1);
                ImGui::BulletText("Appearing: %d, Hidden: %d (Reg %d Resize %d), SkipItems: %d", window->Appearing, window->Hidden, window->HiddenFramesRegular, window->HiddenFramesForResize, window->SkipItems);
                ImGui::BulletText("NavLastIds: 0x%08X,0x%08X, NavLayerActiveMask: %X", window->NavLastIds[0], window->NavLastIds[1], window->DC.NavLayerActiveMask);
                ImGui::BulletText("NavLastChildNavWindow: %s", window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow->Name : "NULL");
                if (!window->NavRectRel[0].IsInverted())
                    ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: (%.1f,%.1f)(%.1f,%.1f)", window->NavRectRel[0].Min.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Min.y, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.x, window->NavRectRel[0].Max.y);
                else
                    ImGui::BulletText("NavRectRel[0]: <None>");
                if (window->RootWindow != window) NodeWindow(window->RootWindow, "RootWindow");
                if (window->ParentWindow != NULL) NodeWindow(window->ParentWindow, "ParentWindow");
                if (window->DC.ChildWindows.Size > 0) NodeWindows(window->DC.ChildWindows, "ChildWindows");
                if (window->ColumnsStorage.Size > 0 && ImGui::TreeNode("Columns", "Columns sets (%d)", window->ColumnsStorage.Size))
                {
                    for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
                    {
                        const ImGuiColumnsSet* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
                        if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(uintptr_t)columns->ID, "Columns Id: 0x%08X, Count: %d, Flags: 0x%04X", columns->ID, columns->Count, columns->Flags))
                        {
                            ImGui::BulletText("Width: %.1f (MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f)", columns->MaxX - columns->MinX, columns->MinX, columns->MaxX);
                            for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns->Columns.Size; column_n++)
                                ImGui::BulletText("Column %02d: OffsetNorm %.3f (= %.1f px)", column_n, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm, OffsetNormToPixels(columns, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm));
                            ImGui::TreePop();
                        }
                    }
                    ImGui::TreePop();
                }
                ImGui::BulletText("Storage: %d bytes", window->StateStorage.Data.Size * (int)sizeof(ImGuiStorage::Pair));
                ImGui::TreePop();
            }
        };

        // Access private state, we are going to display the draw lists from last frame
        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
        Funcs::NodeWindows(g.Windows, "Windows");
        if (ImGui::TreeNode("DrawList", "Active DrawLists (%d)", g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size))
        {
            for (int i = 0; i < g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0].Size; i++)
                Funcs::NodeDrawList(NULL, g.DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0][i], "DrawList");
            ImGui::TreePop();
        }
        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups", "Popups (%d)", g.OpenPopupStack.Size))
        {
            for (int i = 0; i < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; i++)
            {
                ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[i].Window;
                ImGui::BulletText("PopupID: %08x, Window: '%s'%s%s", g.OpenPopupStack[i].PopupId, window ? window->Name : "NULL", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? " ChildWindow" : "", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? " ChildMenu" : "");
            }
            ImGui::TreePop();
        }
        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Internal state"))
        {
            const char* input_source_names[] = { "None", "Mouse", "Nav", "NavKeyboard", "NavGamepad" }; IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(input_source_names) == ImGuiInputSource_COUNT);
            ImGui::Text("HoveredWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("HoveredRootWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredRootWindow ? g.HoveredRootWindow->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d", g.HoveredId, g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame, g.HoveredIdTimer, g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap); // Data is "in-flight" so depending on when the Metrics window is called we may see current frame information or not
            ImGui::Text("ActiveId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d, Source: %s", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame, g.ActiveIdTimer, g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap, input_source_names[g.ActiveIdSource]);
            ImGui::Text("ActiveIdWindow: '%s'", g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("MovingWindow: '%s'", g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("NavWindow: '%s'", g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("NavId: 0x%08X, NavLayer: %d", g.NavId, g.NavLayer);
            ImGui::Text("NavInputSource: %s", input_source_names[g.NavInputSource]);
            ImGui::Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", g.IO.NavActive, g.IO.NavVisible);
            ImGui::Text("NavActivateId: 0x%08X, NavInputId: 0x%08X", g.NavActivateId, g.NavInputId);
            ImGui::Text("NavDisableHighlight: %d, NavDisableMouseHover: %d", g.NavDisableHighlight, g.NavDisableMouseHover);
            ImGui::Text("NavWindowingTarget: '%s'", g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget->Name : "NULL");
            ImGui::Text("DragDrop: %d, SourceId = 0x%08X, Payload \"%s\" (%d bytes)", g.DragDropActive, g.DragDropPayload.SourceId, g.DragDropPayload.DataType, g.DragDropPayload.DataSize);
            ImGui::TreePop();
        }


        if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && show_window_begin_order)
        {
            for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
            {
                ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
                if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || !window->WasActive)
                    continue;
                char buf[32];
                ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%d", window->BeginOrderWithinContext);
                float font_size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
                ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = GetOverlayDrawList();
                overlay_draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(font_size, font_size), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
                overlay_draw_list->AddText(NULL, font_size, window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
            }
        }
    }
    ImGui::End();
}

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

// Include imgui_user.inl at the end of imgui.cpp to access private data/functions that aren't exposed.
// Prefer just including imgui_internal.h from your code rather than using this define. If a declaration is missing from imgui_internal.h add it or request it on the github.
#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL
#include "imgui_user.inl"
#endif

//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------